Identification of Polynucleotides Associated with a Sample

ABSTRACT

Disclosed herein are compositions and methods for sequencing, analyzing, and utilizing samples such as single samples. Also disclosed herein are compositions and methods for matching together two or more sequences from a sample. Also disclosed herein are compositions and methods for expressing and screening molecules of interest.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a division of U.S. patent application Ser. No.13/261,763, filed May 19, 2014, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 11,098,302,which application is a U.S. National Stage application of PCTapplication No. PCT/US2012/000221, filed Apr. 27, 2012, whichapplication claims priority to U.S. provisional patent application No.61/517,976, filed Apr. 28, 2011, U.S. provisional patent application No.61/575,652, filed Aug. 24, 2011, U.S. provisional patent application No.61/599,870, filed Feb. 16, 2012, and U.S. provisional patent applicationNo. 61/608,571, filed Mar. 8, 2012; the disclosures of which are herebyincorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

STATEMENT REGARDING FEDERALLY SPONSORED RESEARCH OR DEVELOPMENT

This invention was made with Government support under contractsAR058713, HV028183, and HV000242 awarded by the National Institutes ofHealth. The Government has certain rights in the invention.

REFERENCE TO AN ELECTRONIC SEQUENCE LISTING

The contents of the electronic sequence listing(STAN-815DIV_SEQ_LIST_Rev_Mar_2023_ST25.txt; Size: 893,430,792 bytes;and Date of Creation: Apr. 3, 2023) is herein incorporated by referencein its entirety.

BACKGROUND

Producing therapeutic monoclonal antibodies from human sources isbiologically and technically challenging. To date, several approacheshave been described, including generating human hybridomas, usingtransgenic mice expressing human immunoglobulins, and using humanimmunoglobulin phage display libraries.

Human hybridomas can be difficult to generate because human myelomafusion partners, unlike their mouse counterparts, are inefficient atgenerating hybridomas. Human hybridomas also have a tendency tospontaneously lose the expressed antibody genes after prolonged culture.Epstein-Barr virus (EBV) transformation immortalizes B cells, but onlyextremely small fractions of all of the EBV-transformed B cells areaffinity matured or recognize the target antigen. The generation ofhybridomas typically includes large screens to obtain therapeuticmonoclonal antibodies. None of the therapeutic monoclonal antibodiescurrently approved by the U.S. F.D.A. were created through thegeneration of human hybridomas or EBV transformation of B cells,attesting to the technical difficulties and challenges posed by thesemethods.

Phage display libraries of human antibody sequences represent anothermethod for producing therapeutic human monoclonal antibodies. Thismethod utilizes recombinant DNA technology to randomly express humanantibody heavy- and light-chain sequences together to enable screeningfor combinations that bind to the target antigen. However, this strategydoes not produce affinity-matured antibodies, and antibodies produced inthis way usually bind to antigen with low affinity and avidity.Successive mutation and selection/screening steps are then needed togenerate high-affinity antibodies.

Another way to produce therapeutic human monoclonal antibodies is bycreating or using transgenic mice that possess a human antibodyrepertoire. When immunized, such mice produce antibodies that target theimmunizing antigen, and hybridomas can then be generated for theproduction of therapeutic human monoclonal antibodies. Such transgenicmice are proprietary and not commonly available for use in generatinghuman antibodies.

Thus the inventors have identified a need for compositions, kits, andmethods that can, e.g., produce large numbers of affinity-matured humanantibodies, avoiding the need for laborious and time-consuminghumanization of an antibody, or the need to conduct extensive screens.The compositions, kits, and methods described herein address this need.In addition, the compositions, kits, and methods described herein arebroadly applicable outside the human antibody space and can be used in anumber of different applications including, e.g., matching together twoor more polynucleotides of interest that are derived from a singlesample and present in a library of polynucleotides.

SUMMARY

Disclosed herein is a composition comprising a polynucleotide, whereinthe polynucleotide comprises a first region and a second region, whereinthe first region comprises an expressed B cell variable immunoglobulinregion and the second region comprises at least one identificationregion, and wherein the first region is coupled to the second region.

In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulin region comprises a VDJregion of an IgG immunoglobulin nucleotide sequence isolated from anactivated human B cell greater than or equal to 8 m in diameter, andwherein the 5′ end of the immunoglobulin region is coupled to the 3′ endof the identification region. In some aspects, the composition iscomprised in a clonal family.

In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell,and wherein the B cell is an activated B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cellis a plasmablast. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolatedfrom a B cell, and wherein the B cell is a single B cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, andwherein the B cell is a single activated B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cellis a single activated B cell located in the blood of a subject. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, andwherein the B cell is a human activated B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cellis a memory B cell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cell is a plasma cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, andwherein the B cell is an antigen-specific B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a mammalian B cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a human B cell. Insome aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a mouse B cell.In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cellfrom a subject with a disease or condition of interest. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell from a subjectrecovering from or recovered from a disease or condition of interest. Insome aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell from asubject administered with at least one antigen of interest. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell from asubject administered with at least one antigen of interest and anadjuvant. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from aB cell located in the blood of a subject. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell located in the bonemarrow of a subject. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell located in the spleen of a subject. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell located inat least one lymph node of a subject. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell located in lymphoidtissue of a subject. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell located in the gut of a subject. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cell that isabout 8-20 m in diameter. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from an activated B cell that is 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or greater than 20 m in diameter. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cell that isabout 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 130, 140, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, orgreater than 350 μm² in area. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin regionis isolated from an activated B cell that is about 250, 268, 300, 400,500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, or greater than 4000μm³ in volume. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolatedfrom an activated B cell that has a diameter of 10% or greater in sizethan the median diameter of a control resting B cell. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cell that hasa diameter of 15% or greater in size than the median diameter of acontrol resting B cell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from an activated B cell that has a diameter of 20% or greaterin size than the median diameter of a control resting B cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cellcapable of secreting immunoglobulin. In some aspects, the immunoglobulinregion is isolated from a B cell in the gap 1 (G1), synthesis (S), gap 2(G2), or mitosis (M) phase of the cell cycle. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell is not in the gap 0 (G0)phase of the cell cycle. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell characterized as having an FSC greater than 1.2×of the FSC mean of resting B lymphocytes by flow cytometry. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cellcharacterized as having an FSC mean between 0.7-1.15× of the FSC mean ofhuman monocytes by flow cytometry. In some aspects, the immunoglobulinregion is isolated from a single CD19 positive B cell. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a single CD38 positive Bcell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from asingle CD27 positive B cell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin regionis isolated from a single CD20 negative B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a single CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38^(hi)B cell.

In some aspects, the 5′ end of the immunoglobulin region is coupled tothe 3′ end of the identification region.

In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulin region comprises a VDJregion of an immunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, thevariable immunoglobulin region comprises a VJ region of animmunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the variableimmunoglobulin region comprises a V, D, and/or J region of animmunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the variableimmunoglobulin region comprises a heavy and/or light chain of animmunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the variableimmunoglobulin region comprises an IgG, IgM, IgD, IgE, or IgAimmunoglobulin sequence. In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulinregion comprises a human IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, or IgG4 immunoglobulinsequence. In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulin region comprisesa mouse IgG1, IgG2a, IgG2b, or IgG3 immunoglobulin sequence. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is about 200-2000 nucleotides inlength. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is less than 200,200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400,1500, 1600, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, or greater than 2000 nucleotides inlength.

In some aspects, the identification region comprises a plurality ofidentification regions. In some aspects, the identification regioncomprises a plurality of identification regions, and wherein eachidentification region in the plurality has a distinct sequence. In someaspects, the identification region comprises at least one sampleidentification region and at least one plate identification region. Insome aspects, the identification region comprises a sequence distinctfrom the sequence of the immunoglobulin region. In some aspects, theidentification region is about 2-100 nucleotides in length. In someaspects, the identification region is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, orgreater than 100 nucleotides in length. In some aspects, theidentification region is 2-1,000 nucleotides in length. In some aspects,the identification region is equal to or greater than 100 nucleotides inlength. In some aspects, the identification region comprises acontiguous non-coding nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, theidentification region comprises a non-coding nucleotide sequence. Insome aspects, the identification region comprises a non-contiguous,non-coding nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the length of thesequence of the identification region is less than the length of thesequence of the immunoglobulin region.

In some aspects, a composition described herein can include a thirdregion, wherein the third region comprises an adapter region. In someaspects, the third region comprises an adapter region, and wherein thethird region is located between the first region and the second region.In some aspects, the third region comprises an adapter region, andwherein the adapter region comprises at least one G nucleotide locatedat its 3′ end.

In some aspects, the identification region is 2-100 nucleotides long andhas a sequence distinct from the immunoglobulin region sequence, andwherein the adaptor region comprises at least one G nucleotide at its 3′end and is located 3′ of the sample identification region and 5′ of theimmunoglobulin region, and wherein the immunoglobulin variable regionhas undergone hypermutation and differs from the germline sequence of anaïve B cell.

In some aspects, the composition is present in a container. In someaspects, a plurality of the compositions are present in a container. Insome aspects, a plurality of the compositions are present in a singlewell of a single plate comprising a plurality of wells.

In some aspects, the composition is in a library of compositions,wherein each composition is present in a separate container, whereineach composition comprises a polynucleotide comprising a first regionand a second region, wherein the first region comprises an expressed Bcell variable immunoglobulin region and the second region comprises anidentification region, wherein the first region is coupled to the secondregion, wherein the nucleotide sequence of each identification region ois distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the other identificationregions present in the library, and wherein the last nucleotidesequences of a plurality of variable immunoglobulin regions in thelibrary share at least 80-99% sequence identity.

In some aspects, the composition is comprised in a library comprising aplurality of polynucleotide compositions, wherein each composition ispresent in a separate container, wherein each composition comprises apolynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a first region anda second region, wherein the first region comprises an expressed B cellvariable immunoglobulin region and the second region comprises anidentification region, wherein the first region is coupled to the secondregion, and wherein the nucleotide sequence of each identificationregion is distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the otheridentification regions present in each separate container in thelibrary.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide composition library comprisinga plurality of polynucleotide compositions, wherein each composition ispresent in a separate container, wherein each composition comprises apolynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a first region anda second region, wherein the first region comprises an expressed B cellvariable immunoglobulin region and the second region comprises anidentification region, wherein the first region is coupled to the secondregion, and wherein the nucleotide sequence of each identificationregion is distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the otheridentification regions present in each separate container in thelibrary.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide of the plurality ispresent in a separate container, wherein each polynucleotide of theplurality comprises a first region and a second region, wherein thefirst region comprises an expressed B cell variable immunoglobulinregion and the second region comprises an identification region, whereinthe first region is coupled to the second region, wherein the nucleotidesequence of each identification region is distinct from the nucleotidesequence of the other identification regions present in the library, andwherein at least two variable immunoglobulin regions in the pluralityshare at least 80-99% sequence identity.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a clonalfamily of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide in the familycomprises a first region and a second region, wherein the first regioncomprises an expressed B cell variable immunoglobulin region and thesecond region comprises an identification region, wherein the firstregion is coupled to the second region, wherein the nucleotide sequenceof each identification region is distinct from the nucleotide sequenceof the other identification regions present in the family, and whereineach of the variable immunoglobulin regions in the family exhibit atleast 80-99% sequence identity. In some aspects, the library comprises aplurality of clonal families.

Also described herein is a clonal family of immunoglobulin sequenceswherein each sequence in the family is coupled to an identificationregion. In some aspects, each identification region is distinct from theother identification regions. In some aspects, the immunoglobulinsequences comprise heavy chain immunoglobulin sequences. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin sequences comprise light chainimmunoglobulin sequences. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin sequencescomprise heavy chain and light chain immunoglobulin sequences. In someaspects, one or more of the identification regions comprise a lightchain immunoglobulin sequence. In some aspects, one or more of theidentification regions comprise a heavy chain immunoglobulin sequence.

Also described herein is a set of two or more of the clonal familiesdescribed herein.

Also described herein is a set of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more of the clonal families describedherein.

Also described herein is a clonal family of immunoglobulin sequenceswherein each sequence in the family is operatively coupled to at leastone contiguous nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the immunoglobulinsequences comprise heavy chain immunoglobulin sequences and the at leastone contiguous nucleotide sequence comprises a light chainimmunoglobulin sequence. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin sequencescomprise light chain immunoglobulin sequences and the at least onecontiguous nucleotide sequence comprises a heavy chain immunoglobulinsequence.

Also described herein is a method of producing a clonal family ofimmunoglobulin sequences comprising obtaining a plurality ofimmunoglobulin sequences each having V, D, and/or J regions and eachcoupled to an identification region; and grouping two or more sequencesfrom the plurality to produce the clonal family wherein each sequence inthe clonal family is a mutated version of the same germlineimmunoglobulin sequence having a V, D, and/or J region or the germlineimmunoglobulin sequence having the V, D, and/or J region.

In some aspects, each identification region is distinct from the otheridentification regions.

Also described herein is a method of producing a clonal family ofimmunoglobulin sequences comprising obtaining a plurality ofimmunoglobulin sequences each having V, D, and/or J regions and eachcoupled to an identification region, and wherein each identificationregion is distinct from the other identification regions; removing oneor more identification regions; and grouping two or more sequences fromthe plurality to produce the clonal family wherein each sequence in theclonal family is a mutated version of the same germline immunoglobulinsequence having a V, D, and/or J region or the germline immunoglobulinsequence having the V, D, and/or J region.

Also described herein is a method of identifying a second cDNA coupledto a first identification region comprising selecting a first cDNAcoupled to the first identification region and identifying the secondcDNA based on the shared identity of the identification region coupledto each cDNA.

Also described herein is a method of producing a 3′ tail on a secondnucleotide sequence comprising obtaining a first nucleotide sequence andcontacting the first nucleotide sequence with a thermal stable RNase H⁻reverse transcriptase having template switching activity at less than50° C., wherein the contacting produces the 3′ tail and the secondnucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the first nucleotide sequence iscontacted at about less than 50, 49, 48, 47, 46, 45, 44, 43, 42, or lessthan 42° C. In some aspects, the first nucleotide sequence is contactedat 42° C. In some aspects, the first nucleotide sequence is contacted at45.5° C. In some aspects, the transcriptase is a Moloney Murine LeukemiaVirus (MMLV) RNase H⁻ reverse transcriptase. In some aspects, thetranscriptase is SuperScript III.

Also described herein is a method for determining the naturallyoccurring sequence of a first sequence of interest comprising obtaininga plurality of sequences related to the first sequence and each coupledto a first identification region, wherein each first identificationregion is identical, and wherein one or more of the sequences in theplurality is distinct from the naturally occurring sequence; andcomparing the sequences in the plurality to determine the naturallyoccurring sequence of the first sequence of interest. In some aspects,the plurality of sequences comprise immunoglobulin sequences. In someaspects, the plurality of sequences comprise immunoglobulin sequences.In some aspects, the plurality of sequences comprise immunoglobulinsequences. In some aspects, the plurality of sequences are each coupledto a second identification region and each second identification regionis identical. In some aspects, the first sequence of interest is animmunoglobulin sequence. In some aspects, the plurality of sequences areimmunoglobulin sequences.

Also described herein is a composition comprising a polynucleotidecomprising a first region and a second region, wherein the first regioncomprises a B cell-derived variable immunoglobulin region and the secondregion comprises an identification region, and wherein the first regionis coupled to the second region.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide composition library comprisinga plurality of polynucleotide compositions, wherein each composition ispresent in a separate container, wherein each composition comprises apolynucleotide comprising a B cell-derived variable immunoglobulinregion and an identification region, wherein the variable immunoglobulinregion is coupled to the identification region, wherein the nucleotidesequence of each identification region is distinct from the nucleotidesequence of the other identification regions present in each separatecontainer in the library.

Also described herein is a method for producing a polynucleotidecomposition, comprising: obtaining a polynucleotide comprising a firstregion, wherein the first region comprises an expressed B cell variableimmunoglobulin region associated with a subject; and generating thepolynucleotide composition comprising the first region and a secondregion by coupling the first region to the second region, wherein thesecond region comprises an identification region.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide comprises obtaining a Bcell associated with the subject and processing the cell to prepare thepolynucleotide. In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide comprisesreceiving the polynucleotide directly or indirectly from a third partythat has processed a B cell associated with the subject to prepare thepolynucleotide. In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide comprisesreceiving the polynucleotide directly or indirectly from a third partythat has solubilized a B cell associated with the subject to prepare thepolynucleotide. In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide comprisesobtaining a B cell using a flow cytometer. In some aspects, obtainingthe polynucleotide comprises obtaining a B cell using a microfluidicdevice.

In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulin region comprises a VDJregion of an IgG immunoglobulin nucleotide sequence isolated from anactivated human B cell greater than or equal to 8 m in diameter, andwherein the 5′ end of the immunoglobulin region is coupled to the 3′ endof the identification region. In some aspects, the composition iscomprised in a clonal family.

In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell,and wherein the B cell is an activated B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cellis a plasmablast. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolatedfrom a B cell, and wherein the B cell is a single B cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, andwherein the B cell is a single activated B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cellis a single activated B cell located in the blood of a subject. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, andwherein the B cell is a human activated B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cellis a memory B cell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell, and wherein the B cell is a plasma cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell, andwherein the B cell is an antigen-specific B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a mammalian B cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a human B cell. Insome aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a mouse B cell.In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cellfrom a subject with a disease or condition of interest. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell from a subjectrecovering from or recovered from a disease or condition of interest. Insome aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell from asubject administered with at least one antigen of interest. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell from asubject administered with at least one antigen of interest and anadjuvant. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from aB cell located in the blood of a subject. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell located in the bonemarrow of a subject. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell located in the spleen of a subject. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell located inat least one lymph node of a subject. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell located in lymphoidtissue of a subject. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell located in the gut of a subject. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cell that isabout 8-20 m in diameter. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from an activated B cell that is 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or greater than 20 m in diameter. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cell that isabout 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 130, 140, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, orgreater than 350 μm² in area. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin regionis isolated from an activated B cell that is about 250, 268, 300, 400,500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, or greater than 4000μm³ in volume. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolatedfrom an activated B cell that has a diameter of 10% or greater in sizethan the median diameter of a control resting B cell. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cell that hasa diameter of 15% or greater in size than the median diameter of acontrol resting B cell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from an activated B cell that has a diameter of 20% or greaterin size than the median diameter of a control resting B cell. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from an activated B cellcapable of secreting immunoglobulin. In some aspects, the immunoglobulinregion is isolated from a B cell in the gap 1 (G1), synthesis (S), gap 2(G2), or mitosis (M) phase of the cell cycle. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cell is not in the gap 0 (G0)phase of the cell cycle. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region isisolated from a B cell characterized as having an FSC greater than 1.2×of the FSC mean of resting B lymphocytes by flow cytometry. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a B cellcharacterized as having an FSC mean between 0.7-1.15× of the FSC mean ofhuman monocytes by flow cytometry. In some aspects, the immunoglobulinregion is isolated from a single CD19 positive B cell. In some aspects,the immunoglobulin region is isolated from a single CD38 positive Bcell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is isolated from asingle CD27 positive B cell. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin regionis isolated from a single CD20 negative B cell. In some aspects, theimmunoglobulin region is isolated from a single CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38^(hi)B cell.

In some aspects, the 5′ end of the immunoglobulin region is coupled tothe 3′ end of the identification region.

In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulin region comprises a VDJregion of an immunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, thevariable immunoglobulin region comprises a VJ region of animmunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the variableimmunoglobulin region comprises a V, D, and/or J region of animmunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the variableimmunoglobulin region comprises a heavy and/or light chain of animmunoglobulin nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the variableimmunoglobulin region comprises an IgG, IgM, IgD, IgE, or IgAimmunoglobulin sequence. In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulinregion comprises a human IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, or IgG4 immunoglobulinsequence. In some aspects, the variable immunoglobulin region comprisesa mouse IgG1, IgG2a, IgG2b, or IgG3 immunoglobulin sequence. In someaspects, the immunoglobulin region is about 200-2000 nucleotides inlength. In some aspects, the immunoglobulin region is less than 200,200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400,1500, 1600, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, or greater than 2000 nucleotides inlength.

In some aspects, the identification region comprises a plurality ofidentification regions. In some aspects, the identification regioncomprises a plurality of identification regions, and wherein eachidentification region in the plurality has a distinct sequence. In someaspects, the identification region comprises at least one sampleidentification region and at least one plate identification region. Insome aspects, the identification region comprises a sequence distinctfrom the sequence of the immunoglobulin region. In some aspects, theidentification region is about 2-100 nucleotides in length. In someaspects, the identification region is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, orgreater than 100 nucleotides in length. In some aspects, theidentification region is 2-1,000 nucleotides in length. In some aspects,the identification region is equal to or greater than 100 nucleotides inlength. In some aspects, the identification region comprises acontiguous non-coding nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, theidentification region comprises a non-coding nucleotide sequence. Insome aspects, the identification region comprises a non-contiguous,non-coding nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the length of thesequence of the identification region is less than the length of thesequence of the immunoglobulin region.

In some aspects, a composition described herein can include a thirdregion, wherein the third region comprises an adapter region. In someaspects, the third region comprises an adapter region, and wherein thethird region is located between the first region and the second region.In some aspects, the third region comprises an adapter region, andwherein the adapter region comprises at least one G nucleotide locatedat its 3′ end.

In some aspects, the identification region is 2-100 nucleotides long andhas a sequence distinct from the immunoglobulin region sequence, andwherein the adaptor region comprises at least one G nucleotide at its 3′end and is located 3′ of the sample identification region and 5′ of theimmunoglobulin region, and wherein the immunoglobulin variable regionhas undergone hypermutation and differs from the germline sequence of anaïve B cell.

In some aspects, the composition is present in a container. In someaspects, a plurality of the compositions are present in a container. Insome aspects, a plurality of the compositions are present in a singlewell of a single plate comprising a plurality of wells.

In some aspects, the composition is in a library of compositions,wherein each composition is present in a separate container, whereineach composition comprises a polynucleotide comprising a first regionand a second region, wherein the first region comprises an expressed Bcell variable immunoglobulin region and the second region comprises anidentification region, wherein the first region is coupled to the secondregion, wherein the nucleotide sequence of each identification region ois distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the other identificationregions present in the library, and wherein the last nucleotidesequences of a plurality of variable immunoglobulin regions in thelibrary share at least 80-99% sequence identity.

In some aspects, the composition is comprised in a library comprising aplurality of polynucleotide compositions, wherein each composition ispresent in a separate container, wherein each composition comprises apolynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a first region anda second region, wherein the first region comprises an expressed B cellvariable immunoglobulin region and the second region comprises anidentification region, wherein the first region is coupled to the secondregion, and wherein the nucleotide sequence of each identificationregion is distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the otheridentification regions present in each separate container in thelibrary.

Also described herein is a method for producing a polynucleotidecomposition, comprising: obtaining a B cell associated with a subject;isolating polynucleotides from the cell comprising an expressed B cellvariable immunoglobulin region; and generating the polynucleotidecomposition comprising the variable immunoglobulin region and anidentification region by coupling the variable immunoglobulin region tothe identification region.

Also described herein is a method for producing a polynucleotidecomposition, comprising: obtaining a polynucleotide comprising a Bcell-derived variable immunoglobulin region associated with a subject;and generating the polynucleotide composition comprising the variableimmunoglobulin region and an identification region by coupling thevariable immunoglobulin region to the identification region.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide comprises obtaining a Bcell and processing the cell to prepare the polynucleotide. In someaspects, obtaining the polynucleotide comprises receiving thepolynucleotide directly or indirectly from a third party that hasprocessed a B cell to prepare the polynucleotide.

Also described herein is a method for producing two or morepolynucleotide compositions, comprising: obtaining a polynucleotidelibrary comprising a plurality of polynucleotides associated with aplurality of samples obtained from one or more subjects, wherein one ormore polynucleotides comprises an expressed B cell variableimmunoglobulin region, wherein each sample is associated with a B cell,and wherein each polynucleotide associated with each sample is presentin a separate container; and generating two or more polynucleotidecompositions each comprising a polynucleotide from the plurality ofpolynucleotides and an identification region by coupling thepolynucleotide to the identification region, wherein the sequence ofeach identification region is distinct from the sequence of theidentification regions coupled to the other polynucleotides in thelibrary.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide library comprisesobtaining a plurality of B cells and processing the cells to prepare thepolynucleotide library. In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotidelibrary comprises receiving the polynucleotide library directly orindirectly from a third party that has processed a plurality of B cellsto prepare the polynucleotide library.

Also described herein is a method for producing two or morepolynucleotide compositions, comprising: obtaining a polynucleotidelibrary comprising a plurality of polynucleotides associated with aplurality of samples obtained from one or more subjects, wherein one ormore polynucleotides comprises a B cell-derived variable immunoglobulinregion, and wherein each polynucleotide associated with each sample ispresent in a separate container; and generating two or morepolynucleotide compositions each comprising a polynucleotide from theplurality of polynucleotides and an identification region by couplingthe polynucleotide to the identification region, wherein the sequence ofeach identification region is distinct from the sequence of theidentification regions coupled to the other polynucleotides in thelibrary.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide library comprisesobtaining a plurality of B cells and processing the cells to prepare thepolynucleotide library. In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotidelibrary comprises receiving the polynucleotide library directly orindirectly from a third party that has processed a plurality of B cellsto prepare the polynucleotide library.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide composition library comprisinga plurality of polynucleotide compositions, wherein each composition ispresent in a separate container, wherein each composition comprises asingle sample-derived cDNA region comprising the nucleotide C at the 3′end of the cDNA region and a sample identification-adapter regioncomprising a sample identification region coupled to an adapter region,wherein the nucleotide sequence of the sample identification region ofeach sample identification-adapter region is distinct from thenucleotide sequence of the sample identification region of the othersample identification-adapter regions present in each separate containerin the library, wherein the adapter region comprises the nucleotide G atthe 3′ end of the adapter region, and wherein the sampleidentification-adapter region is attached to the cDNA region by bindingbetween the C and G.

In some aspects, the cDNA region comprises an RNA polynucleotidehybridized to a DNA polynucleotide. In some aspects, the cDNA regioncomprises an mRNA polynucleotide hybridized to a cDNA polynucleotide. Insome aspects, the cDNA region comprises at least one C at the 3′ end andwherein the adapter region comprises at least one G at the 3′ end.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises a sampleidentification region, an adapter region, and a single sample-derivedcDNA region, wherein the 3′ end of the sample identification region iscoupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region, wherein the cDNA region iscoupled to the 3′ end of the adapter region, wherein the sequence of thesample identification region of each polynucleotide from a first singlesample is distinct from the sequence of the sample identification regionof the other polynucleotides in the library from one or more samplesdistinct from the first single sample, and wherein the sampleidentification region is double-stranded. In some aspects, eachpolynucleotide comprises a plurality of sample identifications regions.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises a universalprimer region, a sample identification region, an adapter region, and anamplicon region from a single sample, wherein the 3′ end of theuniversal primer region is coupled to the 5′ end of the sampleidentification region, wherein the 3′ end of the sample identificationregion is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region, wherein theamplicon region is operatively coupled to the adapter region, whereinthe sequence of the universal primer region is substantially identicalon each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides, and whereinthe sequence of the sample identification region of each polynucleotidefrom a first single sample is distinct from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the library fromone or more samples distinct from the first single sample.

In some aspects, the 5′ end of the amplicon region is coupled to the 3′end of the adapter region, wherein the universal primer region comprisesthe sequence CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593), and wherein theadapter region comprises at least one G. In some aspects, the sequenceof the universal primer region is not fully complementary to any humangene exon, and wherein the universal primer region has minimal secondarystructure that does not interfere with the adapter region. In someaspects, the universal primer region is the sequenceCACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593). In some aspects, the ampliconregion comprises a cDNA region comprising a cDNA nucleotide sequence. Insome aspects, the sequence of the sample identification region of eachpolynucleotide from a first single sample differs by at least 1nucleotide from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample. In some aspects, the sequence of thesample identification region of each polynucleotide from a first singlesample differs by at least 2 nucleotides from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the library fromone or more samples distinct from the first single sample. In someaspects, the sample identification region is at least 10 nucleotides inlength. In some aspects, the sample identification region is at least 1nucleotide in length. In some aspects, the sequence of each sampleidentification region is selected from Tables 2 and 7. In some aspects,the sequence of the adapter region comprises at least one G nucleotideat its 3′ end. In some aspects, the amplicon region comprises animmunoglobulin heavy chain amplicon sequence, an immunoglobulin lightchain amplicon sequence, a T cell receptor alpha amplicon sequence, or aT cell receptor beta amplicon sequence.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-3′, wherein A is a universal primer region, wherein B is asample identification region, wherein C is an adapter region, wherein Dis an amplicon region from a single sample, wherein the sequence of theuniversal primer region is substantially identical on eachpolynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides, and wherein thesequence of the sample identification region of each polynucleotide froma first single sample is distinct from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the library fromone or more samples distinct from the first single sample.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide comprising a universal primerregion, a sample identification region, an adapter region, and anamplicon region from a single sample, wherein the 3′ end of theuniversal primer region is coupled to the 5′ end of the sampleidentification region, wherein the 3′ end of the sample identificationregion is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region, and wherein theamplicon region is operatively coupled to the adapter region.

In some aspects, the 5′ end of the amplicon region is coupled to the 3′end of the adapter region, wherein the universal primer region comprisesCACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593), and wherein the adapter regioncomprises at least one G.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide comprising the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-3′, wherein A is a universal primer region, wherein B is asample identification region, wherein C is an adapter region, andwherein D is an amplicon region from a single sample.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises a first plateidentification region, a universal primer region, a sampleidentification region, an adapter region, and an amplicon region from asingle sample, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer region iscoupled to the 5′ end of the sample identification region, wherein the3′ end of the sample identification region is coupled to the 5′ end ofthe adapter region, wherein the first plate identification region isoperatively coupled to the universal primer region, wherein the ampliconregion is operatively coupled to the adapter region, wherein thesequence of the universal primer region is substantially identical oneach polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides, and wherein thesequence of the sample identification region of each polynucleotide froma first single sample is distinct from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the library fromone or more samples distinct from the first single sample.

In some aspects, the sequence of the first plate identification regionof each polynucleotide from a first set of single samples is distinctfrom the sequence of the first plate identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library from one or more single sample setsdistinct from the first set of single samples. In some aspects, thesequence of the first plate identification region of each polynucleotidefrom the first set of single samples differs by at least 1 nucleotidefrom the sequence of the first plate identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library from one or more single sample setsdistinct from the first set of single samples. In some aspects, thesequence of the first plate identification region of each polynucleotidefrom the first set of single samples differs by at least 2 nucleotidesfrom the sequence of the first plate identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library from one or more single sample setsdistinct from the first set of single samples. In some aspects, thefirst plate identification region is at least 10 nucleotides in length.In some aspects, the sequence of the first plate identification regionis selected from Tables 3 and 6. In some aspects, the 3′ end of thefirst plate identification region is coupled to the 5′ end of theuniversal primer region, wherein the 5′ end of the amplicon region iscoupled to the 3′ end of the adapter region, wherein the universalprimer region comprises CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593),wherein the adapter region comprises at least one G, wherein eachpolynucleotide further comprises a second plate identification region, afirst sequencing region, and a second sequencing region, wherein the 5′end of the second plate identification region is coupled to the 3′ endof the amplicon region, wherein the 3′ end of the first sequencingregion is coupled to the 5′ end of the first plate identificationregion, and wherein the 5′ end of the second sequencing region iscoupled to the 3′ end of the second plate identification region. In someaspects, the sequence of the second plate identification region isidentical to the sequence of the first plate identification region oneach polynucleotide. In some aspects, the sequence of the second plateidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first set of singlesamples is distinct from the sequence of the second plate identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the library from one or moresingle sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples. Insome aspects, the sequence of the second plate identification region ofeach polynucleotide from the first set of single samples differs by atleast 1 nucleotide from the sequence of the second plate identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the library from one or moresingle sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples. Insome aspects, the sequence of the second plate identification region ofeach polynucleotide from the first set of single samples differs by atleast 2 nucleotides from the sequence of the second plate identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the library from one or moresingle sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples. Insome aspects, the second plate identification region is at least 10nucleotides in length. In some aspects, the sequence of the second plateidentification region is selected from Tables 3 and 6. In some aspects,the first sequencing region comprisesGAGAGACTGACAGCGTATCGCCTCCCTCGCGCCATCAG (SEQ ID NO:796594). In someaspects, the second sequencing region comprisesCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAG (SEQ ID NO:796595).

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-E-3′, wherein A is a plate identification region, wherein Bis a universal primer region, wherein C is a sample identificationregion, wherein D is an adapter region, wherein E is an amplicon regionfrom a single sample, and wherein the sequence of the universal primerregion is substantially identical on each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides, and wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first single sampleis distinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample

Also described herein is a polynucleotide comprising a first plateidentification region, a universal primer region, a sampleidentification region, an adapter region, and an amplicon region from asingle sample, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer region iscoupled to the 5′ end of the sample identification region, wherein the3′ end of the sample identification region is coupled to the 5′ end ofthe adapter region, wherein the first plate identification region isoperatively coupled to the universal primer region, and wherein theamplicon region is operatively coupled to the adapter region.

In some aspects, the 3′ end of the first plate identification region iscoupled to the 5′ end of the universal primer region, wherein the 5′ endof the amplicon region is coupled to the 3′ end of the adapter region,wherein the universal primer region comprises CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQID NO:796593), wherein the adapter region comprises at least one G,wherein each polynucleotide further comprises a second plateidentification region, a first sequencing region, and a secondsequencing region, wherein the 5′ end of the second plate identificationregion is coupled to the 3′ end of the amplicon region, wherein the 3′end of the first sequencing region is coupled to the 5′ end of the firstplate identification region, and wherein the 5′ end of the secondsequencing region is coupled to the 3′ end of the second plateidentification region.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide comprising the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-E-3′, wherein A is a plate identification region, wherein Bis a universal primer region, wherein C is a sample identificationregion, wherein D is an adapter region, and wherein E is an ampliconregion from a single sample.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises a firstrestriction site region, a universal primer region, a sampleidentification region, an adapter region, an amplicon region from asingle sample, and a second restriction site region, wherein the 3′ endof the universal primer region is coupled to the 5′ end of the sampleidentification region, wherein the 3′ end of the sample identificationregion is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region, wherein the firstrestriction site region is operatively coupled to the universal primerregion, wherein the amplicon region is operatively coupled to theadapter region, wherein the second restriction site region isoperatively coupled to the amplicon region, wherein the sequence of theuniversal primer region is substantially identical on eachpolynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides, and wherein thesequence of the sample identification region of each polynucleotide froma first single sample is distinct from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the library fromone or more samples distinct from the first single sample.

In some aspects, the first restriction site region comprises one or morerestriction sites. In some aspects, the first restriction site regioncomprises one or more restriction sites selected from the groupconsisting of: NheI, XhoI, BstBI, EcoRI, SacII, BbvCI, PspXI, AgeI,ApaI, KpnI, Acc65I, XmaI, BstEII, DraIII, PacI, FseI, AsiSI and AscI. Insome aspects, the second restriction site region comprises one or morerestriction sites. In some aspects, the second restriction site regioncomprises one or more restriction sites selected from the groupconsisting of: NheI, XhoI, BstBI, EcoRI, SacII, BbvCI, PspXI, AgeI,ApaI, KpnI, Acc65I, XmaI, BstEII, DraIII, PacI, FseI, AsiSI and AscI. Insome aspects, the 3′ end of the first restriction site region is coupledto the 5′ end of the universal primer region, wherein the 3′ end of theadapter region is coupled to the 5′ end of the amplicon region, whereinthe 3′ end of the amplicon region is coupled to the 5′ end of the secondrestriction site region, wherein the universal primer region comprisesCACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593), and wherein the adapter regioncomprises at least one G.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-E-F-3′, wherein A is a first restriction site region, whereinB is a universal primer region, wherein C is a sample identificationregion, wherein D is an adapter region, wherein E is an amplicon regionfrom a single sample, wherein F is a second restriction site region,wherein the sequence of the universal primer region is substantiallyidentical on each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides,and wherein the sequence of the sample identification region of eachpolynucleotide from a first single sample is distinct from the sequenceof the sample identification region of the other polynucleotides in thelibrary from one or more samples distinct from the first single sample.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide for insertion into a vector,comprising a first restriction site region, a universal primer region, asample identification region, an adapter region, an amplicon region froma single sample, and a second restriction site region, wherein the 3′end of the universal primer region is coupled to the 5′ end of thesample identification region, wherein the 3′ end of the sampleidentification region is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region,wherein the first restriction site region is operatively coupled to theuniversal primer region, wherein the amplicon region is operativelycoupled to the adapter region, and wherein the second restriction siteregion is operatively coupled to the amplicon region.

In some aspects, the 3′ end of the first restriction site region iscoupled to the 5′ end of the universal primer region, wherein the 3′ endof the adapter region is coupled to the 5′ end of the amplicon region,wherein the 3′ end of the amplicon region is coupled to the 5′ end ofthe second restriction site region, wherein the universal primer regioncomprises CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593), and wherein theadapter region comprises at least one G.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide for insertion in a vector,comprising the sequence 5′-A-B-C-D-E-F-3′, wherein A is a firstrestriction site region, wherein B is a universal primer region, whereinC is a sample identification region, wherein D is an adapter region,wherein E is an amplicon region from a single sample, and wherein F is asecond restriction site region.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide adapter molecule, comprising auniversal primer region, a sample identification region, and an adapterregion, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer region is coupled tothe 5′ end of the sample identification region, and wherein the 3′ endof the sample identification region is coupled to the 5′ end of theadapter region. In some aspects, the universal primer region comprisesCACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593), and wherein the adapter regioncomprises at least one G.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide primer, comprising a universalprimer region and a plate identification region, and wherein the 3′ endof the plate identification region is coupled to the 5′ end of theuniversal primer region. In some aspects, the universal primer regioncomprises CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG (SEQ ID NO:796593), wherein the primerfurther comprises a sequencing region, and wherein the 3′ end of thesequencing region is coupled to the 5′ end of the plate identificationregion.

Also described herein is a vector comprising a polynucleotide describedherein. In some aspects, the vector comprises a plurality ofpolynucleotides. In some aspects, the vector is selected from the groupconsisting of: pEE6.4 and pEE12.4

Also described herein is an isolated host cell comprising a vectordescribed herein or a polynucleotide described herein. In some aspects,the host cell is selected from the group consisting of: CHO cells,CHO-K1 cells, CHO-S cells, NS0 cells, CHO cells that are dhfr-,CHO-dhfr-, DUKX-B11 CHO cells, and DG44 CHO cells.

Also described herein is a method for producing one or morepolynucleotides of interest, comprising: obtaining a cDNA librarycomprising a plurality of cDNAs associated with a plurality of samplesobtained from one or more subjects, wherein each cDNA is associated witha single sample in the plurality of samples, and wherein each cDNAassociated with each sample is present in a separate container; andadding an adapter molecule to the cDNA associated with each sample toproduce the one or more polynucleotides of interest, wherein the adaptermolecule comprises a sample identification region and an adapter region,wherein the 3′ end of the sample identification region is coupled to the5′ end of the adapter region, and wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each adapter molecule is distinct from thesequence of the sample identification region of the other adaptermolecules added to each cDNA in the library.

In some aspects, the method further includes allowing the 3′ end of theadapter region to attach to the 3′ end of each cDNA in the library toproduce the one or more polynucleotides of interest. In some aspects,obtaining the cDNA library comprises obtaining the plurality of samplesand processing the samples to prepare the cDNA library. In some aspects,the adapter molecule further comprises a universal primer region,wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer region is coupled to the 5′end of the sample identification region. In some aspects, each cDNAregion comprises an mRNA polynucleotide hybridized to a cDNApolynucleotide. In some aspects, each sample comprises a cell. In someaspects, the cell is a B cell. In some aspects, the B cell is aplasmablast, memory B cell, or a plasma cell. In some aspects, eachsample comprises a plurality of cells. In some aspects, obtaining thecDNA library comprises receiving the cDNA library directly or indirectlyfrom a third party that has processed the plurality of samples toprepare the cDNA library. In some aspects, the adaptor is added byannealing the adaptor to the ′3 tail of a cDNA generated during areverse transcription reaction. In some aspects, each cDNA comprises atleast one C nucleotide, wherein C is located at the 3′ end of each cDNA,wherein the adapter region comprises at least one G nucleotide, whereinG is located at the 3′ end of the adapter region, and wherein theadapter region is attached to each cDNA via binding between the G and C.In some aspects, the adapter molecule is single-stranded, and furthercomprising incorporating the adapter molecule into each cDNA by allowingan enzyme to make the adapter molecule double-stranded. In some aspects,the adapter molecule is incorporated into each cDNA to produce thepolynucleotide of interest by an MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptase.

Also described herein is a method of producing one or morepolynucleotides of interest for sequencing, comprising: obtaining apolynucleotide library comprising a plurality of polynucleotides,wherein each polynucleotide comprises a universal primer region, asample identification region, an adapter region, and an amplicon regionfrom a single sample, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer regionis coupled to the 5′ end of the sample identification region, whereinthe 3′ end of the sample identification region is coupled to the 5′ endof the adapter region, and wherein the amplicon region is operativelycoupled to the adapter region, wherein the sequence of the universalprimer region is substantially identical on each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides, and wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first single sampleis distinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample; and amplifying the polynucleotide librarywith a set of primers to produce the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for sequencing, wherein the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for sequencing comprises a first sequencing region, a firstplate identification region, a universal primer region, a sampleidentification region, an adapter region, an amplicon region from asingle sample, and a second sequencing region, wherein the 3′ end of theuniversal primer region is coupled to the 5′ end of the sampleidentification region, wherein the 3′ end of the sample identificationregion is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region, wherein the firstplate identification region is operatively coupled to the universalprimer region, wherein the amplicon region is operatively coupled to theadapter region, wherein the first sequencing region is located at the 5′end of the polynucleotide of interest, and wherein the second sequencingregion is located at the 3′ end of the polynucleotide of interest.

In some aspects, the method further includes sequencing the one or morepolynucleotides of interest. In some aspects, the method furtherincludes sequencing the one or more polynucleotides of interest with 454sequencing. In some aspects, the method further includes sequencing theone or more polynucleotides of interest with SMRT sequencing. In someaspects, the method further includes sequencing the one or morepolynucleotides of interest with SOLiD sequencing. In some aspects, themethod further includes sequencing the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest with SOLEXA sequencing. In some aspects, the method furtherincludes sequencing the one or more polynucleotides of interest withtSMS sequencing. In some aspects, the set of primers is selected fromthe primers shown in Tables 1 and 5. In some aspects, obtaining thepolynucleotide library comprises preparing the polynucleotide library ina laboratory. In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide librarycomprises receiving the polynucleotide library directly or indirectlyfrom a third party that has prepared the polynucleotide library.

Also described herein is a method for analyzing sequencing data,comprising: obtaining a dataset associated with a plurality ofpolynucleotides, wherein the dataset comprises sequencing data for theplurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides comprises a sample identification region,and wherein each sample identification region on each polynucleotide isunique to a single sample, wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first single sampleis distinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides from one ormore samples distinct from the first single sample; and analyzing thedataset to match together polynucleotides with identical sampleidentification regions, wherein a match indicates that thepolynucleotides originated from the same sample.

In some aspects, each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotidesfurther comprises a first plate identification region, wherein eachcombination of each first plate identification region and sampleidentification region on each polynucleotide is unique to a singlesample, wherein the sequence of the first plate identification region ofeach polynucleotide from a first set of single samples is distinct fromthe sequence of the first plate identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides from one or moresingle sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples, andfurther comprising analyzing the dataset to match togetherpolynucleotides with identical first plate identification regions andidentical sample identification regions, wherein a match between bothregions indicates that the polynucleotides originated from the samesample. In some aspects, obtaining the dataset comprises obtaining theplurality of polynucleotides and sequencing the plurality ofpolynucleotides to experimentally determine the dataset. In someaspects, obtaining the dataset comprises receiving the dataset directlyor indirectly from a third party that has sequenced the plurality ofpolynucleotides to experimentally determine the dataset. In someaspects, the dataset is stored on an electronic storage medium. In someaspects, the single sample is a single cell. In some aspects, the singlesample comprises a single cell. In some aspects, the single samplecomprises a single B cell. In some aspects, the single sample comprisesa plurality of B cells. In some aspects, further comprising selectingone or more polynucleotides for cloning.

Also described herein is a method for identifying a secondpolynucleotide of interest based on selection of a first polynucleotideof interest, comprising: obtaining a dataset associated with a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein the dataset comprises sequencing data forthe plurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides comprises a sample identification region,and wherein each sample identification region on each polynucleotide isunique to a single sample thereby associating each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides with a distinct single sample, wherein thesequence of the sample identification region of each polynucleotide froma first single sample is distinct from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the plurality ofpolynucleotides from one or more samples distinct from the first singlesample; and selecting a first polynucleotide of interest associated witha first single sample from the dataset and identifying a secondpolynucleotide of interest in the first single sample based on thesample identification region of the first polynucleotide of interest.

In some aspects, each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotidesfurther comprises a first plate identification region, wherein eachcombination of each first plate identification region and sampleidentification region on each polynucleotide is unique to a singlesample, wherein the sequence of the first plate identification region ofeach polynucleotide from a first set of single samples is distinct fromthe sequence of the first plate identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides from one or moresingle sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples, andfurther comprising identifying a second polynucleotide of interest inthe first single sample based on the sample identification region andfirst plate identification region of the first polynucleotide ofinterest. In some aspects, the first single sample comprises a B cell.In some aspects, the first single sample comprises a plurality of Bcells. In some aspects, the first single sample comprises a B cell,wherein the first polynucleotide of interest comprises an antibody heavychain nucleotide sequence, and wherein the second polynucleotide ofinterest comprises an antibody light chain nucleotide sequence. In someaspects, the first single sample comprises a B cell, wherein the firstpolynucleotide of interest comprises an antibody light chain nucleotidesequence, and wherein the second polynucleotide of interest comprises anantibody heavy chain nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, obtaining thedataset comprises obtaining the plurality of polynucleotides andsequencing the plurality of polynucleotides to experimentally determinethe dataset. In some aspects, obtaining the dataset comprises receivingthe dataset directly or indirectly from a third party that has sequencedthe plurality of polynucleotides to experimentally determine thedataset. In some aspects, the dataset is stored on an electronic storagemedium.

Also described herein is a method of producing one or morepolynucleotides of interest for cloning, comprising: obtaining apolynucleotide library comprising a plurality of polynucleotides,wherein each polynucleotide comprises a universal primer region, asample identification region, an adapter region, and an amplicon regionfrom a single sample, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer regionis coupled to the 5′ end of the sample identification region, whereinthe 3′ end of the sample identification region is coupled to the 5′ endof the adapter region, and wherein the amplicon region is operativelycoupled to the adapter region, wherein the sequence of the universalprimer region is substantially identical on each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides, and wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first single sampleis distinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample; and amplifying the polynucleotide librarywith a set of primers to produce the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for cloning, wherein the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for cloning comprises a first restriction site region, auniversal primer region, a sample identification region, an adapterregion, an amplicon region from a single sample, and a secondrestriction site region, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primerregion is coupled to the 5′ end of the sample identification region,wherein the 3′ end of the sample identification region is coupled to the5′ end of the adapter region, wherein the amplicon region is operativelycoupled to the adapter region, wherein the first restriction site regionis located at the 5′ end of the polynucleotide of interest, and whereinthe second restriction site region is located at the 3′ end of thepolynucleotide of interest.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide library comprisespreparing the polynucleotide library in a laboratory. In some aspects,obtaining the polynucleotide library comprises receiving thepolynucleotide library directly or indirectly from a third party thathas prepared the polynucleotide library.

Also described herein is a method of producing a molecule of interest,comprising: obtaining a host cell comprising a polynucleotide comprisinga sample identification region, an adapter region, and an ampliconregion from a single sample, wherein the 3′ end of the sampleidentification region is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapter region,and wherein the amplicon region is operatively coupled to the adapterregion; and culturing the host cell under conditions sufficient toproduce the molecule of interest. In some aspects, obtaining the hostcell comprises preparing the host cell comprising the polynucleotide ina laboratory. In some aspects, obtaining the host cell comprisesreceiving the host cell comprising the polynucleotide directly orindirectly from a third party that has prepared the host cell. In someaspects, the molecule of interest is a protein. In some aspects, themolecule of interest is an antibody. In some aspects, the molecule ofinterest is a human monoclonal antibody. In some aspects, furthercomprising collecting the molecule of interest.

Also described herein is a kit, comprising a polynucleotide, apolynucleotide library, a vector, or a host cell described herein andinstructions for use.

Also described herein is a method of linking and barcoding a pluralityof non-contiguous polynucleotide sequences of interest, said methodcomprising: (a) providing a plurality of cDNA molecules; (b) physicallylinking cDNA molecules of interest; and (c) adding a barcode sequence tothe cDNAs of interest prior to, during, or after physical linkage.

In some aspects, the physical linking is by ligation. In some aspects,the physical linking is by recombination. In some aspects, the physicallinking comprises using an overlap-extension sequence. In some aspects,the barcode sequence is located at one or both of the ends of thephysically linked cDNAs. In some aspects, the barcode sequence islocated in between the physically linked cDNAs. In some aspects, theligation is performed by annealing and ligation of compatible ends. Insome aspects, the compatible ends are a restriction site. In someaspects, the ligation is performed by blunt end ligation. In someaspects, the overlap-extension sequence is added during the course ofamplification using a primer comprising the overlap-extension tail.

In some aspects, the overlap-extension sequence is added during thecourse of reverse transcription using a primer comprising theoverlap-extension tail. In some aspects, the overlap-extension sequenceis added by annealing an adaptor to the 3′ tail of a cDNA generatedduring a reverse transcription reaction. In some aspects, the barcodesequence is added by ligation. In some aspects, the ligation isperformed by annealing and ligation of compatible ends. In some aspects,the compatible ends are a restriction site. In some aspects, theligation is performed by blunt end ligation of an adaptor comprising thebarcode sequence. In some aspects, the barcode sequence is added duringthe course of an amplification reaction using a primer comprising thebarcode sequence. In some aspects, the barcode sequence is added duringthe course of a reverse transcription reaction using a primer comprisingthe barcode sequence. In some aspects, the barcode sequence is added byannealing an adaptor to the 3′ tail of a cDNA generated during a reversetranscription reaction. In some aspects, the ′3 end of the cDNAcomprises at least one C nucleotide, and wherein the 3′ end of theadaptor comprises at least one G nucleotide, and wherein the adaptor isattached to each cDNA via binding between the C and G. In some aspects,the adaptor is single-stranded, and further comprising incorporating theadaptor into each cDNA by allowing an enzyme to make the adaptordouble-stranded. In some aspects, the adaptor is incorporated into eachcDNA by an MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptase. In some aspects, theoverlap-extension sequence comprises a barcode sequence. In someaspects, the polynucleotide sequences of interest comprise antibodyheavy and light chains. In some aspects, further comprising (d) adding asequencing region to the cDNAs of interest prior to, during, or afterphysical linkage. In some aspects, the sequencing region is added withan adaptor. In some aspects, further comprising (e) sequencing of thephysically linked cDNA molecules of interest using a NextGen sequencingplatform. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is 454sequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is SMRTsequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is SOLiDsequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is SOLEXAsequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is tSMSsequencing. In some aspects, the plurality of cDNA molecules is fromsingle samples contained in a plate with at least 6 wells, at least 12wells, at least 24 wells, at least 48 wells, at least 96 wells, at least384 wells, at least 1536 wells, or more wells. In some aspects, theplurality of cDNA molecules is from single samples contained in at leastone, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, twenty,thirty, forty, fifty, seventy five, one hundred, or more plates with atleast 96 wells each.

Also described herein is a method of linking and barcoding a pluralityof samples containing polynucleotide sequences of interest, said methodcomprising: (a) distributing the samples into a plurality of containers;(b) synthesizing polynucleotide sequences of interest using templatesfrom the sample, wherein said synthesis results in the addition of abarcode sequence; and (c) effecting linkage of the polynucleotidesequences of interest synthesized in step (b).

In some aspects, each sample comprises a cell. In some aspects, the cellis a B cell. In some aspects, the B cell is a plasmablast, memory Bcell, or a plasma cell. In some aspects, each sample comprises aplurality of cells. In some aspects, the polynucleotide sequences ofinterest comprise antibody heavy and light chains. In some aspects, saidsynthesis comprises an RT-PCR amplification. In some aspects, saidRT-PCR amplification is performed in a single step. In some aspects,said linkage of the polynucleotide of interest is performed during thecourse of an RT-PCR amplification using an overlap-extension primer. Insome aspects, further comprising (d) adding a sequencing region to thepolynucleotide sequences of interest prior to, during, or after barcodesequence addition or linkage. In some aspects, the sequencing region isadded with an adaptor. In some aspects, further comprising (e)sequencing of the linked polynucleotide sequences of interest using aNextGen sequencing platform. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencingplatform is 454 sequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencingplatform is SMRT sequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencingplatform is SOLiD sequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencingplatform is SOLEXA sequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencingplatform is tSMS sequencing. In some aspects, the plurality of samplesare single samples contained in a plate with at least 6 wells, at least12 wells, at least 24 wells, at least 48 wells, at least 96 wells, atleast 384 wells, at least 1536 wells, or more wells. In some aspects,the plurality of samples are single samples contained in at least one,two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, twenty, thirty,forty, fifty, seventy five, one hundred, two hundred, five hundred ormore plates with at least 96 wells each.

Also described herein is a method of linking and barcoding a pluralityof non-contiguous polynucleotide sequences of interest, said methodcomprising: (a) distributing cells into a plurality of containers toobtain isolated one or more cells; (b) amplifying polynucleotidesequences of interest using templates from said isolated one or morecells, wherein said amplification results in the addition of a barcodesequence; and (c) effecting linkage of the polynucleotide sequences ofinterest amplified in step (b).

In some aspects, the nucleotide sequences of interest comprise antibodyheavy and light chains. In some aspects, said amplification comprises anRT-PCR amplification. In some aspects, said RT-PCR amplification isperformed in a single step. In some aspects, said linkage of thenucleotide of interest is performed during the course of an RT-PCRamplification using an overlap-extension primer. In some aspects,further comprising (d) adding a sequencing region to the polynucleotidesequences of interest prior to, during, or after barcode sequenceaddition or linkage. In some aspects, the sequencing region is addedwith an adaptor. In some aspects, further comprising (e) sequencing ofthe linked polynucleotide sequences of interest using a NextGensequencing platform. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is454 sequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is SMRTsequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is SOLiDsequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is SOLEXAsequencing. In some aspects, the NextGen sequencing platform is tSMSsequencing. In some aspects, the one or more cells are contained in aplate with at least 6 wells, at least 12 wells, at least 24 wells, atleast 48 wells, at least 96 wells, at least 384 wells, at least 1536wells, or more wells. In some aspects, the one or more cells arecontained in at least one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,nine, ten, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, seventy five, one hundred, ormore plates with at least 96 wells each.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-3′, wherein A is a sample identification region (barcodesequence), wherein B is a first cDNA region from a single sample,wherein C is a linker region, wherein D is a second cDNA region from thesame single sample, and wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first single sampleis distinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-3′, wherein A is a first cDNA region from a single sample,wherein B is a linker region, wherein C is a second cDNA region from thesame single sample, wherein D is a sample identification region (barcodesequence), and wherein the sequence of the sample identification regionof each polynucleotide from a first single sample is distinct from thesequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinct fromthe first single sample.

Also described herein is a polynucleotide library comprising a pluralityof polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide comprises the sequence5′-A-B-C-3′, wherein A is a first cDNA region from a single sample,wherein B is a linker region comprising a sample identification region(barcode sequence), wherein C is a second cDNA region from the samesingle sample, and wherein the sequence of the sample identificationregion of each polynucleotide from a first single sample is distinctfrom the sequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library from one or more samples distinct fromthe first single sample.

In some aspects, said first cDNA region comprises an antibody heavychain and said second cDNA region comprises an antibody light chain. Insome aspects, the library comprises at least 2, at least 3, at least 10,at least 30, at least 100, at least 300, at least 1000, at least 3000,at least 10,000, at least 30,000, at least 100,000, at least 300, 000,at least 1,000,000, at least 3,000,000, at least 10,000,000, at least30,000,000, or more members. In some aspects, the library comprises atleast 2, at least 3, at least 10, at least 30, at least 100, at least300, at least 1000, at least 3000, at least 10,000, at least 30,000, ormore genes of a cell sample's whole transcriptome. In some aspects, thelibrary comprises at least 1, at least 2, at least 3, at least 10, atleast 30, at least 100, at least 300, at least 1000, at least 10,000, atleast 100,000, at least 1,000,000, at least 10,000,000, at least100,000,000 or more of the different antibody species present in theblood of an individual. In some aspects, the antibodies are expressed byplasmablasts, plasma cells, memory B cells, long-lived plasma cells,other B lineage cells or combinations thereof.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEVERAL VIEWS OF THE DRAWINGS

These and other features, aspects, and advantages will become betterunderstood with regard to the following description, and accompanyingdrawings, where:

FIG. 1 . B cell differentiation. Mature naive B cells are CD19⁺ and canbe activated to proliferate and differentiate upon antigenic challengein secondary lymphoid tissues such as lymph nodes and spleen. Theyproliferate and differentiate in either extra-follicular foci or ingerminal centers. Differentiating B cells in extrafollicular focitypically differentiate to become short-lived plasma cells and usuallyreside in the secondary lymphoid tissue they originated from. B cellsdifferentiating in germinal centers can either become memory B cells,which can be further stimulated to differentiate via subsequentantigenic challenge, or become plasmablasts that have the potential tobecome long-lived plasma cells. These plasmablasts can enter thecirculation and are trafficked to the various tissues in whichlong-lived plasma cells reside, such as the bone marrow, mucosal tissues(for IgA+ plasma cells) and inflamed tissues. Some transiting plasmacells are also present in blood. All of the above mentioned cell typescan also be found in circulation in the blood.

FIG. 2 . Schematic of high-throughput sequencing, cloning, andexpression of paired genes from single sorted cells. Desired cellpopulations are single cell sorted based on their expression of cellsurface markers into 96-well PCR plates. During reverse transcription,barcoded (sample-IDs) DNA adaptor molecules are added onto synthesized1^(st) strand cDNA utilizing the template-switching property of MMLV H⁻reverse transcriptases. RT products from each plate are then pooledseparately and 2 rounds of PCR performed to amplify specific ampliconregions (amplicons). PCR is done with primers with 5′ flanking barcodesto add plate identification regions (plate-IDs) to amplicons. Ampliconsare then sent for 454 sequencing (a). Obtained sequences are subset byplate-IDs and sample-IDs before sequence assembly. Amplicons from thesame cell are paired together using plate-IDs and sample-IDs and desiredclones selected for cloning and expression (b). Specific amplicons canbe amplified from each pooled plate of amplicons by using cloningprimers that are complementary to the sample-ID of that particularamplicon. Cloning primers also add restriction site regions (RS) whichare then used to insert the clone into mammalian expression vectors fordownstream expression and screening. In this example, the amplicons areimmunoglobulin (Ig) heavy and light chain genes which code for antibody.Expressed antibodies can then be used for downstream screening (c). 5′RS and 3′ RS: 5′ and 3′ restriction sites respectively. HC and LC: heavychain and light chain respectively.

FIG. 3 . Schematic of reverse transcription and PCR to add sample-IDsand plate-IDs to Ig amplicons. Reverse transcription (RT) was performedwith Superscript II or Superscript III, which are MMLV H⁻ reversetranscriptases. These transcriptases have a 3′ tailing activity and adda couple of cytosines to the 3′ end of newly synthesized 1⁴ strandcDNAs. An oligonucleotide ending with -GGG (an adapter region) cancomplement base-pair to this and the reverse transcriptase then switchestemplate to the oligonucleotide and carry on transcription, resulting inthe incorporation of the sample-ID adaptor to the 3′ end of the cDNA(a). As the sample-ID adaptor contains a 5′ invariable sequence(universal primer region), forward primers complementary to thissequence can be used for subsequent PCRs. The 1^(st) PCR was done withFw Long Primer1, Fw Short Primer1 and GSP1. The Fw Long Primer1 has a 5′flanking region containing a plate-ID barcode and the 454 TitaniumPrimer A for 454 sequencing, which were incorporated into the amplicon.The Fw Short Primer1 has a Tm similar to the GSP1 primer and wasincluded to slightly increase the efficiency of the PCR. Each GSP1(gene-specific primer 1) has a complementary gene specific sequence andwas used to amplify a specific gene. Here, the gene-specific primers arefor the kappa and lambda light chains and the gamma heavy chain toamplify these genes. Sequences for primers are shown (b). The second PCRis a nested PCR and was done with Fw Primer2, Long GSP2 Primer and RVPrimer2. Sequences for primers are as shown. Long GSP2 Primer has a 5′flanking region containing a plate-ID barcode and the 454 TitaniumPrimer B for 454 sequencing, which were incorporated into the amplicon.Long GSP2 primers again amplify the kappa and lambda light chains andthe gamma heavy chain. The RV Primer2 has a Tm similar to Fw Primer2 andwas included to slightly increase PCR efficiency. Sequences for primersare shown. After RT and 2 PCRs, each amplicon will have 454 TitaniumPrimers A and B for 454 sequencing, two identical plate-IDs, eachidentifying the amplicon as coming from a particular single cell-sorted96-well plate and a sample-ID determining its position on the 96-wellplate (c). From left to right and top to bottom: SEQ ID NOs: 796593,796594, 796593, 796061, 796062, 796064, 796063, 796065, 796595, 796365,796595, 796369, 796595, 796372, and 796069.

FIG. 4 . Successful amplification of single-cell sorted B cells usingsequencing and cloning primers. A 96-well plate of single-cell sorted Bcells were reverse transcribed, pooled and amplified as shown in theschematics in FIG. 1 a and FIG. 2 . Bands for the kappa light chain,lambda light chain, and gamma heavy chain were visualized on an agarosegel at the expected sizes: ˜600 bp for kappa and lambda and ˜700 bp forgamma (a). DNA chromatogram of Sanger sequencing of the gamma heavychain from the 5′ end showed a ‘variable’ sequence corresponding tomultiple sample-IDs for the pooled plate (b). Sanger sequencing of thekappa light chain from the 3′ end showed a ‘variable’ sequence after theconstant region and beginning at the VJ junction corresponding tomultiple light chains (c). A cloning primer pair specific for well A1was used to amplify the kappa light chain. Sanger sequencing showed thatin contrast to (c), only one clean sequence was amplified (d). Allresults are representative of the other amplified immunoglobulin genes.M: 100 bp DNA ladder, K: kappa light chain, L: lambda light chain, G:gamma heavy chain. SEQ ID NO: 796627

FIG. 5 . CCP+ RA patients have peripheral blood plasmablasts percentagesthat correlated with disease activity and secreted anti-citrullineautoantibodies. Plasmablasts are CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺ and were firstgated on CD3− cells then gated as shown (a). Peripheral blood wasobtained from consented RA patients and plasmablasts plotted as apercentage of total PBMCs. A Mann-Whitney test showed that CCP+ RApatients possess significantly higher (p<0.05) plasmablast percentagesthan CCP− RA patients (b). Plasmablast percentages were significantlycorrelated with clinical disease activity index (CDAI) in CCP+ patientsby linear regression. Linear regression was performed on log transformedplasmablasts percentages to achieve normality of dataset (c). CCP+plasmablasts were also either mock-sorted or underwent aplasmablast-depletion sort with >95% elimination of plasmablasts (d) andcultured for 7 days in RPMI supplemented with 10% FBS. Supernatant werecollected and analyzed for anti-citrullinated peptide reactivity withLuminex. Mean fluorescence intensities for antibody reactivity againsteach peptide were plotted as peptide reactivities (e).

FIG. 6 . Strategy for selection and screening of clones for neutralizingantibodies. Paired LC and HC antibody sequences are obtained frombioinformatic analysis of 454-sequenced amplicons and grouped intoclonal families based on their LC and HC V(D)J usage. The clone(s)occurring at the highest frequency in each clonal family will beselectively cloned, expressed, and screened for binding to the targetantigen of interest using ELISA. Representative clone(s) from the entireclonal family which secrete binding antibodies will then be cloned andexpressed for screening of neutralizing antibodies. Each antibodydiagram represents a clone.

FIG. 7 . Characterization of immunoglobulin heavy chain V(D)J sequencesand clonal families derived from individual human subjects. Blood wasobtained from humans with the following conditions: (i) chronicStaphylococcus aureus osteomyelitis in a human who was not takingantibiotics (due to non-compliance) but whose immune system effectivelysuppressed the infection and prevented fulminant infection for severalmonths off antibiotics; (ii) a human with acute and fulminantStaphylococcus aureus bacteremia requiring transfer to the intensivecare unit and aggressive intravenous antibiotic treatment; (iii) 3humans with chronic active rheumatoid arthritis (RA) (with diseaseactivity scores (DAS)>5); (iv) a human 7 days following receipt of thetrivalent influenza vaccine (Fluzone, Sanofi); and (v) a human withmetastatic lung adenocarcinoma who was expected to expire but followingchemotherapy went into a state of long-term non-progression. In allcases, the human patients exhibited elevations in their peripheral bloodplasmablast levels (ranging from 1.5-6% of peripheral blood B cellsbeing plasmablasts [CD20⁻CD19⁺CD38⁺⁺CD27⁺], with levels in normal humansbeing 0.1-0.2% of peripheral blood B cells), indicating an activatedimmune response. Plasmablasts were single-cell sorted into 96-wellplates, and barcoding and 454 sequencing of the expressed immunoglobulincDNA was performed as described in FIGS. 2 and 3 . Bioinformaticanalysis was used to pair the heavy and light chain immunoglobulinsexpressed by individual plasmablasts. Pie chart diagrams of the percentof heavy chain V(D)J usage for the individual patients arepresented—each wedge represents the percent of plasmablasts expressing adistinct heavy chain V(D)J sequence rearrangement.

FIG. 8 . Clustering of immunoglobulin heavy chain V(D)J sequences fromhuman subjects demonstrates clonal families and clonal subfamilies. Theimmunoglobulin heavy chain sequence datasets generated in the studiesdescribed in FIG. 7 were subject to hierarchical clustering using theprogram Clustal. Hierarchical clustering yielded evolutionary treesrepresenting the antibody response in each individual human.

FIG. 9 . Schematic of RT and PCR to add sample-IDs and plate-IDs to anyamplicon and downstream utility. Individual samples comprising eithersingle cells or multiple cells are separately reverse transcribed inwells. Reverse transcription adds a sample-ID and a 5′ universal primerregion to all 1^(st) strand cDNA as previously described (a). cDNA fromall wells of a plate are pooled and undergo 2 rounds of PCR. The 1^(st)PCR uses Fw Short Primer1, Fw Long Primer 1 as forward primers and addsa 454 Titanium Primer A for 454 sequencing and a plate-ID to the 5′ endof the sequence. The Fw Short Primer1 has a Tm similar to the GSP1primer and was included to slightly increase the efficiency of the PCR.Each GSP1 primer has a gene specific sequence and can specificallyamplify that gene. Sequences for primers are shown. Note that regardlessof which gene is amplified, the forward primers remain constant (b). Thesecond PCR is a nested PCR. Fw Primer 2 is the forward primer, and thereverse primers are Long GSP2 Primer and Rv Primer 2. Long GSP2 isgene-specific and only amplifies a specific gene. It also adds the 454Titanium Primer B for 454 sequencing and a plate-ID to the 3′ end of theamplicon. RV Primer2 has a Tm similar to Fw Primer2 and was included toslightly increase PCR efficiency. Sequences for primers are shown. AfterRT and 2 PCRs, amplicons from all plates are pooled and 454-sequenced.The combination of plate-IDs and sample-IDs allows for identification ofsequences that originate from the same sample. This allows forcomparison of sequences between multiple samples. Sequences from thesame origin may also be expressed in pairs to obtain the exact proteinfrom the original cell, such as the T-cell receptor and other Igisotypes such as IgM, IgE and IgA (c). From left to right and top tobottom: SEQ ID NOs: 796593, 796594, 796593, 796061, 796065, 796069, and796595.

FIG. 10 . Gene-specific primers for reverse transcription (RT-GSPs) ofimmunoglobulin heavy and light chains. RT-GSPs were used instead ofoligo(dT)s as primers in reverse transcription of heavy and light chaingenes. cDNA were then amplified by PCR and visualized on an agarose gel.RT-GSP primers IgKC_v3(a), IgLC_v5, IgLC_v6, IgLC_v7 and IgLC_v8 inlanes 1-4 respectively (b), IgHGC_v10, IgHGC_v11, IgHGC_v13 and IgGC_v15in lanes 1-4 respectively (c) and IgHGC_v16 (d). KC, LC and GC in theprimer names indicate that the primer is specific for the kappa chain,lambda chain and gamma heavy chain respectively. White bands in gelphotos indicate where non-relevant lanes had been cropped out.

FIG. 11 . Adaptor region sequences. RNA was reversed transcribed witholigonucleotides comprising a universal primer region and an adaptorregion at the 3′ terminal end. cDNA was then amplified using theuniversal primer region sequence as a forward primer and gene-specificsequences as reverse primers. Amplified products were visualized on anagarose gel. Adaptor region consists of G (a), GGGGG and rGrGrG in lanes1 and 2 respectively (b). rG indicates RNA nucleotides instead of DNAnucleotides.

FIG. 12 . Universal primer sequences. RNA was reverse transcribed witholigonucleotides comprising a universal primer sequence and an adaptorregion at the 3′ terminal. cDNA were then amplified by PCR using aforward primer complementary to the universal primer region and areverse primer complementary to the gene specific sequence. Univ_seq_4(a), univ_seq_5 (b) and univ_seq_f (c). Vertical white bands in gelphotos indicate where non-relevant lanes have been cropped out.Otherwise lanes belong to the same gel photo.

FIG. 13 . Gene-specific primer sequences for 1st PCR reaction.Gene-specific reverse primers used in amplification of sequences in thefirst PCR reaction. Either the 1st PCR reaction or the subsequent 2ndnested PCR products were run and visualized on an agarose gel. Reverseprimers used are IgKC_v4, IgLC_v5, IgHGC_v13 on lanes 1-3 respectively(a), K_GSP1, L_GSP1, G_GSP1 on lanes 1-3 respectively (b), K_GSP1c,L_GSP1c on lanes 1-2 respectively (c), G_GSP1 (d), L_GSP1d, G_GSP1g onlanes 1-2 respectively (e), G_GSP1h, G_GSP1k, L_GSP1f, L_GSP1g on lanes1-4 respectively (f), G_GSP1d (g) L_GSP1h-o on lanes 1-8 respectively(h), G_GSP1m-q and G_GSP1t on lanes 1-6 respectively (i). K, L and G inthe primer names indicate that the primers are specific for the kappa,lambda and gamma immunoglobulin constant regions respectively. Each gelstarts with a lane marker on the left followed by sample lanes. Whitebars between lanes on the same gel photo indicate where non-relevantlanes in-between have been cropped out.

FIG. 14 . Gene-specific sequences for the 2nd PCR reaction.Gene-specific reverse primers used in amplification of sequences in the2nd PCR reaction. PCR products were run and visualized on an agarosegel. Reverse primers used are K_GSP2, L_GSP2, G_GSP2 in lanes 1-3respectively (a), K_GSP2v2a, K_GSP2v2b, L_GSP2v2 in lanes 1-3respectively (b), K_GSP2v2c, K_GSP2v2c, G_GSP2v2c1, G_GSP2v2c2 in lanes1-4 respectively (c), K_GSP2v2d-f in lanes 1-3 respectively (d),K_GSP2v2g, L_GSP2v2d and G_GSP2b in lanes 1-3 respectively (e). K, L, Gin the primer names indicates that they are specific for the kappa,lambda and gamma immunoglobulin constant regions respectively. Each gelstarts with a lane marker on the left followed by sample lanes. Whitebars between lanes on the same gel photo indicate that non-relevantlanes in-between have been cropped out.

FIG. 15 . Potential locations of barcode sequences to identify a linkedpair of polynucleotide sequences. The schematic illustrates the physicallinkage of two nucleic acid segments, A and B (e.g., two cDNAs). Abarcode (BC) is appended to any one of the ends, or both ends, oranywhere in the sequence linking A and B. In one embodiment, A and Brepresent immunoglobulin heavy and light chain sequences.

FIG. 16 . Different types of overlap-extension tails. The bold linecorresponds to a gene specific sequence and the thin line corresponds tothe overlapping tail. As indicated, the overlap can be entirely due tothe overlap of the primer sequence or else due to partial or totaloverlap with a gene specific sequence. As indicated, the overlap canalso contain a barcode sequence. Structures I, II, and III indicatepotential locations of the overlaps.

FIG. 17 . Schematic overview of external barcode addition to a linkedpair of antibody light and heavy chains. Shown are the products of areverse transcription reaction. The LC gene specific PCR primer containsa bar code, sequencing primer site, and restriction site (RE1) to allowthese elements to be added to the 3′ end of the resulting PCR product.Primers specific for LC and HC with overlap-extensions and encoding arestriction site (RE3) are indicated. A reverse primer specific for HCcontaining a sequencing primer site and a restriction site (RE2) is alsoindicated. Amplification results in a nucleic acid with the linkedstructure shown with a bar code at one end.

FIG. 18 . Schematic overview of internal barcode addition to a linkedpair of antibody light and heavy chains. Shown is a method of usingadaptors containing extension overlap and barcode sequences to joincDNAs resulting from reverse transcription of mRNAs using oligo (dT)primers. The method shown takes advantage of the 3′ tailing and templateswitching activities of reverse transcriptase to add overlap-extensionsequences to the cDNAs to be joined. In this example, one of theadaptors adds both a barcode and overlap-extension sequence to one ofthe cDNAs to be joined, while only the overlap-extension sequence isadded to the other cDNA to be joined. After amplification, a linkedstructure carrying one barcode sequence in between the linked cDNAs isgenerated.

FIG. 19 . Schematic overview of addition of two internal barcodes to alinked pair of antibody light and heavy chains using universal sequenceoverlap-extension primers. Shown is a method of using adaptorscontaining both a universal sequence and a barcode to join cDNAsresulting from reverse transcription of mRNAs using oligo (dT) primers.In this example, PCR primers to the universal sequence add anoverlap-extension sequence to each of the cDNAs to be joined. After theamplification scheme shown, a linked structure carrying two barcodes inbetween the linked cDNAs is generated.

FIG. 20 . Schematic overview of addition of two internal barcodes to alinked pair of antibody light and heavy chains using overlap-extensionadaptors. Shown is a method of using adaptors containing both a barcodeand overlap-extension sequence to join cDNAs resulting from reversetranscription of mRNAs using gene specific primers (GSP). In thisexample, the overlap extension sequences on the adaptors added to eachof the cDNAs allow for joining of the cDNAs by annealing. After theamplification scheme shown, a linked structure carrying two barcodes inbetween the linked cDNAs is generated

FIG. 21 . Use of barcoded GSPs during reverse transcription incombination with template-switch added adaptors. RT was performed withtotal PBMC RNA and univ_seq_2 template-switching oligo and IgKC_v3 GSP(lanes 1-2) and IgLC_v5 GSP (lanes 3-4) with an additional 5′ flankingsequence, of which the first part is the Fixed_PCR3 sequence, and thelast 8 bp is a barcode. Aliquots of the RT reaction were used insubsequent PCR reactions, with either a 5′ V_(K) (lane 1) or V_(L) (lane3) primer or the Univ_seq_2 (lanes 2 and 4) as the 5′ primer, andFixed_PCR3 as the 3′ primer. The PCR products in lanes 2 and 4 ran as asmear, showing that the barcoded GSPs are non-specific in the RTreaction, and are not suitable for use with template-switch addedadaptors. From top to bottom: SEQ ID NOs: 796319 and 796622-796626.

FIG. 22 . Gating scheme for flow cytometry sorting of single cells into96-well plates. Plasmablasts are defined as CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺.Single PBMCs were first gated on based on their FSC and SSC profile (notshown). Live CD19⁺ B cells were then gated on (left panel), and furthernarrowed down to CD20− B cells (2^(nd) panel from left), and refined toCD27⁺CD38⁺⁺ cells. From this, IgG⁺ plasmablasts were determined as IgA⁻and IgM⁻, as IgG⁺ plasmablasts do not express cell surface IgG. Thispopulation was single cell sorted into 96-well plates.

FIG. 23 . Plasmablasts are present in people undergoing immunologicalchallenge. Plasmablasts constituted 0.15% of peripheral blood B cells ina representative healthy donor, and range from 0.5%-16.4% in peopleundergoing a variety of immunological challenges including infections(Staphylococcus aureus and Clostridium difficile infections), cancer (apatient with metastatic melanoma who was a non-progressor for >4 yearsdue to treatment with ipilimumab and a patient with metastaticadenocarcinoma of the lung who was a long-term non-progressor for >3years after receipt of chemotherapy), and vaccination (receipt ofinfluenza virus vaccine). This shows that plasmablasts are elevated inand obtainable from a range of subjects mounting immune responses ofinterest for isolation of individual plasmablasts for high-throughputsequencing of the antibody repertoire to characterize the active humoralresponse.

FIG. 24 . Expressed recombinant antibodies were secreted for 2-3 weeksin transient transfections. As outlined in FIG. 2 , the paired heavy andlight chain immunoglobulin cDNA were cloned by PCR and co-transfectedinto 293T cells at the 48-well scale. Supernatants were collected everyother day for 18 days. Anti-human IgG ELISA was performed to determinethe amount of secreted antibodies in the collected supernatants, and theconcentration of the antibodies in the supernatants of a panel ofindividual co-transfectants are graphed. Secretion tended to peak by day9 and was substantially diminished by day 18.

FIGS. 25A-25C. Paired antibody heavy chain (HC) and light chain (LC)from an influenza vaccinated human exhibit variation across thecomplement determining regions (CDRs). FIG. 25A: Partial dendrogram offlu antibodies. After pairing of heavy and light chains, a multiplesequence alignment was generated for heavy chains, and another multiplesequence alignment was generated for light chains. Both multiplesequence alignments were generated using Clustalw2 2.1 with defaultparameters. The two alignments were concatenated together and used tobuild a tree in CLC Sequence Viewer v. 6.5.2 using the neighbor joiningmethod with 100 bootstrap replicates. FIG. 25B: Heavy chain CDRs for aclonal family from flu-vaccinated patient. Identifiers in figurecorrespond to sequence names in Sequence Listing as follows:51.A11.1=NA.51.11.A11.1.454.heavy.3.nb-aa,49.A08.1=NA.49.8.A08.1.454.heavy.3.nb-aa, 51.D07.1 is the amino acidsequence obtained by translating NA.51.40.D07.1.454.heavy.3.nb inframe 1. From top to bottom: SEQ ID NOs: 796628-796639. FIG. 25C: Lightchain CDRs for a clonal family from flu-vaccinated patient. Identifiersin figure correspond to sequence names in Sequence Listing as follows:51.A11.1=NA.51.11.A11.1.454.light.4.nb-aa,49.A08.1=NA.49.8.A08.1.454.light.4.nb-aa,51.D07.1=NA.51.40.D07.1.454.light.4.zerom50-aa. From top to bottom: SEQID NOs: 796640-796651.

FIG. 26 . Recombinant anti-influenza antibodies bound to Fluzoneinfluenza virus vaccine. Analysis of the evolutionary tree (FIG. 8 ) ofthe heavy and light chain antibody repertoire dataset generated for theinfluenza vaccinated human described in FIG. 7 was performed to selectantibodies representative of the clonal families identified. The heavyand light chains for the selected antibodies representing both clonalfamilies as well as several singlet branches were cloned by PCR andco-transfected into 293T cells (as outlined in FIG. 2 ), andsupernatants collected from transfectants as described in FIG. 24 . Therecombinant antibodies were then tested for reactivity against theFluzone influenza virus vaccine (Sanofi) by ELISA, with the Fluzonevaccine coated on the ELISA plate. The recombinant influenza virusantibodies were incubated in the ELISA plate at 100 ng/ml, and a horseradish peroxidase (HRP)-conjugated anti-human IgG antibody used todetect antibody binding. The TMB substrate reaction was allowed to gofor 30 minutes before quenching with acid stop. Readout is displayed as450 nm absorbance as no standards were available. Multiple recombinantantibodies representing the identified clonal families bound to theinfluenza virus vaccine, while recombinant antibodies representative ofother clonal families and the “dead ends” did not bind influenzavaccine.

FIG. 27 . Recombinant anti-influenza antibodies representative of clonalfamilies bind influenza virus hemagglutinins with picomolar affinities.The recombinant anti-influenza virus antibodies representative of clonalfamilies from the Fluzone-vaccinated human (FIG. 7 ) that boundinfluenza vaccine in an ELISA assay (FIG. 26 ) were tested using asurface plasmon resonance (SPR) instrument (ProteOn System, Bio-RadLaboratories) to determine their binding affinities for influenzahemagglutinin (both the H3N2 A/Perth/16/2009 and H1N1A/California/07/2009 strains present in the vaccine). The recombinantanti-influenza virus antibodies were bound to the surface using EDAC-NHSchemistry, and the H3N2 Perth and H1N1 California hemagglutinins wereindependently tested as the ligands, with hemagglutinin as the analyte.Ka column denotes the on-rates, Kd column the off-rates and K_(D) thedissociation constant. Multiple recombinant antibodies bound either theH3N2 Perth or the H1N1 California hemagglutinin with picomolaraffinities.

FIG. 28 . Recombinant anti-influenza antibodies neutralize influenzavirus infectivity in microneutralization assays. Six antibodiesexhibiting reactivity on the Fluzone ELISA (FIG. 26 ) were sent to thecontract research organization (CRO) Virapur, LLC, (San Diego, CA) fortesting in a microneutralization assay using the H1N1 California/07/2009influenza virus strain and the H3N2 A/Perth/16/2009 influenza virusstrain, 2 of the three stains of influenza virus in the Fluzone vaccine.5 out of the 6 recombinant antibodies neutralized influenza virus in themicroneutralization assay, preventing infectivity at microgram permilliliter levels and possibly sub-microgram per milliliterconcentrations. The recombinant antibody F21 neutralized H3N2 Perth, andalthough it bound Fluzone in the ELISA assay it did not show binding inthe SPR analysis (FIG. 27 ) likely because the concentrations of thehemagglutinin analyte that were used were too low for binding to bedetectable.

FIG. 29 . Recombinant anti-Staph. aureus antibodies bound to fixed S.aureus by flow cytometry. Analysis of the evolutionary tree (FIG. 8 ) ofthe heavy and light chain antibody repertoire dataset generated from thehuman who controlled (without antibiotics) a chronic Staph. aureusosteomyelitis (as described in FIG. 7 ) enabled selection of antibodiesrepresentative of the clonal families identified. The heavy and lightchains for the selected antibodies representing both clonal families aswell as several singlet branches were cloned by PCR and co-transfectedinto 293T cells (as outlined in FIG. 2 ), and supernatants collectedfrom transfectants as described in FIG. 24 . The recombinant anti-Staph.aureus antibodies were then tested for reactivity against fixed S.aureus. The secondary antibody used was a FITC-conjugated mouseanti-human IgG, and samples were analyzed on a BD LSR II or LSRFortessa. The percentage of positive staining is shown, with 2anti-influenza antibodies used as negative controls. The 2° antibodyalone did not result in binding over background, as protein A bindsweakly to mouse IgG1, which is the isotype of the 2° antibody. Thestaining observed above background is due to the binding of therecombinant anti-Staph. aureus antibodies to the small percentage of theWood strain of S. aureus that express protein A. (a). Flow cytometryplots are shown for the 2 positive binding anti-Staph. aureusantibodies, S6 and S11, along with the isotype-matched negative controlanti-influenza antibodies (b). The level of binding of the anti-Staph.aureus antibodies to S. aureus was proportional to the amount ofantibody used. The dark solid line represents an antibody concentrationof 10 ug/ml, the dark dotted line 5 ug/ml, and grey dotted line 1 ug/ml(c).

FIG. 30 . Anti-Staph. aureus antibodies reduced the number of S. aureuscolony forming units. Recombinant anti-Staph. aureus antibodies wereincubated with S. aureus in combination with baby rabbit serum as acomplement source, before being serially diluted and grown overnight on5% trypticase soy agar (TSA) blood agar plates. Colony forming units(CFUs) were then counted and graphed. Two recombinant anti-Staph. aureusantibodies (Ab-a and Ab-b) resulted in killing of the Staph. aureus andthus a reduced number of CFU/ml.

FIG. 31 . Identification of S. aureus antigen targets of recombinantanti-Staph. aureus antibodies generated from a human mounting aneffective immune response against a chronic Staph. aureus infection. Aprotein lysate was generated from a clinical Staph. aureus isolate.Recombinant anti-Staph. aureus antibodies representative of clonalfamilies identified in the antibody repertoire from a human mounting animmune response that was preventing progression of a chronic Staph.aureus osteomyelitis infection were used to immunoprecipitate proteinsfrom a Staph. aureus Spa clinical isolate. The immunoprecipitates wereseparated by SDS-PAGE, identified bands excised, and mass spectrometry(an Agilent XCT-Plus ion trap mass spectrometer) used to identify theimmunoprecipitated proteins which are presented in the Figure.

FIG. 32 . Generation of anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibodies from a humanwith metastatic lung adenocarcinoma who was a long-term non-progressor.A human with metastatic lung adenocarcinoma who became a long-termnon-progressor following chemotherapy exhibited persistently elevatedblood plasmablasts, indicating a persistently activated immune response(FIG. 7 ). The patient's peripheral blood plasmablasts were sorted, theantibody repertoire sequenced, and antibodies representative of clonalfamilies (FIG. 8 ) were cloned and expressed recombinantly. One of theexpressed recombinant antibodies, which is representative of one of theidentified clonal families, bound to an independent lung adenocarcinomain immunohistochemical stains. Tissue arrays were then used to furthercharacterize the reactivity of this antibody. Tissue arrays containingmultiple independent lung adenocarcinomas, squamous cell carcinoma andhealthy lung tissue were blocked overnight with 100 ug/ml of F(ab) goatanti-human antibody. Slides were stained with anti-lung adenocarcinomaantibodies or an anti-influenza antibody as a negative control, andvisualized with Vector Red. Slides were counterstained with hematoxylin.Hematoxylin blue color was removed using Photoshop so that only nucleiand Vector Red (red) staining shows up as darker grey in the image. Thisrecombinant antibody bound to 4 out of 5 independent lung adenocarcinomatissue samples tested (contained in tissue arrays), but did not bind tolung squamous cell carcinoma or to healthy lung tissue.

FIG. 33 . The identified anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibody (FIG. 32 )binds to the surface of a lung adenocarcinoma cell line. The recombinantanti-lung adenocarcinoma antibody (FIG. 32 ) strongly stained thesurface of the lung adenocarcinoma cell line H1650, and exhibited onlylow-level staining of a kidney epithelial and a lung squamous tumor celllines. This anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibody did not bind a second lungadenocarcinoma cell line (H2009), consistent with our observation thatthis antibody bound 4 out of the 5 independent lung adenocarcinomatissue samples tested by immunohistochemistry (FIG. 32 ).

FIG. 34 . Generation of rheumatoid factor antibodies from rheumatoidarthritis (RA) patients. Recombinant antibodies representative of clonalfamilies identified in the evolutionary trees of antibody repertoiresgenerated from humans with RA (FIG. 8 ) were selected, cloned andrecombinantly expressed. Recombinant antibodies derived from RA patientswere used as the primary antibody in a direct ELISA and anti-humanIgG-HRP was used as the secondary antibody, and binding visualized withTMB substrate. Recombinant antibodies RA2 and RA3 exhibited reactivity,and thus represent rheumatoid factor antibodies.

FIG. 35 . Generation of anti-CCP and anti-histone 2A antibodies from RApatients. Additional recombinant antibodies generated from RA patientswith active disease were characterized using a histone 2A ELISA and acyclic-citrullinated peptide (CCP) ELISA (using the CCP2 ELISA kit [AxisShield]). Recombinant antibodies were used at 125 ug/ml. Panel (a)presents the results from a histone 2A ELISA, and multiple recombinantantibodies bound to histone 2A. Panel (b) present the results of theCCP2 ELISA, and several recombinant antibodies exhibited positivereactivity. The anti-CCP2 ELISA included a seronegative and 2seropositive controls. For both assays, absorbance was recorded as thereadout. Absorbance values above the background (dotted line) wereconsidered to be positive.

FIG. 36 . Confirmatory independent experiment demonstrating generationof anti-histone 2A antibodies from active RA patients. Recombinantantibodies derived from RA patient evolutionary trees (FIG. 8 and FIG.35 ) were further tested in a histone 2A ELISA assay. Antibodies wereused at 30 ug/ml, a 4-fold lower concentration that that used in FIG. 35. Absorbance was recorded as the readout. Absorbance values above thebackground were considered to be positive.

FIG. 37 . Identification of anti-histone and anti-citrullinated proteinantibodies using RA antigen arrays. Antibodies derived from RA patientswere used to probe an RA antigen array containing a spectrum of nativeand citrullinated proteins and peptides. Following incubation with aCy-3-labeled anti-human IgG secondary antibody, recombinant antibodybinding was quantitated by scanning with an Axon Instruments GenePixmicroarray scanner. Reactivities are displayed as a heatmap. Recombinantantibodies derived from RA bound to several distinct citrullinated ornative antigens.

FIG. 38 . Pacific Biosciences sequencing provides full-length sequencingreads of IgG heavy chain amplicon. IgG heavy chain amplicons from plate44 were provided to Pacific Biosciences for SMRT sequencing. The numberof circular consensus sequence (CCS) reads with barcodes correspondingto selected wells are shown.

FIGS. 39A-39F. Use of alternative cell surface markers and othercellular features to identify blood plasmablasts. Plasmablasts can beidentified and sorted through use of a variety of cell surface markersand/or cellular features. FIG. 39A demonstrates that plasmablastsexhibit higher forward scatter (FSC) than resting B cells. Plasmablastswere identified based on CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38^(hi) staining, and theseresults demonstrate that B cells (grey) are smaller than plasmablasts(black). FIG. 39B demonstrates that use of anti-CD19 staining combinedwith FSC identifies a population of B cells that contains 72%plasmablasts. FIG. 39C demonstrates that, for a population of CD19⁺ Bcells (cells were pre-gated as being CD19 positive), side scatter (SSC)and FSC can be used to identify a population of B cells that contains37% plasmablasts. FIGS. 39D-39F present several approaches to identifyplasmablasts within the CD19⁺ B cell population. Gating on FSC^(hi)cells give 37% purity of plasmablasts (c). Gating on FSC^(hi)CD20⁻ cellsgave 71% purity in plasmablasts (d). Gating on FSC^(hi)CD38⁺ cells gave80% purity in plasmablasts (e). Gating on FSC^(hi)CD27⁺ cells gave 44%purity in plasmablasts (f).

FIG. 40 . Human blasting B cells (plasmablasts) are larger than restingB cells but smaller than monocytes on average. Singlet monocytes, Bcells and plasmablasts were gated and compared for side- andforward-scatter parameters. Monocytes were defined by theircharacteristic FSC and SSC profile, and as CD19⁻CD3⁻. B cells weredefined as CD19⁺CD20⁺. Plasmablasts were defined asCD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺. Cells shown on the FSC-A (forward scatter area)and SSC-A (side scatter area) axes (a). Cells shown on the FSC-W(forward scatter width) and SSC-W (side scatter width) axes (b). Themedian of the FSC-A, SSC-A, FSC-W, SSC-W of plasmablasts were divided bythat of resting B cells or monocytes to obtain a ratio which representthe size relationship between the cell types (c). The median of theFSC-A, SSC-A, FSC-W, SSC-W of the 20^(th) percentile of plasmablastswere divided by that of the median of resting B cells or monocytes toobtain a ratio which represent the size relationship between the celltypes wherein at least 80% of plasmablasts are larger than the ratio(d). Error bars indicate 95% confidence interval.

FIG. 41 . Size of human plasmablasts compared to resting B cells bymicroscopy. Plasmablasts and resting B cells were sorted asCD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺ and CD19⁺CD20⁺ respectively. Cells were thenimaged using an Olympus microscope at 200×. Cell area was measured usingImageJ and diameter determined using area=π×r² where diameter=2× radius,and volume determined by 4/3×πr³. Error bars denote the inter-quartilerange. A cut-off of ≥8 uM or ≥50 uM² or ≥268 uM³ will include 96% ofplasmablasts and exclude 92% of resting B cells.

FIG. 42 . Superscript III has template switching activity attemperatures at and below 50° C. Reverse transcription (RT) wasperformed for 90 minutes using the temperatures indicated above thelanes using an adaptor ending with rGrGrG, and 1 round of PCR was doneusing GAPDH as the 3′ primer (sequence ATGGTTCACACCCATGACG (SEQ IDNO:796596)). As can be seen, no template switching activity to add onthe adaptor could be seen at 55° C., and template switching activityincreases from minimal at 50° C. to highest at 42° C., the lowesttemperature tested, as indicated by the brightness of the band at ˜450bp. Marker is a 100 bp marker. Superscript III is an MMLV reversetranscriptase that has specific mutations that result in a loss of RNAseH activity, and also has mutations made to the polymerase domain toincrease thermal stability and has a half-life of 220 minutes at an RTtemperature of 50° C. Other MMLV H⁻ enzymes that have been engineeredfor higher thermal stability are expected to exhibit similar activity.

FIG. 43 . Additional primers for human kappa, lambda and gamma constantregions. These primers were used for the 1^(st) PCR, and then the 2^(nd)PCR was performed using the primers from Table 1 and PCR productsseparated on a 2% agarose gel and the image was taken. Primers used for1^(st) PCR are Kappa GSP1, kappa GSP1e, kappa GSP1f, lambda GSP1, lambdaGSP1× and lambda GSP1y respectively. Sequences are in Table 10. Whitebars between lanes on the same gel photo indicate that non-relevantlanes in-between have been cropped out.

FIG. 44 . Additional primers for other human constant regions and genes.1^(st) and 2^(nd) PCR were done and products ran on a 2% agarose gel andimaged. Lanes are from left: marker, mu, alpha constant regions, TCRalpha (a) and marker, TCR beta (b). Primers used and sequences are inTable 10. White bars between lanes on the same gel photo indicate thatnon-relevant lanes in-between have been cropped out.

FIG. 45 . Additional primers for mouse genes. 1^(st) and 2^(nd) PCR weredone and products ran on a 2% agarose gel and imaged. Lanes are fromleft: marker, kappa, lambda, lambda, lambda, lambda light chains and muheavy chain. The 4 lambda lanes had this combination of primers used:mouse_lambda_GSP1a with mouse_lambda_GSP2a, mouse_lambda_GSP1a withmouse_lambda_GSP2b, mouse_lambda_GSP1b with mouse_lambda_GSP2a, andmouse_lambda_GSP1b with mouse_lambda GSP2a (a). Marker and alpha heavychain (b). Gamma1, 2a, 2c heavy chains with 2^(nd) PCR usingmo_g12_GSP2d and mo_g12_GSP2e respectively, marker (c). Marker, gamma 3heavy chain with 2^(nd) PCR using mo_g3_GSP2d, mo_g3_GSP2e respectivelyfollowed by gamma 2b heavy chain with 2^(nd) PCR using mo_g2b_GSP2d,mo_g2b_GSP2e respectively (d). Marker, TCR alpha (e). Marker, TCR beta(f). White bars between lanes on the same gel photo indicate thatnon-relevant lanes in-between have been cropped out.

FIG. 46 . Anti-S. aureus antibody-mediated killing of S. aureus by theHL-60 neutrophil cell line. Various recombinant anti-S. aureusantibodies (staph 1, staph 4, staph 6, staph 7, staph 9, staph 12) wereincubated at 4° C. with S. aureus for 30 minutes, following whichnon-bound antibody was washed away, and the S. aureus incubated withactivated HL-60 cells and baby rabbit complement for 45 minutes at 37°C. Cells were then washed twice and extracellular bacteria were seriallyplated on 5% TSA blood agar plates, incubated overnight, and colonyforming units (CFUs) counted. Recombinant antibodies staph 6, staph 9and staph 12 induced greater than 20% killing of S. aureus.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Compositions

Polynucleotides

In some aspects, a composition can include a polynucleotide. The term“polynucleotide(s)” refers to nucleic acids such as DNA molecules andRNA molecules and analogs thereof (e.g., DNA or RNA generated usingnucleotide analogs or using nucleic acid chemistry). As desired, thepolynucleotides may be made synthetically, e.g., using art-recognizednucleic acid chemistry or enzymatically using, e.g., a polymerase, and,if desired, can be modified. Typical modifications include methylation,biotinylation, and other art-known modifications. In addition, apolynucleotide can be single-stranded or double-stranded and, wheredesired, linked to a detectable moiety. In some aspects, apolynucleotide can include hybrid molecules, e.g., comprising DNA andRNA.

“G,” “C,” “A,” “T” and “U” each generally stand for a nucleotide thatcontains guanine, cytosine, adenine, thymidine and uracil as a base,respectively. However, it will be understood that the term“ribonucleotide” or “nucleotide” can also refer to a modified nucleotideor a surrogate replacement moiety. The skilled person is well aware thatguanine, cytosine, adenine, and uracil may be replaced by other moietieswithout substantially altering the base pairing properties of anoligonucleotide comprising a nucleotide bearing such replacement moiety.For example, without limitation, a nucleotide comprising inosine as itsbase may base pair with nucleotides containing adenine, cytosine, oruracil. Hence, nucleotides containing uracil, guanine, or adenine may bereplaced in nucleotide sequences by a nucleotide containing, forexample, inosine. In another example, adenine and cytosine anywhere inthe oligonucleotide can be replaced with guanine and uracil,respectively to form G-U Wobble base pairing with the target mRNA.Sequences containing such replacement moieties are suitable for thecompositions and methods described herein.

As used herein, and unless otherwise indicated, the term“complementary,” when used to describe a first nucleotide sequence inrelation to a second nucleotide sequence, refers to the ability of apolynucleotide comprising the first nucleotide sequence to hybridize andform a duplex structure under certain conditions with a polynucleotidecomprising the second nucleotide sequence, as will be understood by theskilled person. Such conditions can, for example, be stringentconditions, where stringent conditions may include: 400 mM NaCl, 40 mMPIPES pH 6.4, 1 mM EDTA, 50° C. or 70° C. for 12-16 hours followed bywashing. Other conditions, such as physiologically relevant conditionsas may be encountered inside an organism, can apply. The skilled personwill be able to determine the set of conditions most appropriate for atest of complementarity of two sequences in accordance with the ultimateapplication of the hybridized nucleotides.

Complementary sequences include base-pairing of a region of apolynucleotide comprising a first nucleotide sequence to a region of apolynucleotide comprising a second nucleotide sequence over the lengthor a portion of the length of one or both nucleotide sequences. Suchsequences can be referred to as “complementary” with respect to eachother herein. However, where a first sequence is referred to as“substantially complementary” with respect to a second sequence herein,the two sequences can be complementary, or they may include one or more,but generally not more than about 5, 4, 3, or 2 mismatched base pairswithin regions that are base-paired. For two sequences with mismatchedbase pairs, the sequences will be considered “substantiallycomplementary” as long as the two nucleotide sequences bind to eachother via base-pairing.

“Complementary” sequences, as used herein, may also include, or beformed entirely from, non-Watson-Crick base pairs and/or base pairsformed from non-natural and modified nucleotides, in as far as the aboveembodiments with respect to their ability to hybridize are fulfilled.Such non-Watson-Crick base pairs includes, but are not limited to, G:UWobble or Hoogstein base pairing.

The term percent “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acidor polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequencesthat have a specified percentage of nucleotides or amino acid residuesthat are the same, when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence,as measured using one of the sequence comparison algorithms describedbelow (e.g., BLASTP and BLASTN or other algorithms available to personsof skill) or by visual inspection. Depending on the application, thepercent “identity” can exist over a region of the sequence beingcompared, e.g., over a functional domain, or, alternatively, exist overthe full length of the two sequences to be compared.

For sequence comparison, typically one sequence acts as a referencesequence to which test sequences are compared. When using a sequencecomparison algorithm, test and reference sequences are input into acomputer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, andsequence algorithm program parameters are designated. The sequencecomparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identity forthe test sequence(s) relative to the reference sequence, based on thedesignated program parameters.

Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., bythe local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482(1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J.Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson& Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerizedimplementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA inthe Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by visual inspection (see generallyAusubel et al., infra).

One example of an algorithm that is suitable for determining percentsequence identity and sequence similarity is the BLAST algorithm, whichis described in Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990).Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through theNational Center for Biotechnology Information web-site.

Identical sequences include 100% identity of a polynucleotide comprisinga first nucleotide sequence to a polynucleotide comprising a secondnucleotide sequence over the entire length of one or both nucleotidesequences. Such sequences can be referred to as “fully identical” withrespect to each other herein. However, in some aspects, where a firstsequence is referred to as “substantially identical” with respect to asecond sequence herein, the two sequences can be fully complementary, orthey may have one or more, but generally not more than about 5, 4, 3, or2 mismatched nucleotides upon alignment. In some aspects, where a firstsequence is referred to as “substantially identical” with respect to asecond sequence herein, the two sequences can be fully complementary, orthey may be about 50, 60, 70, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89,90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, or 99% identical to each other.

Where a first sequence is referred to as “distinct” with respect to theidentity of a second sequence herein, the two sequences have at leastone or more mismatched nucleotides upon alignment. In some aspects,distinct sequences can have 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32,33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50,or more mismatched nucleotides upon alignment. In some aspects, distinctsequences can be about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32,33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50,60, 70, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,96, 97, 98, 99, or less than 100% identical to each other. In someaspects, where a first sequence is referred to as “distinct” withrespect to a second sequence herein, the two sequences can havesubstantially or fully identical sequences, but instead differ from oneanother based upon differing patterns of modification within thesequences. Such modifications are generally known in the art, e.g.,methylation.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide can be present in a library ofpolynucleotides. In some aspects, a polynucleotide library can include aplurality of polynucleotides. In some aspects, each polynucleotide inthe plurality of polynucleotides can be derived from a single sample. Insome aspects, a single sample can include a single cell such as a Bcell.

Conventional notation is used herein to describe nucleotide sequences:the left-hand end of a single-stranded nucleotide sequence is the5′-end; the left-hand direction of a double-stranded nucleotide sequenceis referred to as the 5′-direction. The direction of 5′ to 3′ additionof nucleotides to nascent RNA transcripts is referred to as thetranscription direction. The DNA strand having the same sequence as anmRNA is referred to as the “coding strand;” sequences on the DNA strandhaving the same sequence as an mRNA transcribed from that DNA and whichare located 5′ to the 5′-end of the RNA transcript are referred to as“upstream sequences;” sequences on the DNA strand having the samesequence as the RNA and which are 3′ to the 3′ end of the coding RNAtranscript are referred to as “downstream sequences.”

The term “messenger RNA” or “mRNA” refers to an RNA that is withoutintrons and that can be translated into a polypeptide.

The term “cDNA” refers to a DNA that is complementary or identical to anmRNA, in either single stranded or double stranded form.

The term “amplicon” refers to the amplified product of a nucleic acidamplification reaction, e.g., RT-PCR.

The term “hybridize” refers to a sequence specific non-covalent bindinginteraction with a complementary nucleic acid. Hybridization may occurto all or a portion of a nucleic acid sequence. Those skilled in the artwill recognize that the stability of a nucleic acid duplex, or hybrids,can be determined by the Tm. Additional guidance regarding hybridizationconditions may be found in: Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, JohnWiley & Sons, N.Y., 1989, 6.3.1-6.3.6 and in: Sambrook et al., MolecularCloning, a Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 1989,Vol. 3.

As used herein, “region” refers to a contiguous portion of thenucleotide sequence of a polynucleotide. Examples of regions aredescribed herein an include identification regions, sampleidentification regions, plate identification regions, adapter regions,and the like. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include one or moreregions. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include less than 2, 2,3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22,23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40,41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, or more regions. In someaspects, regions can be coupled. In some aspects, regions can beoperatively coupled. In some aspects, regions can be physically coupled.

As used herein, “variable region” refers to a variable nucleotidesequence that arises from a recombination event, for example, it caninclude a V, J, and/or D region of an immunoglobulin or T cell receptorsequence isolated from a T cell or B cell of interest, such as anactivated T cell or an activated B cell.

As used herein “B cell variable immunoglobulin region” refers to avariable immunoglobulin nucleotide sequence isolated from a B cell. Forexample, a variable immunoglobulin sequence can include a V, J, and/or Dregion of an immunoglobulin sequence isolated from a B cell of interestsuch as a memory B cell, an activated B cell, or plasmablast.

As used herein “identification region” refers to a nucleotide sequencelabel (e.g., a unique barcode sequence) that can be coupled to at leastone nucleotide sequence for, e.g., later identification of the at leastone nucleotide sequence.

As used herein “immunoglobulin region” refers to a contiguous portion ofnucleotide sequence from one or both chains (heavy and light) of anantibody.

As used herein “adapter region” refers to a linker that couples a firstnucleotide sequence to a second nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, anadapter region can include a contiguous portion of nucleotide sequencethat acts as a linker. For example, an adapter region can have thesequence GGG and couples a first sequence to a second sequence viabinding between GGG and CCC.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a cDNA region. In someaspects, a polynucleotide can include a sample identification-adapterregion. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a sampleidentification region. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include anadapter region. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include auniversal primer region. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can includean amplicon region. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include aplate identification region. In some aspects, a polynucleotide caninclude a first plate identification region. In some aspects, apolynucleotide can include a second plate identification region. In someaspects, a polynucleotide can include a restriction site region. In someaspects, a polynucleotide can include a first restriction site region.In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a second restriction siteregion. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a sequencingregion. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a first sequencingregion. In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a secondsequencing region.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a plurality of any regiondescribed herein. For example, a polynucleotide can include a firstsample identification region and a second sample identification region.In some aspects, the first sample identification region and the secondsample identification region are identical or substantially identical.In some aspects, the first sample identification region and the secondsample identification region are distinct. In some aspects, anidentification region is coupled to a variable immunoglobulin region.

In some aspects the sequence of a region will be at least long enough toserve as a target sequence for a primer or a probe in a PCR reaction. Insome aspects, a region can be 1 to greater than 5000 base pairs inlength. For example, a region can be from 1-10,000 nucleotides inlength, e.g., 2-30 nucleotides in length, including all sub-rangestherebetween. As non-limiting examples, a region can be from 1-30nucleotides, 1-26 nucleotides, 1-23 nucleotides, 1-22 nucleotides, 1-21nucleotides, 1-20 nucleotides, 1-19 nucleotides, 1-18 nucleotides, 1-17nucleotides, 18-30 nucleotides, 18-26 nucleotides, 18-23 nucleotides,18-22 nucleotides, 18-21 nucleotides, 18-20 nucleotides, 19-30nucleotides, 19-26 nucleotides, 19-23 nucleotides, 19-22 nucleotides,19-21 nucleotides, 19-20 nucleotides, 20-30 nucleotides, 20-26nucleotides, 20-25 nucleotides, 20-24 nucleotides, 20-23 nucleotides,20-22 nucleotides, 20-21 nucleotides, 21-30 nucleotides, 21-26nucleotides, 21-25 nucleotides, 21-24 nucleotides, 21-23 nucleotides, or21-22 nucleotides. In some aspects, a region can be about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24,25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42,43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, or more nucleotides in length. In someaspects, a region can be less than 50, 50-100, 100-200, 200-300,300-400, 400-500, 500-600, 600-700, 700-800, 800-900, 900-1000, orgreater than 1000 nucleotides in length. In some aspects, a region canbe less than 1000, 1000-2000, 2000-3000, 3000-4000, 4000-5000,5000-6000, 6000-7000, 7000-8000, 8000-9000, 9000-10000, or greater than10000 nucleotides in length. In some aspects, a region can include atleast two nucleotides, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6,at least 7, at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 15, at least20 or more nucleotides of a polynucleotide disclosed herein.

The term “sample” can include RNA, DNA, a single cell or multiple cellsor fragments of cells or an aliquot of body fluid, taken from a subject(e.g., a mammalian subject, an animal subject, a human subject, or anon-human animal subject). Samples can be selected by one of skill inthe art using any means now known or later discovered includingcentrifugation, venipuncture, blood draw, excretion, swabbing,ejaculation, massage, biopsy, needle aspirate, lavage sample, scraping,surgical incision, laser capture microdissection, gradient separation,or intervention or other means known in the art. Samples can also beselected by one of skill in the art using one or more markers known tobe associated with a sample of interest. Samples can also be selectedusing methods known in the art such as cell sorting and FACS. Furtherexamples of sample selection methods are described in the Examplessection below.

In some aspects a polynucleotide can be derived from or associated witha single sample. In some aspects a region can be derived from orassociated with a single sample. In some aspects, a cDNA region can bederived from or associated with a single sample. In some aspects, anamplicon region can be derived from or associated with a single sample.A “single sample” includes a sample comprising polynucleotides that istaken from a single source. In some aspects, a single source includes asample taken at a particular time point or at a particular location,e.g., in a subject or flask of cells or plate of cells. In some aspects,a first single sample is taken from a first subject at a first timepoint and a second single sample is taken from the first subject at asecond time point that is distinct from the first time point. In someaspects, a first single sample is taken from a first subject at a firstlocation and a second sample is taken from the first subject at a secondlocation that is distinct from the first location. In some aspects, afirst single sample is taken from a first subject at a time point and asecond single sample is taken from a second subject at a time point. Insome aspects, a first single sample is taken from a first subject at alocation and a second sample is taken from a second subject at alocation. In one embodiment, a sample comprises polynucleotides thatinclude mRNA derived from one or more B cells. In another embodiment, asample comprises polynucleotides including cDNA derived from one or moreB cells. In another embodiment, a single sample comprises mRNA derivedfrom one or more B cells sorted into a single well of a 96-well or384-well plate. Samples are generally derived from a prokaryotic cell(s)(e.g., a bacterial cell(s)), a eukaryotic cell(s) (e.g., a mammalian andyeast cell(s)), or other sources of genetic material such as a virus orphage. The term “mammal” or “mammalian” as used herein includes bothhumans and non-humans and include but is not limited to humans,non-human primates, canines, felines, murines, bovines, equines, andporcines. In some aspects, the methods of the invention are applied tosingle samples in a plate with at least 96 wells, at least 384 wells, atleast 1536 wells, or more wells. In further aspects, the methods of theinvention are applied to single samples in at least one, two, three,four, five, six, seven, eight, ten, fifteen, twenty, thirty or moreplates with at least 96 wells each.

In some aspects a 5′ adaptor region sequence and/or a sampleidentification region are added to all cDNAs from a single sample, e.g.,during RT and not just to Ig genes. In some aspects, 3′ gene specificprimers (GSPs) can be used to amplify any expressed gene in the singlesample. In some aspects, genes are amplified that have a 5′ variableregion, e.g., T cell receptors and B cell receptors without needingmultiple degenerate 5′ primers to amplify the gene(s) of interest. GSPscan include primers specific for IgG, IgM, IgD, IgA, IgE, TCR chains,and other genes of interest.

In some aspects, multiple rounds of PCR can also be performed, e.g.,using nested GSPs. For such nested GSPs, the GSP for the second round ofPCR hybridizes to its target gene sequence at a position 5′ along thatsequence relative to the position hybridized to by the GSP used in thefirst round of PCR.

In some aspects, cDNA region or an amplicon region can include a DNApolynucleotide. In some aspects, cDNA region or an amplicon region caninclude a cDNA polynucleotide. In some aspects, cDNA region or anamplicon region can include an RNA polynucleotide hybridized to a DNApolynucleotide. In some aspects, cDNA region or an amplicon region caninclude an mRNA polynucleotide hybridized to a cDNA polynucleotide.

In some aspects, a universal primer region is not fully complementary toany human exon. In some aspects, a universal primer region is not fullycomplementary to any expressed human gene. In some aspects, a universalprimer region has minimal secondary structure.

In some aspects, an amplicon region comprises an immunoglobulin heavychain amplicon sequence. In some aspects, an amplicon region comprisesan immunoglobulin light chain amplicon sequence. In some aspects, anamplicon region comprises a T cell receptor alpha amplicon sequence. Insome aspects, an amplicon region comprises a T cell receptor betaamplicon sequence.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide is present in a library ofpolynucleotides and can be differentiated from other polynucleotidespresent in the library based on a region of the polynucleotide.

In some aspects, the sequence of the sample identification region ofeach polynucleotide in a library derived from a first single sample isdistinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the library derived from one or more samplesdistinct from the first single sample. In some aspects, the sequence ofthe sample identification region of each polynucleotide in a libraryderived from a first single sample differs by at least 1 nucleotide fromthe sequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library derived from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample. In some aspects, the sequence of thesample identification region of each polynucleotide in a library derivedfrom a first single sample differs by at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27,28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45,46, 47, 48, 49, 50 or more nucleotides from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the libraryderived from one or more samples distinct from the first single sample.In some aspects, the sequence of the sample identification region ofeach polynucleotide in a library derived from a first single sample canbe about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36,37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 81,82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,or less than 100% identical to the sequence of the sample identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the library derived from one ormore samples distinct from the first single sample. In some aspects, thesequence of the sample identification region of each polynucleotide in alibrary derived from a first single sample is less than 100% identicalto the sequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library derived from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample. In some aspects, a sample-identificationregion acts as a digital barcode on all 1^(st) strand cDNA reversetranscribed from a single sample. In some aspects, the sampleidentification region is at least 1 nucleotide in length. In someaspects, a sample-identification region can comprise at least 3nucleotides, and sample-identification regions can differ from eachother by at least 1 nucleotide. In one embodiment, sample-identificationregions are 3-15 nucleotides in length and differ from each other by atleast 1 nucleotide. In some aspects, sample-identification regions cancomprise at least 64 variants (using sample-identification regions 3nucleotides in length with each sample-ID differing from each other byat least 1 nucleotide), or in some aspects larger numbers of variants.In some aspects, the sequence attached 3′ to the sample-identificationregion can be an adapter region comprising at least 1 G. In a preferredembodiment, the sequence attached 3′ to the sample-identification regioncan be an adapter region comprising at least 2 G's. In one embodiment, asequence attached to the 5′ end of a sample-identification region is auniversal primer sequence that can be used during PCR amplification toavoid the need for the subsequent addition of a 5′ universal primersequence (by ligation or another method) or the use of multipledegenerate 5′ primers to amplify genes with variable 5′ regions.Examples of sample identification regions are shown in Tables 2 and 8.

In some aspects, the sequence of the first plate identification regionof each polynucleotide in a library derived from a first set of singlesamples is distinct from the sequence of the first plate identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the library derived from one ormore single sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples.In some aspects, the sequence of the first plate identification regionof each polynucleotide in a library derived from the first set of singlesamples differs by at least 1 nucleotide from the sequence of the firstplate identification region of the other polynucleotides in the libraryderived from one or more single sample sets distinct from the first setof single samples. In some aspects, the sequence of the first plateidentification region of each polynucleotide in a library derived fromthe first set of single samples differs by at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44,45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50 or more nucleotides from the sequence of thefirst plate identification region of the other polynucleotides in thelibrary derived from one or more single sample sets distinct from thefirst set of single samples. In some aspects, the sequence of the firstplate identification region of each polynucleotide in a library derivedfrom the first set of single samples can be about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43,44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88,89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, or less than 100% identicalto sequence of the first plate identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library derived from one or more single samplesets distinct from the first set of single samples. In some aspects, thesequence of the first plate identification region of each polynucleotidein a library derived from the first set of single samples is less than100% identical to sequence of the first plate identification region ofthe other polynucleotides in the library derived from one or more singlesample sets distinct from the first set of single samples. Examples offirst plate identification regions are shown in Tables 3 and 7.

In some aspects, the sequence of the second plate identification regionof each polynucleotide in a library derived from a first set of singlesamples is distinct from the sequence of the second plate identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the library derived from one ormore single sample sets distinct from the first set of single samples.In some aspects, the sequence of the second plate identification regionof each polynucleotide in a library derived from the first set of singlesamples differs by at least 1 nucleotide from the sequence of the secondplate identification region of the other polynucleotides in the libraryderived from one or more single sample sets distinct from the first setof single samples. In some aspects, the sequence of the second plateidentification region of each polynucleotide in a library derived fromthe first set of single samples differs by at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44,45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50 or more nucleotides from the sequence of thesecond plate identification region of the other polynucleotides in thelibrary derived from one or more single sample sets distinct from thefirst set of single samples. In some aspects, the sequence of the secondplate identification region is identical to the sequence of the firstplate identification region on a polynucleotide. In some aspects, thesequence of the second plate identification region of eachpolynucleotide in a library derived from the first set of single samplescan be about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80,81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98,99, or less than 100% identical to sequence of the second plateidentification region of the other polynucleotides in the libraryderived from one or more single sample sets distinct from the first setof single samples. In some aspects, the sequence of the second plateidentification region of each polynucleotide in a library derived fromthe first set of single samples is less than 100% identical to sequenceof the second plate identification region of the other polynucleotidesin the library derived from one or more single sample sets distinct fromthe first set of single samples. Examples of second plate identificationregions are shown in Tables 3 and 7.

In some aspects, a plate-identification region (e.g., a first plateidentification region or a second plate identification region) cancomprise at least 2 nucleotides, and plate-identification regions differfrom each other by at least 1 nucleotide. In one embodiment,plate-identification regions are 2-10 nucleotides in length and differfrom each other by at least 1 nucleotide. In some aspects, use ofplate-identification regions is found in only some embodiments, as theuse of a larger number of different sample-identification regions (oneper single sample to be analyzed) can eliminate the need forplate-identification regions. In some aspects, plate-identificationregions are used to reduce the number of unique oligonucleotidescontaining a sample-identification region that need to be synthesized.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide includes one or more adapter regions.In some aspects, an adapter region includes one or more G's. In someaspects, an adapter region includes 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or moreG's. In some aspects, adapter regions are attached to the 3′ ends ofcDNAs using the template switching property of MMLV H⁻ reversetranscriptases. Different methods to attach adaptor regions exist,including but not limited to, doing PCR with primers with 5′ flankingadaptor region sequences, sticky and blunt end ligations,template-switching-mediated addition of nucleotides, or other methods tocovalently attach nucleotides to the 5′ end, to the 3′ end, or to the 5′and 3′ ends of the polynucleotides. These methods can employ propertiesof enzymes commonly used in molecular biology. PCR can use, e.g.,thermophilic DNA polymerase. Sticky ends that are complementary orsubstantially complementary are created through either cutting dsDNAwith restriction enzymes that leave overhanging ends or through 3′tailing activities of enzymes such as TdT (terminal transferase). Stickyand blunt ends can then be ligated with a complementary adaptor regionusing ligases such as T4 ligase. Template-switching utilizes the 3′tailing activity of MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptase to add one or morecytosines (C's) to the 3′ end of cDNAs and its ability to switchtemplate from mRNA to an adaptor region with complementary G's. In someaspects, a cDNA includes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more C's onits 3′ end.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide includes one or more restriction siteregions. Restriction site regions include one or more restriction sites.Restrictions sites can include: NheI, XhoI, BstBI, EcoRI, SacII, BbvCI,PspXI, AgeI, ApaI, KpnI, Acc65I, XmaI, BstEII, DraIII, PacI, FseI,AsiSI, and AscI. In some aspects, any rare 8-cutter enzyme restrictionsite can be used.

In some aspects, one or more regions of a polynucleotide describedherein can be operatively coupled to one or more other regions of thepolynucleotide. In some aspects, two or more distinct regions of asingle polynucleotide can be operatively coupled. For example, auniversal primer region can be operatively coupled to an adapter region.In some aspects two or more regions can be operatively coupled togetherthat are substantially identical to each other in sequence or identicalin description. For example, a first sample identification region can beoperatively coupled to a second sample identification region. In someaspects, the sequences of the first sample identification region and thesecond sample identification region are identical or substantiallyidentical. In some aspects, the sequences of the first sampleidentification region and the second sample identification region aredifferent or distinct.

In some aspects, one or more regions of a polynucleotide describedherein can be coupled to one or more other regions of thepolynucleotide. In some aspects, two or more distinct regions of asingle polynucleotide can be coupled. For example, a universal primerregion can be coupled to an adapter region. In some aspects two or moreregions can be coupled together that are substantially identical to eachother in sequence or identical in description. For example, a firstsample identification region can be coupled to a second sampleidentification region. In some aspects, the sequences of the firstsample identification region and the second sample identification regionare identical or substantially identical. In some aspects, the sequencesof the first sample identification region and the second sampleidentification region are different or distinct.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide includes the sequence 5′-A-B-3′,wherein A is a sample identification region, and wherein B is an adapterregion. In some aspects, a polynucleotide includes the sequence5′-A-B-C-3′, wherein A is a universal primer region, wherein B is asample identification region, and wherein C is an adapter region. Insome aspects, a polynucleotide includes the sequence 5′-A-B-C-3′,wherein A is a sample identification region, wherein B is an adapterregion, and wherein C is an amplicon region derived from a singlesample. In some aspects, a polynucleotide includes the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-3′, wherein A is a universal primer region, wherein B is asample identification region, wherein C is an adapter region, andwherein D is an amplicon region derived from a single sample. In someaspects, a polynucleotide includes the sequence 5′-A-B-C-D-E-3′, whereinA is a plate identification region, wherein B is a universal primerregion, wherein C is a sample identification region, wherein D is anadapter region, and wherein E is an amplicon region derived from asingle sample. In some aspects, a polynucleotide includes the sequence5′-A-B-C-D-E-F-3′, wherein A is a first restriction site region, whereinB is a universal primer region, wherein C is a sample identificationregion, wherein D is an adapter region, wherein E is an amplicon regionderived from a single sample, and wherein F is a second restriction siteregion.

In some aspects, the regions of each of the above sequences can berearranged in a different order, e.g., 5′-C-A-D-B-3′ or5′-E-A-C-B-D-F-3′ or 5′-B-A-3′. In some aspects, one or more regions ofthe above sequences can be deleted, e.g., 5′-A-D-3′ or 5′-B-C-3′. Insome aspects, one or more additional regions can be added to the abovesequences, e.g., 5′-A-A₂-B-3′ or 5′-A-B-C-D-E-F-G-3′. In such examplesthe one or more additional regions can be any region disclosed herein orequivalents thereof. In some aspects, one or more regions of thesequences above can be modified, e.g., methylated.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include an adapter molecule. Insome aspects, a polynucleotide adapter molecule can include a universalprimer region, a sample identification region, and an adapter region,wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer region is coupled to the 5′end of the sample identification region, and wherein the 3′ end of thesample identification region is coupled to the 5′ end of the adapterregion. In some aspects, an adapter molecule includes a polynucleotidecomprising at least 2 nucleotides that bind to C's added by a reversetranscriptase at the 3′ end of a 1st strand cDNA. In some aspects, anadapter molecule includes a deoxyribose polynucleotide comprising 3-6G's (DNA G's). In another embodiment, an adapter molecule includes aribose polynucleotide consisting of 3-6 G's (RNA G's). In otherembodiments, the adapter molecule can utilize nucleotide analogues, suchlocked nucleic acids (LNAs), e.g., LNA G's. In other embodiments, thenucleotide base may also be a universal or degenerate base such as5-nitroindole and 3-nitropyrrole that can base-pair to C's as well asother nucleotides, in any combination.

In some aspects, a polynucleotide can include a primer or a probe. Insome aspects, a primer can include a universal primer region and a plateidentification region, and wherein the 3′ end of the plateidentification region is coupled to the 5′ end of the universal primerregion.

In some aspects, a composition can include a polynucleotide compositionlibrary. In some aspects, a polynucleotide composition library includesa plurality of polynucleotide compositions. In some aspects eachcomposition is present in a separate container. In some aspects, acontainer can be a test tube. In some aspects, a container can be a wellin a plate. In some aspects, a container can be a well in a 96-wellplate. In some aspects, a container can be a well in a 384-well plate.In some aspects, each composition comprises a cDNA region derived from asingle sample. In some aspects, each composition comprises a sampleidentification-adapter region comprising a sample identification regioncoupled to an adapter region. In some aspects the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each sample identification-adapter region in alibrary is distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other sample identification-adapter regionspresent in each separate container in the library. In some aspects thesample identification-adapter region is attached to the cDNA region. Insome aspects the sample identification-adapter region is attached to thecDNA region by binding between their 3′ regions. In some aspects thesample identification-adapter region is attached to the cDNA region byG:C binding. In some aspects, the cDNA region comprises an RNApolynucleotide hybridized to a DNA polynucleotide. In some aspects, thecDNA region comprises an mRNA polynucleotide hybridized to a cDNApolynucleotide.

In some aspects, the plurality of polynucleotide compositions in apolynucleotide library can comprise at least 2, at least 3, at least 10,at least 30, at least 100, at least 300, at least 1000, at least 3000,at least 10,000, at least 30,000, at least 100,000, at least 300, 000,at least 1,000,000, at least 3,000,000, at least 10,000,000, at least30,000,000, or more members. In other aspects, the plurality ofpolynucleotide compositions in a polynucleotide library can comprise atleast 2, at least 3, at least 10, at least 30, at least 100, at least300, at least 1000, at least 3000, at least 10,000, at least 30,000, ormore genes of a cell sample's whole transcriptome. In other aspects, theplurality of polynucleotide compositions in a polynucleotide librarycomprises at least 1, at least 2, at least 3, at least 10, at least 30,at least 100, at least 300, at least 1000, at least 10,000, at least100,000, at least 1,000,000, at least 10,000,000, at least 1,000,000,000or more of the different antibody species present in the blood of anindividual. These the antibody species can be expressed by plasmablasts,plasma cells, memory B cells, long-lived plasma cells, naïve B cells,other B lineage cells, or combinations thereof.

Vectors

In some aspects, a composition can include a vector. Vectors can be usedin the transformation of a host cell with a nucleic acid sequence. Insome aspects, a vector can include one or more polynucleotides describedherein. In one embodiment, a library of nucleic acid sequences encodingtarget polypeptides may be introduced into a population of cells,thereby allowing screening of a library. The term “vector” is used torefer to a carrier nucleic acid molecule into which a nucleic acidsequence can be inserted for introduction into a cell where it can bereplicated. A nucleic acid sequence can be “exogenous” or “heterologous”which means that it is foreign to the cell into which the vector isbeing introduced or that the sequence is homologous to a sequence in thecell but in a position within the host cell nucleic acid in which thesequence is ordinarily not found. Vectors include plasmids, cosmids, andviruses (e.g., bacteriophage). One of skill in the art may construct avector through standard recombinant techniques, which are described inManiatis et al., 1988 and Ausubel et al., 1994, both of which referencesare incorporated herein by reference. In some aspects, a vector can be avector with the constant regions of an antibody pre-engineered in. Inthis way, one of skill can clone just the VDJ regions of an antibody ofinterest and clone those regions into the pre-engineered vector.

The term “expression vector” refers to a vector containing a nucleicacid sequence coding for at least part of a gene product capable ofbeing transcribed. In some cases, RNA molecules are then translated intoa protein, polypeptide, or peptide. Expression vectors can contain avariety of “control sequences,” which refer to nucleic acid sequencesfor the transcription and possibly translation of an operably linkedcoding sequence in a particular host organism. In addition to controlsequences that govern transcription and translation, vectors andexpression vectors may contain nucleic acid sequences that serve otherfunctions as well.

In some aspects, a vector can include a promoter. In some aspects, avector can include an enhancer. A “promoter” is a control sequence thatis a region of a nucleic acid sequence at which initiation and rate oftranscription are controlled. It may contain genetic elements at whichregulatory proteins and molecules may bind such as RNA polymerase andother transcription factors. The phrases “operatively positioned,”“operatively linked,” “under control,” and “under transcriptionalcontrol” mean that a promoter is in a correct functional location and/ororientation in relation to a nucleic acid sequence to controltranscriptional initiation and/or expression of that sequence. Apromoter may or may not be used in conjunction with an “enhancer,” whichrefers to a cis-acting regulatory sequence involved in thetranscriptional activation of a nucleic acid sequence.

A promoter may be one naturally associated with a gene or sequence, asmay be obtained by isolating the 5′ non-coding sequences locatedupstream of the coding segment and/or exon. Such a promoter can bereferred to as “endogenous.” Similarly, an enhancer may be one naturallyassociated with a nucleic acid sequence, located either downstream orupstream of that sequence. Alternatively, certain advantages will begained by positioning the coding nucleic acid segment under the controlof a recombinant or heterologous promoter, which refers to a promoterthat is not normally associated with a nucleic acid sequence in itsnatural environment. A recombinant or heterologous enhancer refers alsoto an enhancer not normally associated with a nucleic acid sequence inits natural environment. Such promoters or enhancers may includepromoters or enhancers of other genes, and promoters or enhancersisolated from any other prokaryotic cell, and promoters or enhancers not“naturally occurring,” i.e., containing different elements of differenttranscriptional regulatory regions, and/or mutations that alterexpression. In addition to producing nucleic acid sequences of promotersand enhancers synthetically, sequences may be produced using recombinantcloning and/or nucleic acid amplification technology, including PCR, inconnection with the compositions disclosed herein (see U.S. Pat. Nos.4,683,202, 5,928,906, each incorporated herein by reference).

In some aspects, a promoter and/or enhancer that effectively directs theexpression of the DNA segment in the cell type chosen for expression.One example of such promoter that may be used is the E. coli arabinoseor T7 promoter. Those of skill in the art of molecular biology generallyare familiar with the use of promoters, enhancers, and cell typecombinations for protein expression, for example, see Sambrook et al.(1989), incorporated herein by reference. The promoters employed may beconstitutive, tissue-specific, inducible, and/or useful under theappropriate conditions to direct high level expression of the introducedDNA segment, such as is advantageous in the large-scale production ofrecombinant proteins and/or peptides. The promoter may be heterologousor endogenous.

In some aspects, vectors can include initiation signals and/or internalribosome binding sites. A specific initiation signal also may beincluded for efficient translation of coding sequences. These signalsinclude the ATG initiation codon or adjacent sequences. Exogenoustranslational control signals, including the ATG initiation codon, mayneed to be provided. One of ordinary skill in the art would readily becapable of determining this and providing the necessary signals. It iswell known that the initiation codon must be “in-frame” with the readingframe of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entireinsert. The exogenous translational control signals and initiationcodons can be either natural or synthetic. The efficiency of expressionmay be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancerelements.

In some aspects, a vector can include sequences that increase oroptimize the expression level of the DNA segment encoding the gene ofinterest. An example of such sequences includes addition of introns inthe expressed mRNA (Brinster, R. L. et al. (1988) Introns increasetranscriptional efficiency in transgenic mice. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.USA 85, 836-40; Choi, T. et al. (1991) A generic intron increases geneexpression in transgenic mice. Mol. Cell. Biol. 11, 3070-4). Anotherexample of a method for optimizing expression of the DNA segment is“codon optimization”. Codon optimization involves insertion of silentmutations in the DNA segment to reduce the use of rare codons tooptimize protein translation (Codon engineering for improved antibodyexpression in mammalian cells. Carton J M, Sauerwald T, Hawley-Nelson P,Morse B, Peffer N, Beck H, Lu J, Cotty A, Amegadzie B, Sweet R. ProteinExpr Purif. 2007 October; 55(2):279-86. Epub 2007 Jun. 16).

In some aspects, a vector can include multiple cloning sites. Vectorscan include a multiple cloning site (MCS), which is a nucleic acidregion that contains multiple restriction enzyme sites, any of which canbe used in conjunction with standard recombinant technology to digestthe vector (see Carbonelli et al., 1999, Levenson et al., 1998, andCocea, 1997, incorporated herein by reference.) “Restriction enzymedigestion” refers to catalytic cleavage of a nucleic acid molecule withan enzyme that functions only at specific locations in a nucleic acidmolecule. Many of these restriction enzymes are commercially available.Use of such enzymes is understood by those of skill in the art.Frequently, a vector is linearized or fragmented using a restrictionenzyme that cuts within the MCS to enable exogenous sequences to beligated to the vector. “Ligation” refers to the process of formingphosphodiester bonds between two nucleic acid fragments, which may ormay not be contiguous with each other. Techniques involving restrictionenzymes and ligation reactions are well known to those of skill in theart of recombinant technology.

In some aspects, a vector can include a termination signal. The vectorsor constructs will generally comprise at least one termination signal. A“termination signal” or “terminator” is comprised of the DNA sequencesinvolved in specific termination of an RNA transcript by an RNApolymerase. Thus, in certain embodiments, a termination signal that endsthe production of an RNA transcript is contemplated. A terminator may benecessary in vivo to achieve desirable message levels.

Terminators contemplated for use include any known terminator oftranscription described herein or known to one of ordinary skill in theart, including but not limited to, for example, rho dependent or rhoindependent terminators. In certain embodiments, the termination signalmay be a lack of transcribable or translatable sequence, such as due toa sequence truncation.

In some aspects, a vector can include an origin of replication.

In order to propagate a vector in a host cell, it may contain one ormore origins of replication sites (often termed “ori”), which is aspecific nucleic acid sequence at which replication is initiated.

In some aspects, a vector can include one or more selectable and/orscreenable markers. In certain embodiments, cells containing a nucleicacid construct may be identified in vitro or in vivo by including amarker in the expression vector. Such markers would confer anidentifiable change to the cell permitting easy identification of cellscontaining the expression vector. Generally, a selectable marker is onethat confers a property that allows for selection. A positive selectablemarker is one in which the presence of the marker allows for itsselection, while a negative selectable marker is one in which itspresence prevents its selection. An example of a positive selectablemarker is a drug resistance marker.

Usually the inclusion of a drug selection marker aids in the cloning andidentification of transformants, for example, genes that conferresistance to neomycin, puromycin, hygromycin, DHFR, GPT, zeocin andhistidinol are useful selectable markers. In addition to markersconferring a phenotype that allows for the discrimination oftransformants based on the implementation of conditions, other types ofmarkers including screenable markers such as GFP, whose basis iscolorimetric analysis, are also contemplated. Alternatively, screenableenzymes such as chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT) may be utilized.One of skill in the art would also know how to employ immunologicmarkers, possibly in conjunction with FACS analysis. The marker used isnot believed to be important, so long as it is capable of beingexpressed simultaneously with the nucleic acid encoding a gene product.Further examples of selectable and screenable markers are well known toone of skill in the art.

In one aspect, the vector can express DNA segments encoding multiplepolypeptides of interest. For example, DNA segments encoding both theimmunoglobulin heavy chain and light chain can be encoded and expressedby a single vector. In one aspect, both DNA segments can be included onthe same expressed RNA and internal ribosome binding site (IRES)sequences used to enable expression of the DNA segments as separatepolypeptides (Pinkstaff J K, Chappell S A, Mauro V P, Edelman G M,Krushel L A., Internal initiation of translation of five dendriticallylocalized neuronal mRNAs., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA. 2001 Feb. 27;98(5):2770-5. Epub 2001 Feb. 20). In another aspect, each DNA segmenthas its own promoter region resulting in expression of separate mRNAs(Andersen C R, Nielsen L S, Baer A, Tolstrup A B, Weilguny D. EfficientExpression from One CMV Enhancer Controlling Two Core Promoters. MolBiotechnol. 2010 Nov. 27. [Epub ahead of print]).

Host Cells and Expression Systems

In some aspects, a composition can include a host cell. In some aspects,a host cell can include a polynucleotide or vector described herein. Insome aspects, a host cell can include a eukaryotic cell (e.g., insect,yeast, or mammalian) or a prokaryotic cell (e.g., bacteria). In thecontext of expressing a heterologous nucleic acid sequence, “host cell”can refer to a prokaryotic cell, and it includes any transformableorganism that is capable of replicating a vector and/or expressing aheterologous gene encoded by a vector. A host cell can, and has been,used as a recipient for vectors. A host cell may be “transfected” or“transformed,” which refers to a process by which exogenous nucleic acidis transferred or introduced into the host cell. A transformed cellincludes the primary subject cell and its progeny.

In particular embodiments, a host cell is a Gram negative bacterialcell. These bacteria are suited for use in that they possess aperiplasmic space between the inner and outer membrane and,particularly, the aforementioned inner membrane between the periplasmand cytoplasm, which is also known as the cytoplasmic membrane. As such,any other cell with such a periplasmic space could be used. Examples ofGram negative bacteria include, but are not limited to, E. coli,Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Vibrio cholera, Salmonella typhimurium, Shigellaflexneri, Haemophilus influenza, Bordetella pertussis, Erwiniaamylovora, Rhizobium sp. The Gram negative bacterial cell may be stillfurther defined as bacterial cell which has been transformed with thecoding sequence of a fusion polypeptide comprising a candidate bindingpolypeptide capable of binding a selected ligand. The polypeptide isanchored to the outer face of the cytoplasmic membrane, facing theperiplasmic space, and may comprise an antibody coding sequence oranother sequence. One means for expression of the polypeptide is byattaching a leader sequence to the polypeptide capable of causing suchdirecting.

Numerous prokaryotic cell lines and cultures are available for use as ahost cell, and they can be obtained through the American Type CultureCollection (ATCC), which is an organization that serves as an archivefor living cultures and genetic materials. An appropriate host can bedetermined by one of skill in the art based on the vector backbone andthe desired result. A plasmid or cosmid, for example, can be introducedinto a prokaryote host cell for replication of many vectors. Bacterialcells used as host cells for vector replication and/or expressioninclude DH5-alpha, JM109, and KC8, as well as a number of commerciallyavailable bacterial hosts such as SURE™ Competent Cells and SOLOPACK™Gold Cells (STRATAGENE™, La Jolla). In some aspects, other bacterialcells such as E. coli LE392 are contemplated for use as host cells.

Many host cells from various cell types and organisms are available andwould be known to one of skill in the art. Similarly, a viral vector maybe used in conjunction with a prokaryotic host cell, particularly onethat is permissive for replication or expression of the vector. Somevectors may employ control sequences that allow it to be replicatedand/or expressed in both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells. One of skillin the art would further understand the conditions under which toincubate all of the above described host cells to maintain them and topermit replication of a vector. Also understood and known are techniquesand conditions that would allow large-scale production of vectors, aswell as production of the nucleic acids encoded by vectors and theircognate polypeptides, proteins, or peptides.

In some aspects, a host cell is mammalian. Examples include CHO cells,CHO-K1 cells, or CHO-S cells. Other mammalian host cells include NS0cells and CHO cells that are dhfr-, e.g., CHO-dhfr-, DUKX-B11 CHO cells,and DG44 CHO cells.

Numerous expression systems exist can that comprise at least a part orall of the compositions disclosed herein. Expression systems can includeeukaryotic expression systems and prokaryotic expression systems. Suchsystems could be used, for example, for the production of a polypeptideproduct identified as capable of binding a particular ligand.Prokaryote-based systems can be employed to produce nucleic acidsequences, or their cognate polypeptides, proteins and peptides. Manysuch systems are commercially and widely available. Other examples ofexpression systems comprise of vectors containing a strong prokaryoticpromoter such as T7, Tac, Trc, BAD, lambda pL, Tetracycline or Lacpromoters, the pET Expression System and an E. coli expression system.

Polypeptides

In some aspects, a composition can include a polypeptide. In someaspects, a polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide described herein canbe expressed, e.g., from a host cell. The terms “polypeptide” or“protein” include a macromolecule having the amino acid sequence of anative protein, that is, a protein produced by a naturally-occurring andnon-recombinant cell; or it is produced by a genetically-engineered orrecombinant cell, and comprise molecules having the amino acid sequenceof the native protein, or molecules having deletions from, additions to,and/or substitutions of one or more amino acids of the native sequence.The term also includes amino acid polymers in which one or more aminoacids are chemical analogs of a corresponding naturally-occurring aminoacid and polymers. The terms “polypeptide” and “protein” encompassantigen binding proteins, antibodies, or sequences that have deletionsfrom, additions to, and/or substitutions of one or more amino acids ofantigen-binding protein. The term “polypeptide fragment” refers to apolypeptide that has an amino-terminal deletion, a carboxyl-terminaldeletion, and/or an internal deletion as compared with the full-lengthnative protein. Such fragments can also contain modified amino acids ascompared with the native protein. In certain embodiments, fragments areabout five to 500 amino acids long. For example, fragments can be atleast 5, 6, 8, 10, 14, 20, 50, 70, 100, 110, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,400, or 450 amino acids long. Useful polypeptide fragments includeimmunologically functional fragments of antibodies, including bindingdomains. In the case of a binding antibody, useful fragments include butare not limited to a CDR region, a variable domain of a heavy and/orlight chain, a portion of an antibody chain or just its variable regionincluding two CDRs, and the like.

The term “isolated protein” means that a subject protein (1) is free ofat least some other proteins with which it would normally be found, (2)is essentially free of other proteins from the same source, e.g., fromthe same species, (3) is expressed by a cell from a different species,(4) has been separated from at least about 50 percent ofpolynucleotides, lipids, carbohydrates, or other materials with which itis associated in nature, (5) is operably associated (by covalent ornoncovalent interaction) with a polypeptide with which it is notassociated in nature, or (6) does not occur in nature. Typically, an“isolated protein” constitutes at least about 5%, at least about 10%, atleast about 25%, or at least about 50% of a given sample. Genomic DNA,cDNA, mRNA or other RNA, nucleic acids of synthetic origin, or anycombination thereof can encode such an isolated protein. Preferably, theisolated protein is substantially free from proteins or polypeptides orother contaminants that are found in its natural environment that wouldinterfere with its therapeutic, diagnostic, prophylactic, research orother use.

In some aspects, a polypeptide can include an antigen binding protein(ABP). An “antigen binding protein” (“ABP”) as used herein means anyprotein that binds a specified target antigen. “Antigen binding protein”includes but is not limited to antibodies and binding parts thereof,such as immunologically functional fragments. Peptibodies are anotherexample of antigen binding proteins. The term “immunologicallyfunctional fragment” (or simply “fragment”) of an antibody orimmunoglobulin chain (heavy or light chain) antigen binding protein, asused herein, is a species of antigen binding protein comprising aportion (regardless of how that portion is obtained or synthesized) ofan antibody that lacks at least some of the amino acids present in afull-length chain but which is still capable of specifically binding toan antigen. Such fragments are biologically active in that they bind tothe target antigen and can compete with other antigen binding proteins,including intact antibodies, for binding to a given epitope. In someembodiments, the fragments are neutralizing fragments. Thesebiologically active fragments can be produced by recombinant DNAtechniques, or can be produced by enzymatic or chemical cleavage ofantigen binding proteins, including intact antibodies. Immunologicallyfunctional immunoglobulin fragments include, but are not limited to,Fab, a diabody (heavy chain variable domain on the same polypeptide as alight chain variable domain, connected via a short peptide linker thatis too short to permit pairing between the two domains on the samechain), Fab′, F(ab′)2, Fv, domain antibodies and single-chainantibodies, and can be derived from any mammalian source, including butnot limited to human, mouse, rat, camelid or rabbit. It is furthercontemplated that a functional portion of the antigen binding proteinsdisclosed herein, for example, one or more CDRs, could be covalentlybound to a second protein or to a small molecule to create a therapeuticagent directed to a particular target in the body, possessingbifunctional therapeutic properties, or having a prolonged serumhalf-life. As will be appreciated by one of skill in the art, an antigenbinding protein can include nonprotein components. Additional detailsabout antigen binding proteins and antibodies such as modifications,variants, methods of making, and methods of screening can be found inU.S. Pat. Pub. 20110027287, herein incorporated by reference in itsentirety for all purposes.

In some aspects, a polypeptide can include an antibody. The term“antibody” refers to an intact immunoglobulin of any isotype, or afragment thereof that can compete with the intact antibody for specificbinding to the target antigen, and includes, for instance, chimeric,humanized, fully human, and bispecific antibodies. An “antibody” is aspecies of an antigen binding protein. An intact antibody will generallycomprise at least two full-length heavy chains and two full-length lightchains, but in some instances can include fewer chains such asantibodies naturally occurring in camelids which can comprise only heavychains. Antibodies can be derived solely from a single source, or can be“chimeric,” that is, different portions of the antibody can be derivedfrom two different antibodies. The antigen binding proteins, antibodies,or binding fragments can be produced in hybridomas, by recombinant DNAtechniques, or by enzymatic or chemical cleavage of intact antibodies.Unless otherwise indicated, the term “antibody” includes, in addition toantibodies comprising two full-length heavy chains and two full-lengthlight chains, derivatives, variants, fragments, and muteins thereof.Furthermore, unless explicitly excluded, antibodies include monoclonalantibodies, bispecific antibodies, minibodies, domain antibodies,synthetic antibodies (sometimes referred to herein as “antibodymimetics”), chimeric antibodies, humanized antibodies, human antibodies,antibody fusions (sometimes referred to herein as “antibodyconjugates”), and fragments thereof, respectively. In some embodiments,the term also encompasses peptibodies.

A therapeutically effective amount of an ABP can be administered to asubject in need thereof. ABPs can be formulated in pharmaceuticalcompositions. These compositions can comprise, in addition to one ormore of the ABPs, a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier,buffer, stabilizer or other materials well known to those skilled in theart. Such materials should be non-toxic and should not interfere withthe efficacy of the active ingredient. The precise nature of the carrieror other material can depend on the route of administration, e.g. oral,intravenous, cutaneous or subcutaneous, nasal, intramuscular,intraperitoneal routes.

Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be in tablet,capsule, powder or liquid form. A tablet can include a solid carriersuch as gelatin or an adjuvant. Liquid pharmaceutical compositionsgenerally include a liquid carrier such as water, petroleum, animal orvegetable oils, mineral oil or synthetic oil. Physiological salinesolution, dextrose or other saccharide solution or glycols such asethylene glycol, propylene glycol or polyethylene glycol can beincluded.

For intravenous, cutaneous or subcutaneous injection, or injection atthe site of affliction, the active ingredient will be in the form of aparenterally acceptable aqueous solution which is pyrogen-free and hassuitable pH, isotonicity and stability. Those of relevant skill in theart are well able to prepare suitable solutions using, for example,isotonic vehicles such as Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection,Lactated Ringer's Injection. Preservatives, stabilizers, buffers,antioxidants and/or other additives can be included, as required.

ABP administration is preferably in a “therapeutically effective amount”or “prophylactically effective amount” (as the case can be, althoughprophylaxis can be considered therapy), this being sufficient to showbenefit to the individual. The actual amount administered, and rate andtime-course of administration, will depend on the nature and severity ofdisease being treated. Prescription of treatment, e.g. decisions ondosage etc., is within the responsibility of general practitioners andother medical doctors, and typically takes account of the disorder to betreated, the condition of the individual patient, the site of delivery,the method of administration and other factors known to practitioners.Examples of the techniques and protocols mentioned above can be found inRemington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th edition, Osol, A. (ed), 1980.

A composition can be administered alone or in combination with othertreatments, either simultaneously or sequentially dependent upon thecondition to be treated.

Immune Cells

A sample can include immune cells. The immune cells can include T cellsand B cells. T-cells (T lymphocytes) include, for example, cells thatexpress T cell receptors. B-cells include, for example, activated Bcells, blasting B cells, plasma cells, plasmablasts, memory B cells, B1cells, B2 cells, marginal-zone B cells, and follicular B cells. T cellsinclude activated T cells, blasting T cells, Helper T cells (effector Tcells or Th cells), cytotoxic T cells (CTLs), memory T cells, centralmemory T cells, effector memory T cells and regulatory T cells. A samplecan include a single cell in some applications (e.g., a calibration testto define relevant T or B cells) or more generally at least 1,000, atleast 10,000, at least 100,000, at least 250,000, at least 500,000, atleast 750,000, or at least 1,000,000 cells.

B Cells

As used herein a “B cell” refers to any cell that has at least onerearranged immunoglobulin gene locus. A B cell can include at least onerearranged immunoglobulin heavy chain locus or at least one rearrangedimmunoglobulin light chain locus. A B cell can include at least onerearranged immunoglobulin heavy chain locus and at least one rearrangedimmunoglobulin light chain locus. B cells are lymphocytes that are partof the adaptive immune system. B cells can include any cells thatexpress antibodies either in the membrane-bound form as the B-cellreceptor (BCR) on the cell surface or as secreted antibodies. B cellscan express immunoglobulins (antibodies, B cell receptor). Antibodiescan include heterodimers formed from the heavy and light immunoglobulinchains. The heavy chain is formed from gene rearrangements of thevariable, diversity, and junctional (VDJ) genes to form the variableregion, which is joined to the constant region. The light chain isformed from gene rearrangements of the variable and junctional (VJ)genes to form the variable region, which is then joined to the constantregion. Owing to a large possible number of junctional combinations, thevariable regions of the antibody gene (which is also the BCR) have hugediversity, enabling B cells to recognize any foreign antigen and mount aresponse against it.

B-Cell Activation and Differentiation

B cells are activated and differentiate when they recognize an antigenin the context of an inflammatory immune response. They usually include2 signals to become activated, one signal delivered through BCR (amembrane-bound form of the rearranged immunoglobulin), and anotherdelivered through CD40 or another co-stimulatory molecule. This secondsignal can be provided through interaction with helper T cells, whichexpress the ligand for CD40 (CD40L) on their surface. B cells thenproliferate and may undergo somatic hypermutation, where random changesin the nucleotide sequences of the antibody genes are made, and B cellswhose antibodies have a higher affinity B cells are selected. They mayalso undergo “class-switching”, in which the constant region of theheavy chain encoding the IgM isotype is switched to the constant regionencoding the IgG, IgA, or IgE isotype. Differentiating B cells may endup as memory B cells, which are usually of higher affinity and classedswitched, though some memory B cells are still of the IgM isotype.Memory B cells can also become activated and differentiate intoplasmablasts and ultimately, into plasma cells. Differentiating B cellsmay also first become plasmablasts, which then differentiate to becomeplasma cells.

Affinity Maturation and Clonal Families

A clonal family is generally defined by the use of relatedimmunoglobulin heavy chain and/or light chain V(D)J sequences by 2 ormore samples. Related immunoglobulin heavy chain V(D)J sequences can beidentified by their shared usage of V(D)J gene segments encoded in thegenome. Within a clonal family there are generally subfamilies that varybased on shared mutations within their V(D)J segments, that can ariseduring B cell gene recombination and somatic hypermutation.

Activated B cells migrate and form germinal centers within lymphoid orother tissues, where they undergo affinity maturation. B cells may alsoundergo affinity maturation outside of germinal centers. During affinitymaturation, B cells undergo random mutations in their antibody genes,concentrated in the complementary determining regions (CDRs) of thegenes, which encode the parts of the antibody that directly bind to andrecognize the target antigen against which the B cell was activated.This creates sub-clones from the original proliferating B cell thatexpress immunoglobulins that are slightly different from the originalclone and from each other. Clones compete for antigen and thehigher-affinity clones are selected, while the lower-affinity clones dieby apoptosis. This process results in the “affinity maturation” of Bcells and consequently in the generation of B cells expressingimmunoglobulins that bind to the antigen with higher affinity. All the Bcells that originate from the same ‘parent’ B cell form clonal families,and these clonal families include B cells that recognize the same orsimilar antigenic epitopes. In some aspects, we expect that clonespresent at higher frequencies represent clones that bind to antigen withhigher affinity, because the highest-affinity clones are selected duringaffinity maturation. In some aspects, clones with different V(D)Jsegment usage exhibit different binding characteristics. In someaspects, clones with the same V(D)J segment usage but differentmutations exhibit different binding characteristics.

Memory B Cells

Memory B cells are usually affinity-matured B cells, and may beclass-switched. These are cells that can respond more rapidly to asubsequent antigenic challenge, significantly reducing the time includedfor affinity-matured antibody secretion against the antigen from ˜14days in a naive organism to ˜7 days.

Plasmablasts and Plasma Cells

Plasma cells can be either long-lived or short-lived. Long-lived plasmacells may survive for the lifetime of the organism, whereas short-livedplasma cells can last for 3-4 days. Long-lived plasma cells resideeither in areas of inflammation, in the mucosal areas (in the case ofIgA-secreting plasma cells), in secondary lymphoid tissues (such as thespleen or lymph nodes), or in the bone marrow. To reach these divergentareas, plasmablasts fated to become long-lived plasma cells may firsttravel through the bloodstream before utilizing various chemokinegradients to traffic to the appropriate areas. Plasmablasts are cellsthat are affinity matured, are typically classed-switched, and usuallysecrete antibodies, though generally in lower quantities than thequantity of antibody produced by plasma cells. Plasma cells arededicated antibody secretors.

Characteristics of TCR and BCR Genes

Since identifying recombinations are present in the DNA of eachindividual adaptive immune cell as well as their associated RNAtranscripts, either RNA or DNA can be sequenced. A recombined sequencefrom a T-cell or B-cell can also be referred to as a clonotype. The DNAor RNA can correspond to sequences from T-cell receptor (TCR) genes orimmunoglobulin (Ig) genes that encode antibodies. For example, the DNAand RNA can correspond to sequences encoding alpha, beta, gamma, ordelta chains of a TCR. In a majority of T-cells, the TCR is aheterodimer consisting of an alpha-chain and beta-chain. The TCR-alphachain is generated by VJ recombination, and the beta chain receptor isgenerated by V(D)J recombination. For the TCR-beta chain, in humansthere are 48 V segments, 2 D segments, and 13 J segments. Several basesmay be deleted and others added (called N and P nucleotides) at each ofthe two junctions. In a minority of T-cells, the TCRs consist of gammaand delta chains. The TCR gamma chain is generated by VJ recombination,and the TCR delta chain is generated by V(D)J recombination (KennethMurphy, Paul Travers, and Mark Walport, Janeway's Immunology 7thedition, Garland Science, 2007, which is herein incorporated byreference in its entirety).

The DNA and RNA analyzed in the methods can correspond to sequencesencoding heavy chain immunoglobulins (IgH) with constant regions (alpha,delta, gamma, epsilon, or mu) or light chain immunoglobulins (IgK orIgL) with constant regions lambda or kappa. Each antibody can have twoidentical light chains and two identical heavy chains. Each chain iscomposed of a constant (C) and a variable region. For the heavy chain,the variable region is composed of a variable (V), diversity (D), andjoining (J) segments. Several distinct sequences coding for each type ofthese segments are present in the genome. A specific VDJ recombinationevent occurs during the development of a B-cell, marking that cell togenerate a specific heavy chain. Diversity in the light chain isgenerated in a similar fashion except that there is no D region so thereis only VJ recombination. Somatic mutation often occurs close to thesite of the recombination, causing the addition or deletion of severalnucleotides, further increasing the diversity of heavy and light chainsgenerated by B-cells. The possible diversity of the antibodies generatedby a B-cell is then the product of the different heavy and light chains.The variable regions of the heavy and light chains contribute to formthe antigen recognition (or binding) region or site. Added to thisdiversity is a process of somatic hypermutation which can occur after aspecific response is mounted against some epitope. In this processmutations occur in those B-cells that are able to recognize the specificepitope leading to greater diversity in antibodies that may be able tobind the specific epitope more strongly. All these factors contribute togreat diversity of antibodies generated by the B-cells. Many billionsand maybe more than a trillion distinct antibodies may be generated. Thebasic premise for generating T-cell diversity is similar to that forgenerating antibodies by B-cells. An element of T-cell and B-cellactivation is their binding to epitopes. The activation of a specificcell leads to the production of more of the same type of cells leadingto a clonal expansion.

Complementarity determining regions (CDR), or hypervariable regions, aresequences in the variable domains of antigen receptors (e.g., T cellreceptor and immunoglobulin) that can bind an antigen. The chain of eachantigen receptor contains three CDRs (CDR1, CDR2, and CDR3). The twopolypeptides making T cells (alpha and beta) and immunoglobulin (IgH andIgK or IgL) contribute to the formation of the three CDRs.

The part of CDR1 and CDR2 that is coded for by TCR-beta lies within oneof 47 functional V segments. Most of the diversity of CDRs is found inCDR3, with the diversity being generated by somatic recombination eventsduring the development of T lymphocytes.

A great diversity of BCR is present inter and intra-individuals. The BCRis composed of two genes IgH and IgK (or IgL) coding for antibody heavyand light chains. Three Complementarity Determining Region (CDR)sequences that bind antigens and MHC molecules have the most diversityin IgH and IgK (or IgL). The part of CDR1 and CDR2 coded for by IgH lieswithin one of 44 functional V segments. Most of the diversity in naive Bcells emerges in the generation of CDR3 through somatic recombinationevents during the development of B lymphocytes. The recombination cangenerate a molecule with one of each of the V, D, and J segments. Inhumans, there are 44 V, 27 D, and 6 J segments; thus, there is atheoretical possibility of more than 7,000 combinations. In a smallfraction of BCRs (about 5%) two D segments are found. Furthermore,several bases may be deleted and others added (called N and Pnucleotides) at each of the two junctions generating a great degree ofdiversity. After B cell activation a process of affinity maturationthrough somatic hypermutation occurs. In this process progeny cells ofthe activated B cells accumulate distinct somatic mutations throughoutthe gene with higher mutation concentration in the CDR regions leadingto generating antibodies with higher affinity to the antigens. Inaddition to somatic hypermutation activated B cells undergo the processof isotype switching. Antibodies with the same variable segments canhave different forms (isotypes) depending on the constant segment.Whereas all naive B cells express IgM (or IgD), activated B cells mostlyexpress IgG but also IgM, IgA and IgE. This expression switching fromIgM (and/or IgD) to IgG, IgA, or IgE occurs through a recombinationevent causing one cell to specialize in producing a specific isotype.There is one segment for each IgM, IgD, and IgE, two segments for IgA,and four segments for IgG.

Methods

Application to Health Care and Biotechnology Uses

Use of the compositions and methods described herein to identifyantibodies and TCRs and to group antibody and TCR sequences into clonalfamilies has many useful and novel applications to health care andbiotechnology research. Antibody clonal families can compriseaffinity-matured non-identical clones and TCR clonal families cancomprise identical clones. These applications include, but are notlimited to: 1) the discovery and development of antibody orantibody-derived therapeutics; 2) the discovery and development ofdiagnostics; 3) the discovery and development of research tools usefulin health and biotechnology research; and 4) the development andassessment of candidate vaccines and identification of antigens usefulas vaccine components.

As the invention can be used with any type of B or T cell, the cellsource and specific B or T cell subtype(s) are chosen based on theprofile of the desired ultimate product. Examples of specific subclassesof B or T cells and their use are described in the subsection,“Isolation and enrichment of cells and cell subpopulations” in theGeneral Materials and Methods section. In general, the cells can be froma particular human or animal subject having a particular clinical stateor course of disease, or having received a particular treatment regimen,or having been exposed to a particular challenge, immunization, or setof conditions that induces an immune response.

Application to Discovery and Development of Therapeutics, Diagnostics,and Research Tools

To develop an antibody or molecule derived from an antibody for use as atherapeutic, diagnostic, or research tool, the antibody and/orderivatives of the antibody's antigen-binding regions can first beidentified or discovered as binding a/the desired antigen(s) orepitope(s) and/or having a desired functional consequence in an in vivoor in vitro system. These candidate antibodies are then further screenedfor other desired properties specific to the intended product. Thesetarget product properties will be different for different types oftherapeutic, diagnostic, and research tool antibodies, and the inventionprovides a useful means of identifying candidates for furtherdevelopment toward any of these product paths.

Based on the desired profile of the properties of the ultimate product,the source of relevant B cells can be, but is not limited to, a patientwith disease, such as an infectious disease, cancer, or an autoimmunecondition; a patient receiving a treatment, such as cancer therapy or avaccine; or an animal with disease or treated in a manner to induce animmune response, such as immunization or induction/establishment of adisease model.

In general, candidate antibodies, or candidate macromolecules derivedfrom the antigen-binding regions, that are intended for development astherapeutics, diagnostics, or research tools are discovered via multipletechnologies that fall into one of two general approaches: 1) isolationof antibodies of interest from B cells of a human's or an animal'simmune response; and 2) isolation of antibodies derived from expressionlibraries of immunoglobulin molecules, or derivatives thereof, expressedheterologously and screened using one or more display technologies(reviewed in Hoogenboom H R, Trends Biotechnol., 1997, 15:62-70; HammondP W, MAbs, 2010, 2:157-64; Nissim A, Chernajovsky Y, Handb ExpPharmacol., 2008, (181):3-18; Steinitz M, Hum Antibodies, 2009; 18:1-10;Bradbury A R, Sidhu S, Dübel S, and McCafferty, Nat Biotechnol., 2011,29:245-54; Antibody Engineering (Kontermann R E and Dübel S eds.,Springer, 2^(nd) edition)).

For the former approach (#1), candidate antibodies are selected fromparticular clonal families identified from relevant donors as describedin, e.g., the General Materials and Methods section. The invention canbe applied as described to the appropriate B-cells (e.g. blastingB-cells) from the appropriate human donor or animal to discover oridentify candidate antibodies. For example, for a cancer therapeuticantibody candidate, the appropriate human donor can be a patient who hassuccessfully suppressed cancer progression via an immune response; orfor a particular diagnostic antibody candidate, the appropriate donorcan be a patient who has autoantibodies against the diagnostic marker ora mouse immunized against the marker; or for an antibody reagent toolcandidate, the appropriate donor can be a mouse, a rabbit, a goat, arat, a horse, a chicken, a dog, or other animal immunized with thetarget molecule and/or epitope that the antibody reagent is meant torecognize. Sequences and selection of antibodies for expression andtesting can be performed as described in the General Materials andMethods section. Such applications of the technology can providecandidate antibodies often obtained via more laborious andtime-consuming methods (e.g. hybridoma technology, virus-inducedimmortalization of B cells, etc).

For the latter approach (#2), a subset of, or the entire set of pairedheavy and light chain sequences from a one or more human or animalantibody repertoires, obtained as in #1, are used to seed expressionlibraries containing identification regions to track sample origin andoriginal cognate pairs from the sample when a library and/or aselected/enriched subset of a library is sequenced using a nextgeneration sequencing platform. Variable regions and framework regioninformation can be incorporated into one or more antibody displaylibrary formats to discover candidate antibodies. Variable regions of Iggenes can be cloned and incorporated into expression vectors usingmethods described in the subsection, “Cloning and expression of clonedlight and heavy chain immunoglobulin pairs” in the General Materials andMethods section. For example, fragments and/or domains from cognate pairheavy and light chains obtained as in #1 can be used to seed Fab yeast(Weaver-Feldhaus J M, Lou J, Coleman J R, et al., FEBS Lett, 2004,564:24-34) or phagemid (Kashyap A K, Steel J, Oner A F, et al., ProcNatl Acad Sci USA, 2008, 105:5986-91) libraries with identificationregion tracking of each chain to the proper, original B cell of originregardless of combinatorial matching of different heavy and light chainsinto non-endogenous (non-cognate) pairings. The cognate pair heavy andlight chains obtained as in #1 can also be used with other displayplatforms, beyond phagemid or yeast, and can be used with other antibodyderivative expression constructs beyond Fab fragment expressionconstructs [Antibody Engineering (Kontermann, RE and Dübel S eds.,Springer, 2^(nd) edition)]. In an alternate application of theidentification regions, identification regions can be added to alreadyexisting display libraries to provide the benefits of identificationregion tracking and error correction of next generation sequencing data.Depending on the library type, format, and expression/display system,identification regions can be incorporated using PCR reactions orreverse transcriptase followed by PCR reactions (see, e.g., thesubsection, “Sequencing of paired light and heavy chain immunoglobulingenes from single B-cells” in the General Materials and Methodssection).

Candidate antibodies, whether from B cell repertoires (see, e.g.,General Materials and Methods section) or display expression library“repertoires” (Kashyap A K, Steel J, Oner A F, et al., Proc Natl AcadSci USA, 2008, 105:5986-91; Weaver-Feldhaus J M, Lou J, Coleman J R, etal., FEBS Lett, 2004, 564:24-34; Ravn U, Gueneau F, Baerlocher L, etal., Nucleic Acids Res, 2010, 38:e193; Antibody Engineering (Kontermann,RE and Dübel S eds., Springer, 2^(nd) edition), are identified byexpressing and testing the antibody or antibody-derivative molecules, orlibraries of molecules, in assays for binding against desiredantigen/target(s) and/or epitope(s) or in assays for testing offunctional consequence in an in vivo or in vitro (including ex vivosamples/preparations) setting. Published reports have described the useof identification regions to track the donor source of antibodysequences obtained from a B-cell repertoire for use in an expressionlibrary (e.g. Kashyap A K, Steel J, Oner A F, et al., Proc Natl Acad SciUSA, 2008, 105:5986-91). The identification region technology describedherein, uniquely provides useful improvements upon such identificationregion usage. The invention: 1) provides a means to track, not only eachdonor, but each donor's B cells for cognate pairing of heavy and lightchains; 2) provides a means to index back to the original B cell samplefor retrieval of more sample for cloning and/or testing; 3) provides ameans of tracking heavy and light chain origin despite non-cognatecombinatorial pairings within the expression library; 4) provides ameans of tracking heavy and light chain origin across rounds ofselection-enrichment (e.g. when monitoring sequence evolution duringpool selection in vitro, such as in Ravn U, Gueneau F, Baerlocher L, etal., Nucleic Acids Res, 2010, 38:e193).

Identification of the most frequently represented heavy or light chainsequences in a B cell immune response repertoire, and combining heavyand light chain pairs based on rank order frequency of the individualchains, has been shown to be a viable way to identify some candidateantibodies, despite the fact that the cognate pair information is notretained in the next generation sequence analyses when performed in thismanner (Reddy S T, Ge X, Miklos A E, et al., Nat Biotechnol, 2010,28:965-9). The invention also allows for this type of frequency analysismethodology, but can further provide a means to use next generationsequencing to assess the frequency of actual antibodies in therepertoire, not simply isolated, independent heavy or light chains.

Furthermore, the invention provides at least three improvements ofsignificant utility beyond frequency analysis: 1) because the cognatepairing of heavy and light chains can be tracked, the discovery ofactual antibodies from the immune response and the actual antibodyclonal families produced by the B cells in the immune response can beidentified (a clone involves a specific, cognate pair of heavy and lightchains that co-evolved from the same cell progenitors and informationabout natural pairings within the affinity maturation process wouldimprove upon approaches described in the literature to analyze immuneresponses using next generation sequencing [e.g. Wu X, Yang Z Y, Li Y,Hogerkorp C M, et al., Science, 2010, 329:856-61]); 2) identificationregions provide the means to minimize, or even eliminate, the effect onsequence analyses of sequencing errors common to next generationsequencing platforms (see, e.g., subsection, “Other sequencing dataanalysis options” in the General Materials and Methods section); and 3)identification regions provide the ability to link and track≥2 sequencesco-expressed at the single cell level.

For those candidate antibodies that have been identified as havingdesirable binding properties to an antigen, target, or epitope, or thathave a desired functional effect, more antibodies from the respectiveclonal family can be cloned and expressed (see, e.g., General Materialsand Methods section) to test for the presence of similar, butpotentially more optimal, antibodies or antibodies that are the same inbinding or functional properties but contain other difference of importto the final product profile.

For cases in which candidates are identified from display expressionlibraries, identification regions can provide a means to identifyantibodies of potentially similar sequence to candidates by identifyingsequences that were not selected in screening enrichment but whichcontain identification regions of the identified candidates and thus arederived from the same original heavy and/or light chains that seeded thelibrary. Antibodies that are lost in rounds of in vitro selection, butare similar to selected, candidate antibodies can be recovered or“rescued” for further analysis as potential candidates. Such rescue canobviate the effect of bias in expression or assays systems that may missuseful and functional antibodies (Ravn U, Gueneau F, Baerlocher L, etal., Nucleic Acids Res, 2010, 38:e193).

Once candidates with desired binding and/or functional properties areidentified, they can then be advanced to relevant assays and otherassessments based on the desired, downstream, product profile. Fortherapeutic antibodies intended for use in passive immunization,candidates are advanced to assays and preclinical testing models todetermine the best candidates for clinical testing in humans or for usein animal health, including, but not limited, assessments of propertiessuch as stability and aggregation, formulation and dosing ease, proteinexpression and manufacturing, species selectivity, pharmacology,pharmacokinetics, safety and toxicology, absorption, metabolism andtarget-antibody turnover, as well as immunogenicity [See, e.g., Lynch CM, Hart B W, and Grewal I S, MAbs, 2009, 1: 2-11; Chapman K, Pullen N,Coney L, et al., mAbs, 2009, 1, 505-516; S. Dübel, Handbook ofTherapeutic Antibodies: Technologies, Emerging Developments and ApprovedTherapeutics (John Wiley & Sons, 2010); Therapeutic MonoclonalAntibodies: From Bench to Clinic, (Z. An ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2009)Antibody Engineering (Kontermann R E and Dübel S eds., Springer, 2^(nd)edition)]. Thus many candidates are selected because the majority willbe insufficient for therapeutic testing in humans with respect to atleast one of the many properties that need to be assessed prior to humantesting (i.e. attrition). Clonal families can be mined, e.g., asdescribed above, for candidates similar to ones already characterized,but possibly harboring differences regarding one or more of theproperties that are assessed in preclinical work. Specific antibodyengineering strategies may need to be employed to optimize for certainproperties [Antibody Engineering (Kontermann R E and Dübel S eds.,Springer, 2^(nd) edition)].

For diagnostics, the invention can be used to identify antibodies, TCRs,and clonal families produced by infection or vaccination for use in thedetection of infectious agents (Selvarajah S, Chatterji U, Kuhn R, etal., 2012, 6:29-37; Berry J D, Vet J, 2005, 170:193-211), as well as forany non-infectious disease, pathological condition, or medical treatmentor therapy. Such antibodies, TCRs, and/or clonal families can provideuseful diagnostic probes for biomarkers or provide immune systeminformation about the disease state of, or effect of treatment on, ahuman or animal. As such, specific antibodies or TCRs, or specificclonal families of either immune receptor class can provide utility fordiagnostic tools and personalized medicine. In another application todiagnostics, known disease or treatment response biomarkers can be usedas immunogens to immunize mice or other animals from which B cells areharvested to identify antibodies (see, e.g., General Materials andMethods section) against the biomarker which could subsequently be usedin diagnostic tests, such as ELISAs or other immunoassays (Selvarajah S,Chatterji U, Kuhn R, et al., 2012, 6:29-37). Once identified as havingpotential diagnostic utility, candidate antibodies, TCRs, and/or clonalfamilies can be advanced to assays, models, and possibly trials relevantto the desired profile of the diagnostic product [Berry J D, Vet J,2005, 170:193-211; Diagnostic and Therapeutic Antibodies in Methods inMolecular Medicine, Vol. 40 (George A J T and Urch C E eds., HumanaPress); Antibody Engineering (Kontermann R E and Dübel S eds., Springer,2^(nd) edition); Colwill K, Renewable Protein Binder Working Group, andGräslund S, Nat Methods, 2011, 8:551-8; Pershad K, Pavlovic J D,Gräslund S, et al., Protein Eng Des Sel, 2010, 23:279-88.]. Specificantibody engineering strategies may need to be employed to optimize forcertain properties [Antibody Engineering (Kontermann R E and Dübel Seds., Springer, 2^(nd) edition)].

For research tool antibodies, candidates identified, e.g., as describedabove, can be advanced to test how they perform in the researchapplication for which the research tool antibody is intended (e.g.immunoprecipitation; immunoblotting; immunostaining and histology;immunoaffinity purification; capture-, and sandwich-, and detectionimmunoassays; for example as described in Antibodies: A LaboratoryManual, E Harlow and D Lane (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 1988).Validation criteria will be based on the final intended research use(Colwill K, Renewable Protein Binder Working Group, and Gräslund S, NatMethods, 2011, 8:551-8; Pershad K, Pavlovic J D, Gräslund S, et al.,Protein Eng Des Sel, 2010, 23:279-88). Specific antibody engineeringstrategies may need to be employed to optimize for certain properties[Antibody Engineering (Kontermann R E and Dübel S eds., Springer, 2^(nd)edition)].

Application to Vaccine Discovery and Development

The invention can be used to identify antibodies, TCRs, and clonalfamilies of each of these immune receptor classes to a vaccine challengein a human or animal. Specific antibodies can be used as probes toidentify the vaccine component(s) recognized by the antibody and theclonal family to which the antibody that was used as a probe belongs.This information about antibody and clonal families can be used to makeassessments about the proportions or strength of the immune responsetargeting particular antigens and/or epitopes of the vaccine. Theassessment of antibody immune responses to different vaccine componentscan be complemented with information collected about the concomitant TCRrepertoire response to the vaccine, (see, e.g., subsections, “For othercell types” and “PCR of other immunoglobulin heavy chains and T-cellreceptor (TCR) chains” in the General Materials and Methods section).This information can be subsequently used to understand which componentsof the vaccine, or which variants of a vaccine, or what adjuvantsproduce effective or more optimal responses from an immune system of ahuman or animal (Haynes B F, Gilbert P B, McElrath M J, et al., N Engl JMed, 2012, 366:1275-86). The approach can also be used to compareindividuals or populations in their response to a vaccine.

Similar analyses can be performed to identify and assess the antibodies,TCRs, and the clonal families produced in response to an actual pathogenand which may correlate with clinical outcomes of interest, such asprotective responses to infection (for example, identification ofantibodies from survivors of a severe influenza pandemic, Yu X, TsibaneT, McGraw P A, et al., Nature, 2008, 455:532-6; or identification ofspecific antibodies from HIV-infected individuals with broadlyHIV-neutralizing sera, Wu X, Yang Z Y, Li Y, Hogerkorp C M, et al.,Science, 2010, 329:856-61 and Walker L M, Phogat S K, Chan-Hui P Y, etal., Science, 2009, 326:285-9). Identification of such correlates ofprotection can be compared to the response produced by the vaccineand/or specific vaccine components as described above and the twodatasets can be compared to assess the ability of the vaccine to produceimmune responses that correlate to desired outcomes seen in cases ofactual infection.

Thus, the invention provides a useful means of obtaining a surrogatereadout of disease protection and vaccine response, via antibody and/orTCR repertoire sequence analysis, before a human or animal is challengedwith actual infection. Once a clonal family has been identified asbinding a particular antigen or epitope, the identification of antigensor epitopes targeted by other immune response repertoires is possiblewithout doing assays in cases where the same or similar clonal familiesare found across repertoires. Thus, in those cases where enoughinformation about a clonal family and it antigen/epitope binding isknown (see, e.g., subsection, “Screening of expressed human antibodies”in the General Materials and Methods section), sequence analysis aloneof newly analyzed repertoires can provide a readout of the antigens ofthat repertoire for the known clonal families that it contains. Thisapplication can provide a useful means to monitor responses across one,a few, or many subjects in vaccine clinical trials and to monitorimmunity and infectious disease relationships for one, a few, or manypeople on a population level.

Furthermore, antibody, TCR, and clonal families that correlate withprotection from a pathogen can be used to identify the specific antigensand sets of antigens (including both known and novel antigens) thatmediate protective and/or effective immune responses against thepathogen. Identification of the antigens targeted in effective immuneresponses can be used to guide the selection of antigens to be includedin vaccines that are expected to produce protective antibody- andTCR-mediated responses in immunized humans or animals.

Antibodies, TCR, and clonal families that do not bind known antigens inassays become candidates for identifying potentially novel antigensand/or epitopes of the pathogen against which the antibodies and/or TCRsprovide protection. Antibodies known to not bind already known antigenscan be used as probes in combination with immunoseparation and massspectroscopy to identify the previously unidentified antigen or epitope(Zhu Y Z, Cai C S, Zhang W, et al., PLoS One, 2010, 5:e13915; and see,e.g., subsections, “Immunoprecipitation of staph antigens withantibodies derived from staph-infected patients” and “Mass spectrometryidentification of peptides” in the General Materials and Methodssection). Such novel antigens or epitopes can be used as vaccinecomponents that are expected to produce or contribute to the productionof protective antibody- and TCR-mediated responses in immunized humansor animals.

In addition to facilitating development of vaccines for microbialpathogens, the antibody, TCR and clonal families can also be used todevelop tumor vaccines. Humans or animals that mount an immune responseagainst a cancer or pre-cancerous cells can yield antibodies, TCR, andclonal families that can be used to identify individual and combinationsof antigens that can be incorporated into preventative or therapeuticvaccines for cancer.

Methods for Producing One or More Polynucleotides of Interest

In some aspects, a method includes obtaining a cDNA library comprising aplurality of cDNAs associated with a plurality of samples obtained fromone or more subjects, wherein each cDNA is associated with a singlesample in the plurality of samples, and wherein each cDNA associatedwith each sample is present in a separate container; adding an adaptermolecule to the cDNA associated with each sample, wherein the adaptermolecule comprises a sample identification region and an adapter region,wherein the sample identification region is coupled to the adapterregion, and wherein the sequence of the sample identification region ofeach adapter molecule is distinct from the sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other adapter molecules added to each cDNAin the library; and allowing the adapter region to attach to each cDNAin the library to produce the one or more polynucleotides of interest.

In some aspects, obtaining the cDNA library comprises obtaining theplurality of samples and processing the samples to prepare the cDNAlibrary. In some aspects, obtaining the cDNA library comprises receivingthe cDNA library directly or indirectly from a third party that hasprocessed the plurality of samples to prepare the cDNA library.

In some aspects, the adapter molecule further comprises a universalprimer region, wherein the 3′ end of the universal primer region iscoupled to the 5′ end of the sample identification region. In someaspects, each cDNA region comprises an mRNA polynucleotide hybridized toa cDNA polynucleotide.

In some aspects, each sample comprises a cell. In some aspects, the cellis a B cell. In some aspects, the B cell is a plasmablast, memory Bcell, or a plasma cell. In some aspects, each sample comprises aplurality of cells.

In some aspects, each adapter region is attached to each cDNA viabinding, e.g., G:C binding.

In some aspects, the adapter molecule is single-stranded, and furthercomprising incorporating the adapter molecule into each cDNA by allowingan enzyme to make the adapter molecule double-stranded. In some aspects,the adapter molecule is incorporated into each cDNA to produce thepolynucleotide of interest by an MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptase.

In some aspects, methods can include amplification steps such as PCR andother amplification reactions generally known in the art.

Methods for Linking and Barcoding Polynucleotides of Interest

In some aspects, the method includes the linking of two polynucleotidesequences of interest, e.g., an antibody light chain (LC) and heavychain (HC) from a single sample, and providing one or more barcode orsequence identification sequences. In this aspect, there is provided aphysical linkage between the polynucleotide sequences of interest aswell as one or more barcodes to provide an identifier to allowpolynucleotide sequences derived from a particular source or sample tobe determined, e.g., single cell, sample well, single sample, etc.Single samples can comprise one or more B-lineage cells or other celltypes. Examples of methods to link two polynucleotide sequences ofinterest are known in the art, for example, WO 99/16904, WO 93/03151,and U.S. Pat. No. 7,749,697, which are hereby incorporated by reference.Among other advantages associated with the use of barcodes on linkedpolynucleotide sequences include facilitation of high-throughputsequencing and mapping of a sequence back to an original sample so thatit can be re-sequenced and PCR cloned to express the polynucleotidesequences, e.g., HC and LC immunoglobulin polynucleotides. Some of thehigh-throughput sequencing technologies exhibit sequencing error ratesof 1-10+%, and the use of barcodes enables repeat sequencing oftemplates to facilitate bioinformatic error correction. This isparticularly important for distinguishing sequencing errors from genevariations, such as those in immunoglobulin polynucleotides.Specifically, it can be difficult to ascertain if closely relatedsequences are in fact distinct sequences or if they instead representartifacts produced by sequencing errors. Barcodes, by enabling analysisof repeat sequencing of individual templates thereby enable sequencingerror correction, thus providing determination of whether sequences aredistinct vs. artifacts from sequencing error(s). In one embodiment, thepolynucleotide sequences are immunoglobulin HC and LC sequences thathave diverged due to somatic hypermutation, and differ by only 1nucleotide.

In this aspect, physically linked and barcoded structures as shown inFIG. 15 are generally obtained. FIG. 15 illustrates the physical linkageof two nucleic acid segments, A and B (e.g., two cDNAs). A barcode (BC)is appended to any one of ends or in the linker connecting A and B. Thisphysical linkage of A and B, as well as, addition of the barcode isaccomplished through any of a number of means, including by ligation,recombination, amplification, or overlap-extension, or a combination ofthese methods, as described in greater detail below. Optionally,additional barcodes can be added to the structure shown in FIG. 15 , toprovide compound barcoding to enable sequencing of a large number oflinked polynucleotides using a lesser number of barcodes. Also, it willbe appreciated that depending on the particular strategy used to linkthe two nucleic acid segments, any relative orientation of the segmentscan be obtained, with respect to sense and antisense orientations, i.e.,the segments, such as cDNAs, can be joined head to tail, head to head,or tail to tail.

Barcodes can be added to the polynucleotide sequences before, during orafter physical linkage using methods known in the art. These methodsinclude, but are not limited to, for example, ligation methods, such asblunt end ligation of barcode adaptors, and by the annealing andligation of compatible ends, such as those generated by homopolymerictailing, restriction enzyme digestion of a linker, or 3′ tailing of cDNAby reverse transcriptase. Barcodes can also be added in amplificationreactions using suitable primers carrying barcode sequences. Barcodescan also be added in a reverse transcription reaction using suitableprimers containing the barcode sequence. Barcodes can also be added byincorporation into oligonucleotides used to link the genes of interesttogether, through overlap-extension tails or other methods, such thatthey are located between the two genes of interest. Accordingly, usingthese methods, barcodes can be incorporated onto the ends of physicallylinked polynucleotide sequences or into the linker sequences joining thetwo polynucleotide sequences of interest.

In one embodiment, the linkage is accomplished through the use ofoverlap-extension (see FIG. 16 ). In general, overlap extension tailsare complementary sequences that are added to polynucleotide sequencesof interest to be joined. Annealing of overlap-extension tails appendedto the polynucleotide molecules of interest allow them to be linked (seeFIGS. 17, 18, 19, and 20 ). As described below, overlap-extension tailscan be added through a number of well known methods including, but notlimited to, polynucleotide synthesis reactions, such as nucleic acidamplification and reverse transcription, ligation, and recombination.Because of the variety of methods available to effect linkage, it willbe recognized that different relative orientations of the polynucleotidesegments can be obtained, with respect to sense and antisenseorientations, i.e., the segments, e.g., antibody heavy and light chains,can be joined head to tail, head to head, or tail to tail.

In one embodiment, overlap-extension tails enable the linkage ofpolynucleotide sequences generated during a polynucleotide synthesisreaction. For example, overlap extension tails can be introduced duringthe course of polynucleotide synthesis reactions, such as amplificationor reverse transcription reactions, by using primers carrying anoverlap-extension tail. Alternatively, ligation reactions can be used.As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 19, and 20 , after annealing of complementaryoverlap extension tails, the DNA is filled-in in a 5′ to 3′ directionduring the extension phase of a polynucleotide synthesis reaction, suchas PCR, to generate a double stranded polynucleotide with the twopolynucleotides of interest physically joined.

In some embodiments, an overlap-extension RT-PCR method allows thesequences to be linked simultaneously as the reaction proceeds in asingle tube, thus eliminating the need for intermediate purification. Insome embodiments, an overlap extension tail comprises a barcodesequence.

FIG. 17 illustrates generally one example of the use ofoverlap-extension tails to join polynucleotide sequences encodingantibody light and heavy chains and to provide at least one barcode.Other methods useful for linking two polynucleotide sequences ofinterest are discussed below. In this example, after polynucleotidesynthesis, e.g., reverse transcription, has occurred, the use of a LCgene specific PCR primer containing a barcode, optional sequencingprimer site, and optional restriction site (RE1) allows these elementsto be added to the end of the resulting PCR product. Primers specificfor LC (in one embodiment the V_(L) region) and HC (in one embodimentthe V_(H) region) with extension overlaps and encoding an optionalrestriction site (RE3) are indicated. In one embodiment, the LCcomprises the rearranged VJ with or without a short segment of theconstant region, and the HC comprises the rearranged V(D)J with orwithout a short segment of constant region of the heavy chain. In oneembodiment, the overlap-extension primers also contain a barcodesequence. A reverse primer specific for HC containing an optional RE2 isalso used. As amplification with these primers proceeds, a nucleic acidwith the linked structure shown is generated with a barcode at one end.Products from reactions conducted in single samples can be easilyintegrated into the other work flows disclosed herein. For example, anoptional second barcode can be added and used in conjunction with thefirst barcode to further enable multiplexing to identify large numbersof sequences using a relative minimum number of barcodes. Forsequencing, a single barcode may be sufficient.

Variations of the general scheme shown in FIG. 17 , examples of whichare illustrated herein, will be apparent. For example, the barcode canbe placed at the other end of the final product, or at both ends, orbetween the polynucleotides. Furthermore, a barcode can be included aspart of the extension overlap region (e.g., on either side of RE3 or thebarcode can be split by the RE3 sequence).

LC (including V_(L) sequences) and HC (including V_(H) sequences)sequences can be derived through a variety of means. For example, theycan be generated through reverse transcription of mRNA with either oligodT or gene specific primers. In one embodiment, a reverse transcriptionand subsequent amplification reactions are performed simultaneously,i.e., an RT-PCR reaction, to arrive at the final product. When reversetranscription is used, the extension overlap region, as well as otherelements, such as restriction sites, sequencing primer sites, oruniversal sequences, can be added via the annealing of an adaptorcomprising one or more G residues to the one, two, three, or more Cresidues generated by the 3′ tailing of cDNA generated in the reversetranscription reaction as shown, for example, in FIGS. 18, 19, and 20 .Template switching by the reverse transcriptase allows an extensionoverlap region (and other sequence elements) to be added to the cDNA.For example, as shown in FIG. 18 , when taking advantage of the 3′tailing and template switching activities of reverse transcriptase, afirst adaptor can be used to add an extension overlap sequence and abarcode to a first polynucleotide of interest, while a second adaptorwith a sequence complementary to the overlap-extension of the firstadaptor can be added to a second cDNA of interest. The complementaryextension overlap sequences anneal during a subsequent nucleic acidsynthesis reaction, such as PCR, to join the two polynucleotides ofinterest. Extension from the point of overlap results in a doublestranded DNA molecule in which the two polynucleotides of interest arelinked with a barcode between them. Variations that allow the generationof two internally located barcodes between two linked polynucleotidesequences are shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 .

Other methods for joining or linking the polynucleotide sequences ofinterest include by ligation. In this embodiment, the primer mix usedfor the amplification is designed such that the amplified targetsequences can be cleaved with appropriate restriction enzymes, andcovalent linkage by DNA ligation can be performed. Followingamplification with such a primer mix, the restriction enzymes needed toform compatible ends of the target sequences, are added to the mixture.Target sequences are then ligated together with a ligase. Nopurification of the PCR products is needed prior to either therestriction enzyme digest or ligation steps, although purification maybe performed.

In another embodiment, the polynucleotide sequences of interest can belinked by recombination. In this approach, the amplified polynucleotidesequences of interest can be joined using identical recombination sites.Linkage is performed by adding the appropriate recombinase to facilitaterecombination. Suitable recombinase systems include Flp recombinase witha variety of FRT sites, Cre recombinase with a variety of lox sites,integrase ΦC31 which carries out recombination between the attP site andthe attB site, the β-recombinase-six system as well as the Gin-gixsystem. Linkage by recombination has been exemplified for two nucleotidesequences (V_(H) linked with V_(L)) (Chapal, N. et al. 1997BioTechniques 23, 518-524), hereby incorporated by reference.

Accordingly, in one aspect, the method comprises amplifying by PCR orRT-PCR amplification, nucleotide sequences of interest using a templatederived from an isolated single cell or a population of isogenic cellsand (1) effecting linkage of the amplified nucleotide sequences ofinterest and (2) adding one more barcodes to the linked polynucleotidesequences. The method comprises an optional step of performing anadditional amplification of the linked products to, for example, addadditional barcodes, restriction sites, sequencing primer sites, and thelike.

In another aspect, a method of producing a library of barcoded linkedpairs comprising antibody heavy and light chains from single cells froma donor is provided. This aspect comprises providing alymphocyte-containing cell fraction from a donor, which is optionallyenriched for a particular lymphocyte population from said cell fraction.Further, a population of isolated single cells is obtained bydistributing cells from the lymphocyte-containing cell fraction, or theenriched cell fraction, individually among a plurality of vessels,containers, or wells. Multiplex molecular amplification (e.g., multiplexRT-PCR amplification) of the variable region encoding sequencescontained in the population of isolated single cells is performed andlinkage of pairs of heavy and light chains and barcode addition isaffected, wherein an individual pair is derived from a single cell.Further, in different embodiments, the method can comprise two optionalsteps: in the first step, the individual isolated single cell in thepopulation of single cells can be expanded to a population of isogeniccells prior to performing multiplex RT-PCR amplification, therebyproviding a plurality of vessels, containers, or wells with a populationof isogenic cells (one population of isogenic cells in one vessel,container, or well). Another optional step encompasses performing anadditional amplification of the linked light and heavy chain encodingsequences. This additional amplification step can be used to simplyincrease the amount of the linked nucleic acid, or to add a first orsecond barcode sequence or other sequence elements to the linked nucleicacid.

In some aspects, the multiplex RT-PCR amplification can be performedeither as a two-step process, where reverse transcription (RT) isperformed separate from the multiplex PCR amplification (or alternativemultiplex molecular amplification), or as a single-step process, wherethe RT and multiplex PCR amplification steps are performed with the sameprimers in one tube.

The reverse transcription (RT) is performed with an enzyme containingreverse transcriptase activity resulting in the generation of cDNA fromtotal RNA, mRNA or target specific RNA from an isolated single cell.Primers which can be utilized for the reverse transcription includeoligo-dT primers, random hexamers, random decamers, other randomprimers, or primers that are specific for the nucleotide sequences ofinterest. In some embodiments, such primers can contain elements such asbarcodes, universal priming sites, restriction sites, sequencing primersites, and the like.

The two-step multiplex RT-PCR amplification procedure allows for thecDNA generated in the RT step to be distributed to more than one vesselallowing for the storage of a template fraction before proceeding withthe amplification, if desired. Additionally, the distribution of cDNA tomore than one tube, allows for the performance of more than onemultiplex PCR amplification of nucleic acid derived from the sametemplate. This two-step approach can for example be used to amplify andlink heavy chain variable region and kappa light chain variable regionencoding sequences in one tube and heavy chain variable region andlambda light chain variable region encoding sequences in a differenttube utilizing the same template. A single cell usually only expressesone of the light chains. However, it will often be easier to perform thereactions simultaneously instead of awaiting the result of one of thereactions before performing the other. Further, the amplification ofboth kappa and lambda serves as an internal negative control, since itwould be expected that only kappa or lambda would amplify from a singlecell.

In the single-step multiplex RT-PCR procedure, reverse transcription andmultiplex PCR amplification is carried out in the same vessel,container, or well. All the components necessary to perform both thereverse transcription and the multiplex PCR in a single step areinitially added into the vessels, containers, or wells and the reactionis performed. Generally, there is no need to add additional componentsonce the reaction has been started. The advantage of single-stepmultiplex RT-PCR amplification is that it reduces the number of stepsnecessary to generate the barcode linked nucleotide sequences of thepresent invention even further. This is particularly useful whenperforming multiplex RT-PCR on an array of single cells, where the samereaction is carried out in a plurality of vessels. Generally, thecomposition needed for the single-step multiplex RT-PCR comprises anucleic acid template, an enzyme with reverse transcriptase activity, anenzyme with DNA polymerase activity, deoxynucleoside triphosphate mix(dNTP mix comprising dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP) and a multiplex primermix. The nucleic acid template is preferably total RNA or mRNA derivedfrom an isolated single cell either in a purified form, as a lysate ofthe cell, or as contained in the intact cell.

In one aspect, the methods generate libraries of linked and barcodedpolynucleotides of interest. In some aspects, the plurality ofpolynucleotide compositions in a polynucleotide library can comprise atleast 2, at least 3, at least 10, at least 30, at least 100, at least300, at least 1000, at least 3000, at least 10,000, at least 30,000, atleast 100,000, at least 300, 000, at least 1,000,000, at least3,000,000, at least 10,000,000, at least 30,000,000, or more members. Inother aspects, the plurality of polynucleotide compositions in apolynucleotide library can comprise at least 2, at least 3, at least 10,at least 30, at least 100, at least 300, at least 1000, at least 3000,at least 10,000, at least 30,000, or more genes of a cell sample's wholetranscriptome. In other aspects, the plurality of polynucleotidecompositions in a polynucleotide library comprises at least 1, at least2, at least 3, at least 10, at least 30, at least 100, at least 300, atleast 1000, at least 10,000, at least 100,000, at least 1,000,000, atleast 10,000,000, at least 1,000,000,000 or more of the differentantibody species present in the blood of an individual. These theantibody species can be expressed by plasmablasts, plasma cells, memoryB cells, long-lived plasma cells, naïve B cells, other B lineage cells,or combinations thereof.

The linked and barcoded polynucleotide compositions generated by themethods disclosed above can advantageously be subjected to highthroughout, multiplexed sequencing, preferably, using NextGen sequencingplatforms as described herein.

The linked and barcoded polynucleotide compositions generated by themethods disclosed above can also be used for cloning, producingpolypeptides of interest, and screening as disclosed herein.

Methods of Producing One or More Polynucleotides of Interest forSequencing

In some aspects, the method includes obtaining a polynucleotide librarycomprising a plurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotidecomprises a universal primer region, a sample identification region, anadapter region, and an amplicon region derived from a single sample,wherein the sequence of the universal primer region is substantiallyidentical on each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides,and wherein the sequence of the sample identification region of eachpolynucleotide derived from a first single sample is distinct from thesequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library derived from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample; and amplifying the polynucleotide librarywith a set of primers to produce the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for sequencing, wherein the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for sequencing comprises a first sequencing region, a firstplate identification region, a universal primer region, a sampleidentification region, an adapter region, an amplicon region derivedfrom a single sample, and a second sequencing region.

In some aspects, a method further includes sequencing the one or morepolynucleotides of interest. In some aspects, the sequencing is 454sequencing.

In some aspects, sequencing includes longer sequencing reads such thatthe forward and reverse sequencing reads overlap enough to enablereconstruction of the entire, approximately 600 base pair (bp) sequenceof, e.g., antibody light chains (LCs) (where exact sequence length candepend on the length of the 5′ untranslated region (UTR)), andapproximately 700 bp sequence of the heavy chains (HCs). Therefore, insome aspects, any sequencing technology that can yield sequencing readsof at least 350-400 bp and thereby achieve the overlap included forsequence assembly can be used, and sequencing technologies that enable600-700+ bp reads would allow one to sequence using just a forwardprimer (sequencing from the 5′ end).

Any technique for sequencing nucleic acid known to those skilled in theart can be used. DNA sequencing techniques include classic dideoxysequencing reactions (Sanger method) using labeled terminators orprimers and gel separation in slab or capillary electrophoresis. In apreferred embodiment, next generation (NextGen) sequencing platforms areadvantageously used in the practice of the invention. NextGen sequencingrefers to any of a number of post-classic Sanger type sequencing methodswhich are capable of high throughput, multiplex sequencing of largenumbers of samples simultaneously. Current NextGen sequencing platforms,such as those described in greater detail below, are capable ofgenerating reads from multiple distinct nucleic acids in the samesequencing run. Throughput is varied, with 100 million bases to 600 gigabases per run, and throughput is rapidly increasing due to improvementsin technology. The principle of operation of different NextGensequencing platforms is also varied and can include: sequencing bysynthesis using reversibly terminated labeled nucleotides,pyrosequencing, 454 sequencing, allele specific hybridization to alibrary of labeled oligonucleotide probes, sequencing by synthesis usingallele specific hybridization to a library of labeled clones that isfollowed by ligation, real time monitoring of the incorporation oflabeled nucleotides during a polymerization step, polony sequencing,single molecule real time sequencing, and SOLiD sequencing. Sequencinghas been demonstrated by sequential or single extension reactions usingpolymerases or ligases as well as by single or sequential differentialhybridizations with libraries of probes. These reactions have beenperformed on many clonal sequences in parallel including demonstrationsin current commercial applications of over 100 million sequences inparallel. These sequencing approaches can thus be used to study therepertoire of T-cell receptor (TCR) and/or B-cell receptor (BCR) andother sequences of interest.

The sequencing techniques can generate at least 1000 reads per run, atleast 10,000 reads per run, at least 100,000 reads per run, at least500,000 reads per run, or at least 1,000,000 reads per run.

The sequencing techniques can generate about 30 bp, about 40 bp, about50 bp, about 60 bp, about 70 bp, about 80 bp, about 90 bp, about 100 bp,about 110, about 120 bp per read, about 150 bp, about 200 bp, about 250bp, about 300 bp, about 350 bp, about 400 bp, about 450 bp, about 500bp, about 550 bp, about 600 bp, about 650 bp, or about 700 bp or more bpper read.

The sequencing techniques can generate at least 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80,90, 100, 110, 120, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600,650, 700 or more nucleotides per read.

A sequencing technique that can be used, for example, Helicos TrueSingle Molecule Sequencing (tSMS) (Harris T. D. et al. (2008) Science320:106-109). In the tSMS technique, a DNA sample is cleaved intostrands of approximately 100 to 200 nucleotides, and a polyA sequence isadded to the 3′ end of each DNA strand. Each strand is labeled by theaddition of a fluorescently labeled adenosine nucleotide. The DNAstrands are then hybridized to a flow cell, which contains millions ofoligo-T capture sites that are immobilized to the flow cell surface. Thetemplates can be at a density of about 100 million templates/cm². Theflow cell is then loaded into an instrument, e.g., HeliScope™ sequencer,and a laser illuminates the surface of the flow cell, revealing theposition of each template. A CCD camera can map the position of thetemplates on the flow cell surface. The template fluorescent label isthen cleaved and washed away. The sequencing reaction begins byintroducing a DNA polymerase and a fluorescently labeled nucleotide. Theoligo-T nucleic acid serves as a primer. The polymerase incorporates thelabeled nucleotides to the primer in a template directed manner. Thepolymerase and unincorporated nucleotides are removed. The templatesthat have directed incorporation of the fluorescently labeled nucleotideare detected by imaging the flow cell surface. After imaging, a cleavagestep removes the fluorescent label, and the process is repeated withother fluorescently labeled nucleotides until the desired read length isachieved. Sequence information is collected with each nucleotideaddition step.

Another example of a DNA sequencing technique that can be used is 454sequencing (Roche) (Margulies, M et al. 2005, Nature, 437, 376-380). 454sequencing involves two steps. In the first step, DNA is sheared intofragments of approximately 300-800 base pairs, and the fragments areblunt ended. Oligonucleotide adaptors are then ligated to the ends ofthe fragments. The adaptors serve as primers for amplification andsequencing of the fragments. The fragments can be attached to DNAcapture beads, e.g., streptavidin-coated beads using, e.g., Adaptor B,which contains 5′-biotin tag. The fragments attached to the beads arePCR amplified within droplets of an oil-water emulsion. The result ismultiple copies of clonally amplified DNA fragments on each bead. In thesecond step, the beads are captured in wells (pico-liter sized).Pyrosequencing is performed on each DNA fragment in parallel. Additionof one or more nucleotides generates a light signal that is recorded bya CCD camera in a sequencing instrument. The signal strength isproportional to the number of nucleotides incorporated.

Pyrosequencing makes use of pyrophosphate (PPi) which is released uponnucleotide addition. PPi is converted to ATP by ATP sulfurylase in thepresence of adenosine 5′ phosphosulfate. Luciferase uses ATP to convertluciferin to oxyluciferin, and this reaction generates light that isdetected and analyzed.

Another example of a DNA sequencing technique that can be used is SOLiDtechnology (Applied Biosystems). In SOLiD sequencing, genomic DNA issheared into fragments, and adaptors are attached to the 5′ and 3′ endsof the fragments to generate a fragment library. Alternatively, internaladaptors can be introduced by ligating adaptors to the 5′ and 3′ ends ofthe fragments, circularizing the fragments, digesting the circularizedfragment to generate an internal adaptor, and attaching adaptors to the5′ and 3′ ends of the resulting fragments to generate a mate-pairedlibrary. Next, clonal bead populations are prepared in microreactorscontaining beads, primers, template, and PCR components. Following PCR,the templates are denatured and beads are enriched to separate the beadswith extended templates. Templates on the selected beads are subjectedto a 3′ modification that permits bonding to a glass slide.

The sequence can be determined by sequential hybridization and ligationof partially random oligonucleotides with a central determined base (orpair of bases) that is identified by a specific fluorophore. After acolor is recorded, the ligated oligonucleotide is cleaved and removedand the process is then repeated.

Another example of a sequencing technology that can be used is SOLEXAsequencing (Illumina). SOLEXA sequencing is based on the amplificationof DNA on a solid surface using fold-back PCR and anchored primers.Genomic DNA is fragmented, and adapters are added to the 5′ and 3′ endsof the fragments. DNA fragments that are attached to the surface of flowcell channels are extended and bridge amplified. The fragments becomedouble stranded, and the double stranded molecules are denatured.Multiple cycles of the solid-phase amplification followed bydenaturation can create several million clusters of approximately 1,000copies of single-stranded DNA molecules of the same template in eachchannel of the flow cell. Primers, DNA polymerase and fourfluorophore-labeled, reversibly terminating nucleotides are used toperform sequential sequencing. After nucleotide incorporation, a laseris used to excite the fluorophores, and an image is captured and theidentity of the first base is recorded. The 3′ terminators andfluorophores from each incorporated base are removed and theincorporation, detection and identification steps are repeated.

Another example of a sequencing technology that can be used includes thesingle molecule, real-time (SMRT™) technology of Pacific Biosciences. InSMRT, each of the four DNA bases is attached to one of four differentfluorescent dyes. These dyes are phospholinked. A single DNA polymeraseis immobilized with a single molecule of template single stranded DNA atthe bottom of a zero-mode waveguide (ZMW). A ZMW is a confinementstructure which enables observation of incorporation of a singlenucleotide by DNA polymerase against the background of fluorescentnucleotides that rapidly diffuse in an out of the ZMW (in microseconds).It takes several milliseconds to incorporate a nucleotide into a growingstrand. During this time, the fluorescent label is excited and producesa fluorescent signal, and the fluorescent tag is cleaved off. Detectionof the corresponding fluorescence of the dye indicates which base wasincorporated. The process is repeated.

Another example of a sequencing technique that can be used is nanoporesequencing (Soni G V and Meller A. (2007) Clin Chem 53: 1996-2001). Ananopore is a small hole, of the order of 1 nanometer in diameter.Immersion of a nanopore in a conducting fluid and application of apotential across it results in a slight electrical current due toconduction of ions through the nanopore. The amount of current whichflows is sensitive to the size of the nanopore. As a DNA molecule passesthrough a nanopore, each nucleotide on the DNA molecule obstructs thenanopore to a different degree. Thus, the change in the current passingthrough the nanopore as the DNA molecule passes through the nanoporerepresents a reading of the DNA sequence.

Another example of a sequencing technique that can be used involvesusing a chemical-sensitive field effect transistor (chemFET) array tosequence DNA (for example, as described in US Patent ApplicationPublication No. 20090026082). In one example of the technique, DNAmolecules can be placed into reaction chambers, and the templatemolecules can be hybridized to a sequencing primer bound to apolymerase. Incorporation of one or more triphosphates into a newnucleic acid strand at the 3′ end of the sequencing primer can bedetected by a change in current by a chemFET. An array can have multiplechemFET sensors. In another example, single nucleic acids can beattached to beads, and the nucleic acids can be amplified on the bead,and the individual beads can be transferred to individual reactionchambers on a chemFET array, with each chamber having a chemFET sensor,and the nucleic acids can be sequenced.

Another example of a sequencing technique that can be used involvesusing an electron microscope (Moudrianakis E. N. and Beer M. Proc NatlAcad Sci USA. 1965 March; 53:564-71). In one example of the technique,individual DNA molecules are labeled using metallic labels that aredistinguishable using an electron microscope. These molecules are thenstretched on a flat surface and imaged using an electron microscope tomeasure sequences.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide library comprisespreparing the polynucleotide library in a laboratory. In some aspects,obtaining the polynucleotide library comprises receiving thepolynucleotide library directly or indirectly from a third party thathas prepared the polynucleotide library.

Methods for Analyzing Sequencing Data

In some aspects, the method includes obtaining a dataset associated witha plurality of polynucleotides, wherein the dataset comprises sequencingdata for the plurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotidein the plurality of polynucleotides comprises a sample identificationregion, and wherein each sample identification region on eachpolynucleotide is unique to a single sample, wherein the sequence of thesample identification region of each polynucleotide derived from a firstsingle sample is distinct from the sequence of the sample identificationregion of the other polynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotidesderived from one or more samples distinct from the first single sample;and analyzing the dataset to match together polynucleotides withidentical sample identification regions, wherein a match indicates thatthe polynucleotides originated from the same sample.

In some aspects each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotidesfurther comprises a first plate identification region, wherein eachcombination of each first plate identification region and sampleidentification region on each polynucleotide is unique to a singlesample, wherein the sequence of the first plate identification region ofeach polynucleotide derived from a first set of single samples isdistinct from the sequence of the first plate identification region ofthe other polynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides derivedfrom one or more single sample sets distinct from the first set ofsingle samples, and further comprising analyzing the dataset to matchtogether polynucleotides with identical first plate identificationregions and identical sample identification regions, wherein a matchbetween both regions indicates that the polynucleotides originated fromthe same sample.

In some aspects, both polynucleotides include a variable region. In someaspects, one polynucleotide includes a variable region. In some aspects,neither polynucleotide includes a variable region.

In some aspects, obtaining the dataset comprises obtaining the pluralityof polynucleotides and sequencing the plurality of polynucleotides toexperimentally determine the dataset. In some aspects, obtaining thedataset comprises receiving the dataset directly or indirectly from athird party that has sequenced the plurality of polynucleotides toexperimentally determine the dataset. In some aspects, the dataset isstored on an electronic storage medium. In some aspects, the dataset istransferred over the Internet.

In some aspects, the method is implemented on a computer, e.g., it is acomputer-implemented method.

In some aspects, the single sample is a single cell. In some aspects,the single sample comprises a single cell. In some aspects, the singlesample comprises a single B cell. In some aspects, the single samplecomprises a plurality of B cells. In some aspects, the single samplecomprises a single B cell and one or more other cells.

In some aspects, data generated from sequencing (e.g., 454 sequencing)can be analyzed by 454 GS FLX data analysis software, and sequences withpoor-quality scores can be filtered out. Good-quality sequences can thenbe subdivided according to their sample identification region (and insome embodiments the combination of their sample identification regionand plate identification region) by using a script in Python beforesequences are assembled using bioinformatics approaches, for example, byusing Newbler. Because reverse reads can have only a second plateidentification region in some aspects, it is possible that sequenceassembly could occur between forward and reverse reads of sequences fromdifferent cells. For circumventing this potential problem, the heavy-and light-chain V(D)J usage of both forward and reverse reads can firstbe identified using HighV-QUEST. Sequences can then be further groupedaccording to their V(D)J usage before being assembled. In some aspects,sequence assembly can be intolerant of nucleotide mismatches, therebypreventing assembly of forward and reverse reads from different cellsthat share the same V(D)J usage. In some aspects, sequences can then beclustered together based on their V(D)J usage by using a computerprogram.

In some aspects, bioinformatics methods may be used to identify groupsof sequences forming clonal families and subfamilies, and therebyimmunoglobulin sequences of interest. Such bioinformatics methodsinvolve measurements of sequence similarity. Such bioinformatics methodsmay be used to identify sequences of interest derived from an individualhuman, derived from one or more humans, derived from one or more humanswith a condition, or derived from one or more humans with differentconditions.

In some aspects, related immunoglobulin heavy and/or light chainsequences can be identified through computational phylogenetic analysisof the homology between the immunoglobulin heavy chain and/or lightchain V(D)J sequences. In some aspects, standard classification methods(i.e. clustering) of the sequences representing the individual orcombinations of the V, D, and/or J gene segments and/or other sequencesderived from the immunoglobulin heavy chain and/or light chain can beused to identify clonal families or subfamilies (for example, by usingClustalX).

As used herein “clonal family” refers to a plurality of immunoglobulinsequences each having V, D, and/or J regions, wherein each sequence is amutated version of the same germline immunoglobulin sequence having a V,D, and/or J region or the germline immunoglobulin sequence having the V,D, and/or J region. In some aspects, the plurality is a plurality ofheavy chain sequences. In some aspects, the plurality is a plurality oflight chain sequences. In some aspects, the plurality is a plurality ofpaired heavy and light chain sequences. In some aspects, each sequencehas V, D, and J regions. In some aspects, each sequence has V and Dregions. In some aspects, each sequence has D and J regions. In someaspects, each sequence has V and J regions. In some aspects, eachsequence has a V region. In some aspects, each sequence has a D region.In some aspects, each sequence has a J region. In some aspects, the oneor more mutations are located within the V, D, and/or J regions. In someaspects, the one or more mutations are located between the V, D, and/orJ regions.

In some aspects, a set of antibodies whose heavy chains all use the sameV and J gene segments are a clonal family. In some aspects, a set ofantibodies whose heavy chains all use the same V and J gene segments andwhose sum of the length of P/N nucleotides and D nucleotides are of thesame length are a clonal family. In some aspects, a set of antibodieswhose heavy chains all use the same V, D and J gene segments are aclonal family. In some aspects, a set of antibodies whose heavy chainsall use the same V, D and J gene segments, and whose P/N nucleotidesbetween the V and D gene segments are the same length, and whose P/Nnucleotides between the D and J gene segments are the same length, are aclonal family. In some aspects, a set of antibodies whose heavy chainsall use the same V and J gene segments and whose light chains all usethe same V and J gene segments are a clonal family. In some aspects, aset of antibodies whose heavy chains all use the same V and J genesegments and whose sum of the length of P/N nucleotides and Dnucleotides are of the same length, and whose light chains all use thesame V and J gene segments and whose P/N nucleotides are of the samelength, are a clonal family. In some aspects, a set of antibodies whoseheavy chains all use the same V, D and J gene segments and whose lightchains all use the same V and J gene segments are a clonal family. Insome aspects, a set of antibodies whose heavy chains all use the same V,D and J gene segments, and whose P/N nucleotides between the V and Dgene segments are the same length, and whose P/N nucleotides between theD and J gene segments are the same length, and whose light chains alluse the same V and J gene segments, and whose P/N nucleotides betweenthe V and J gene segments are the same length, are a clonal family.

Methods for Constructing Clonal Families

The V, D and J usage for a T cell receptor (TCR) or an immunoglobulinvariable gene query sequence can be determined by identifying thegermline V, D (if applicable) and J gene segments most likely to havegiven rise to the sequence. D segments are present in some TCR andimmunoglobulin sequences (e.g. TCRβ, TCRδ and antibody heavy chainsequences) but not others (e.g., TCRα, TCRγ and antibody light chainsequences). The following description includes D segments but the sameapproaches can be applied to variable region sequences that lack Dsegments. In all cases the determination of V(D)J usage uses a referencedatabase of germline V, D and J gene segment sequences such asIMGT/GENE-DB (Giudicelli V, Chaume D, Lefranc M P. IMGT/GENE-DB: acomprehensive database for human and mouse immunoglobulin and T cellreceptor genes. Nucleic Acids Res. 2005 Jan. 1; 33 (Databaseissue):D256-61).

In one approach to determination of V(D)J usage, the query sequence iscompared serially to each V, D and J germline gene segment separatelyand the most similar gene segment of each type (V, D or J) is selectedas the most likely to have given rise to the query sequence.

V-QUEST and High V-QUEST are examples of this approach (Giudicelli V,Chaume D, Lefranc M P. IMGT/V-QUEST, an integrated software program forimmunoglobulin and T cell receptor V-J and V-D-J rearrangement analysis.Nucleic Acids Res. 2004 Jul. 1; 32 (Web Server issue):W435-40; BrochetX, Lefranc M P, Giudicelli V. IMGT/V-QUEST: the highly customized andintegrated system for IG and TR standardized V-J and V-D-J sequenceanalysis. Nucleic Acids Res. 2008 Jul. 1; 36 (Web Server issue):W503-8).V-QUEST first generates pairwise alignments for the query sequence andeach V gene segment sequence. Then it generates pairwise alignments forthe query sequence region downstream of the deduced 3′ end of the Vsegment and each J gene segment sequence. If a D segment is present,V-QUEST then generates pairwise alignments for the query sequence regionfound between the regions matching V and J segments and each D genesegment sequence. V-QUEST can also infer the boundaries of the V-D, V-Jand/or D-J junction regions.

In another approach to determination of V(D)J usage, the combination ofgermline V, D and J segments most likely to have given rise to the querysequence is identified in a single step rather than in three separatesteps for V, D and J respectively. This approach has the advantage thatthe identification of one type of segment (V, D or J) can take intoaccount information about the potential matches to the other two typesof segments. For example, the best matching D segment might depend uponwhich V segment match is being considered. SoDA is an example of thisapproach (Volpe J M, Cowell L G, Kepler T B. SoDA: implementation of a3D alignment algorithm for inference of antigen receptor recombinations.Bioinformatics. 2006 Feb. 15; 22(4):438-44). SoDA first selectscandidate V, D and J segments. It generates pairwise local alignmentsfor the query sequence and each V gene segment sequence and then keepsonly the V segments with alignments meeting a score threshold. Itrepeats these steps for the J segments and D segments. Then an optimalalignment is generated for each possible combination of candidate V, Dand J segments. The alignments are generated using the same generaldynamic programming approach widely used in sequence alignment(Needleman, S. B. and Wunsch, C. D. (1970) A general method applicableto the search for similarities in the amino acid sequence of twoproteins. J. Mol. Biol., 48,443-453), but allowing for the insertion ofadditional nucleotides at the V-D, V-J and/or D-J junctions. Suchinsertion commonly takes place during the biological process of V(D)Jrecombination. In sequence alignment by dynamic programming there aretypically penalty scores associated with insertions, deletions andmismatches. However, in this approach to determining V(D)J usage, nopenalties are applied for the insertion of nucleotides at the junctionsbetween segments. The V(D)J combination yielding the highest-scoringalignment is selected to indicate the V(D)J usage for the querysequence. This approach can also identify the boundaries of junctionsequence regions.

From the clonal families and subfamilies, a variety of approaches can beused to select specific clones for expression of their encoded pairedheavy and light chain immunoglobulin genes and characterization of theirbinding properties. In some aspects, the highest frequency clones fromclonal families and/or clonal subfamilies as well as otherrepresentative clones from clonal families and subfamilies are expressedand screened for their binding properties. Clones may also be randomlyselected, from all clones, from all or select clonal families, and/orfrom all or select clonal subfamilies for expression andcharacterization of their binding characteristics. Clones may also beselected based on possessing larger numbers of variations in thevariable region of the antibody. A phylogenetic tree may be constructed,and clones may be selected based on features of the phylogenetic tree,for example by descending the tree always choosing the branch with thelargest number of leaf nodes underneath.

In some aspects, a method further includes selecting one or morepolynucleotides for cloning.

Methods for Identifying a Second Polynucleotide of Interest Based onSelection of a First Polynucleotide of Interest

In some aspects, the method includes obtaining a dataset associated witha plurality of polynucleotides, wherein the dataset comprises sequencingdata for the plurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotidein the plurality of polynucleotides comprises a sample identificationregion, and wherein each sample identification region on eachpolynucleotide is unique to a single sample thereby associating eachpolynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides with a distinctsingle sample, wherein the sequence of the sample identification regionof each polynucleotide derived from a first single sample is distinctfrom the sequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides derived from one ormore samples distinct from the first single sample; and selecting afirst polynucleotide of interest associated with a first single samplefrom the dataset and identifying a second polynucleotide of interest inthe first single sample based on the sample identification region of thefirst polynucleotide of interest.

In some aspects, each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotidesfurther comprises a first plate identification region, wherein eachcombination of each first plate identification region and sampleidentification region on each polynucleotide is unique to a singlesample, wherein the sequence of the first plate identification region ofeach polynucleotide derived from a first set of single samples isdistinct from the sequence of the first plate identification region ofthe other polynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides derivedfrom one or more single sample sets distinct from the first set ofsingle samples, and further comprising identifying a secondpolynucleotide of interest in the first single sample based on thesample identification region and first plate identification region ofthe first polynucleotide of interest.

In some aspects, both polynucleotides include a variable region. In someaspects, one polynucleotide includes a variable region. In some aspects,neither polynucleotide includes a variable region.

In some aspects, the method is implemented on a computer, e.g., it is acomputer-implemented method.

In some aspects, the first single sample comprises a B cell. In someaspects, the first single sample comprises a single B cell and one ormore other cells. In some aspects, the first single sample comprises aplurality of B cells. In some aspects, the first single sample comprisesa B cell, wherein the first polynucleotide of interest comprises anantibody heavy chain nucleotide sequence, and wherein the secondpolynucleotide of interest comprises an antibody light chain nucleotidesequence. In some aspects, the first single sample comprises a B cell,wherein the first polynucleotide of interest comprises an antibody lightchain nucleotide sequence, and wherein the second polynucleotide ofinterest comprises an antibody heavy chain nucleotide sequence.

In some aspects, obtaining the dataset comprises obtaining the pluralityof polynucleotides and sequencing the plurality of polynucleotides toexperimentally determine the dataset. In some aspects, obtaining thedataset comprises receiving the dataset directly or indirectly from athird party that has sequenced the plurality of polynucleotides toexperimentally determine the dataset. In some aspects, the dataset isstored on an electronic storage medium.

Methods of Producing One or More Polynucleotides of Interest for Cloning

In some aspects, the method includes obtaining a polynucleotide librarycomprising a plurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotidecomprises a universal primer region, a sample identification region, anadapter region, and an amplicon region derived from a single sample,wherein the sequence of the universal primer region is substantiallyidentical on each polynucleotide in the plurality of polynucleotides,and wherein the sequence of the sample identification region of eachpolynucleotide derived from a first single sample is distinct from thesequence of the sample identification region of the otherpolynucleotides in the library derived from one or more samples distinctfrom the first single sample; and amplifying the polynucleotide librarywith a set of primers to produce the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for cloning, wherein the one or more polynucleotides ofinterest for cloning comprises a first restriction site region, auniversal primer region, a sample identification region, an adapterregion, an amplicon region derived from a single sample, and a secondrestriction site region.

In some aspects, obtaining the polynucleotide library comprisespreparing the polynucleotide library in a laboratory. In some aspects,obtaining the polynucleotide library comprises receiving thepolynucleotide library directly or indirectly from a third party thathas prepared the polynucleotide library.

In some aspects, a methods further include cloning one or morepolynucleotides, e.g., into a vector disclosed herein.

Methods of Producing a Molecule of Interest

In some aspects, the method includes obtaining a host cell comprising apolynucleotide of interest; and culturing the host cell under conditionssufficient to produce the molecule of interest.

In some aspects, obtaining the host cell comprises preparing the hostcell comprising the polynucleotide in a laboratory. In some aspects,obtaining the host cell comprises receiving the host cell comprising thepolynucleotide directly or indirectly from a third party that hasprepared the host cell.

In some aspects, the molecule of interest is a polypeptide. In someaspects, the molecule of interest is an antibody. In some aspects, themolecule of interest is a human monoclonal antibody.

In some aspects, the method further includes collecting the molecule ofinterest.

In some aspects, it is desirable to “refold” certain polypeptides, e.g.,polypeptides comprising one or more ABP components or the ABP itself. Incertain embodiments, such polypeptides are produced using expressionsystems discussed herein. In certain embodiments, polypeptides are“refolded” and/or oxidized to form desired tertiary structure and/or togenerate disulfide linkages. In certain embodiments, such structureand/or linkages are related to certain biological activity of apolypeptide. In certain embodiments, refolding is accomplished using anyof a number of procedures known in the art. Exemplary methods include,but are not limited to, exposing the solubilized polypeptide agent to apH typically above 7 in the presence of a chaotropic agent. An exemplarychaotropic agent is guanidine. In certain embodiments, therefolding/oxidation solution also contains a reducing agent and theoxidized form of that reducing agent. In certain embodiments, thereducing agent and its oxidized form are present in a ratio that willgenerate a particular redox potential that allows disulfide shuffling tooccur. In certain embodiments, such shuffling allows the formation ofcysteine bridges. Exemplary redox couples include, but are not limitedto, cysteine/cystamine, glutathione/dithiobisGSH, cupric chloride,dithiothreitol DTT/dithiane DTT, and 2-mercaptoethanol (bME)/dithio-bME.In certain embodiments, a co-solvent is used to increase the efficiencyof refolding. Exemplary cosolvents include, but are not limited to,glycerol, polyethylene glycol of various molecular weights, andarginine.

In certain embodiments, one substantially purifies a polypeptide, e.g.,a polypeptide comprising one or more ABP components or the ABP itself.Certain protein purification techniques are known to those of skill inthe art. In certain embodiments, protein purification involves crudefractionation of polypeptide fractionations from non-polypeptidefractions. In certain embodiments, polypeptides are purified usingchromatographic and/or electrophoretic techniques. Exemplarypurification methods include, but are not limited to, precipitation withammonium sulphate; precipitation with PEG; immunoprecipitation; heatdenaturation followed by centrifugation; chromatography, including, butnot limited to, affinity chromatography (e.g., Protein-A-Sepharose), ionexchange chromatography, exclusion chromatography, and reverse phasechromatography; gel filtration; hydroxyapatite chromatography;isoelectric focusing; polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis; andcombinations of such and other techniques. In certain embodiments, apolypeptide is purified by fast protein liquid chromatography or by highpressure liquid chromatography (HPLC). In certain embodiments,purification steps can be changed or certain steps can be omitted andstill result in a suitable method for the preparation of a substantiallypurified polypeptide.

In certain embodiments, one quantitates the degree of purification of apolypeptide preparation. Certain methods for quantifying the degree ofpurification are known to those of skill in the art. Certain exemplarymethods include, but are not limited to, determining the specificbinding activity of the preparation and assessing the amount of apolypeptide within a preparation by SDS/PAGE analysis. Certain exemplarymethods for assessing the amount of purification of a polypeptidepreparation comprise calculating the binding activity of a preparationand comparing it to the binding activity of an initial extract. Incertain embodiments, the results of such a calculation are expressed as“fold purification.” The units used to represent the amount of bindingactivity depend upon the particular assay performed.

In certain embodiments, a polypeptide comprising one or more ABPcomponents or the ABP itself is partially purified. In certainembodiments, partial purification can be accomplished by using fewerpurification steps or by utilizing different forms of the same generalpurification scheme. For example, in certain embodiments,cation-exchange column chromatography performed utilizing an HPLCapparatus will generally result in a greater “fold purification” thanthe same technique utilizing a low-pressure chromatography system. Incertain embodiments, methods resulting in a lower degree of purificationcan have advantages in total recovery of polypeptide, or in maintainingbinding activity of a polypeptide.

In certain instances, the electrophoretic migration of a polypeptide canvary, sometimes significantly, with different conditions of SDS/PAGE.See, e.g., Capaldi et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm., 76: 425 (1977).It will be appreciated that under different electrophoresis conditions,the apparent molecular weights of purified or partially purifiedpolypeptide can be different.

Methods of Screening

In some aspects, a molecule of interest is screened for activity. Insome aspects, the molecule of interest is an ABP. In some aspects, themolecule of interest is an antibody.

In some aspects, methods of screening the libraries disclosed herein areused to identify ABPs capable of binding to a desired target. Any invitro or in vivo screening method that allows for selection of an ABPfrom a library, based upon the ABP binding to a target molecule, iscontemplated.

In one embodiment, a library may be screened using an art recognized invitro cell-free phenotype-genotype linked display. Such methods are wellknown in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos.7,195,880; 6,951,725; 7,078,197; 7,022,479; 6,518,018; 7,125,669;6,846,655; 6,281,344; 6,207,446; 6,214,553; 6,258,558; 6,261,804;6,429,300; 6,489,116; 6,436,665; 6,537,749; 6,602,685; 6,623,926;6,416,950; 6,660,473; 6,312,927; 5,922,545; and 6,348,315. These methodsinvolve transcription of protein in vitro from a nucleic acid in such away that the protein is physically associated or bound to the nucleicacid from which it originated. By selecting for an expressed proteinwith a target molecule, the nucleic acid that codes for the protein mayalso be selected.

To improve the expression of scFv proteins, the above referenced invitro screening assays may include the addition or removal of certainreagents. In one embodiment, protein disulphide isomerase enzymes may beadded to the in vitro expression system to improve the production offunctional scFv molecules. In another embodiment, a mild oxidizing agent(for example, GSSG (oxidized glutathione)/GSH (reduced glutathione), forexample 100 mM GSSG/10 mM GSH) may be added to in vitro translationreaction mixture of the scFv proteins to allow intra-chain disulphidebond formation in the VH and VL regions of the scFv molecule. In anotherembodiment, reducing agents (for example, dithiothreitol (DTT)) may beremoved from the in vitro translation reaction mixture of the scFv.

In another embodiment, one or more labeled amino acids, or derivativesthereof, may be added to the in vitro translation system such that thelabeled amino acid(s) becomes incorporated into the resultant antibody.Any art recognized labeled amino acid is contemplated, for example, aradiolabelled amino acid, for example, ³⁵S-labelled methionine orcysteine.

In one embodiment, the in vitro screening assays may include that afterin vitro selection of an antibody or plurality of antibodies the mRNAthat is physically associated with the antibody or plurality ofantibodies may be reverse transcribed to generate cDNA encoding saidantibody or plurality of antibodies. Any suitable method for reversetranscription is contemplated, for example, enzyme mediated, forexample, Moloney murine leukemia virus reverse transcriptase.

The screening methods may include amplification of the nucleic acid thatencodes antibodies that bind specifically to a desired target. In oneembodiment, mRNA that is physically associated with an antibody orplurality of antibodies may be amplified to produce more mRNA. Any artrecognized method of RNA replication is contemplated, for example, usingan RNA replicase enzyme. In another embodiment, mRNA that is physicallyassociated with an antibody or plurality of antibodies is first reversetranscribed into cDNA before being amplified by PCR. In one embodiment,PCR amplification is accomplished using a high fidelity, proof-readingpolymerase, for example, the KOD1 thermostable DNA polymerase fromThermococcus kodakaraensis or Platinum Taq DNA Polymerase High Fidelity(Invitrogen, Carlsbad, Calif.). In another embodiment, PCR amplificationmay be performed under conditions that result in the introduction ofmutations into amplified DNA, i.e., error-prone PCR.

Screening methods may also include that the stringency of thetarget-binding screening assay be increased to select for antibodieswith improved affinity for target. Any art recognized methods ofincreasing the stringency of an antibody-target interaction assay arecontemplated. In one embodiment, one or more of the assay conditions maybe varied (for example, the salt concentration of the assay buffer) toreduce the affinity of the antibody molecules for the desired target. Inanother embodiment, the length of time permitted for the antibodies tobind to the desired target may be reduced. In another embodiment, acompetitive binding step may be added to the antibody-target interactionassay. For example, the antibodies may first be allowed to bind to adesired immobilized target. A specific concentration of non-immobilizedtarget may then be added, which serves to compete for binding with theimmobilized target such that antibodies with the lowest affinity forantigen are eluted from the immobilized target, resulting in enrichmentfor antibodies with improved antigen binding affinity. In an embodiment,the stringency of the assay conditions may further be increased byincreasing the concentration of non-immobilized target that is added tothe assay.

Screening methods may also include multiple rounds of selection toenrich for one or more antibodies with improved target binding. In oneembodiment, at each round of selection further amino acid mutations maybe introduced into the antibodies using art recognized methods. Inanother embodiment, at each round of selection the stringency of bindingto the desired target may be increased to select for antibodies withincreased affinity for a desired target.

Screening methods may include purification of RNA-antibody fusionproteins from the components of an in vitro translation system. This maybe accomplished using any art recognized method of separation. In oneembodiment, the RNA-antibody fusion proteins may be separated bychromatography using a polydeoxythimidine (polydT) resin. In anotherembodiment, the RNA-antibody fusion proteins may be separated bychromatography using an antibody specific for an epitope present in theantibody component of the RNA-antibody fusion protein. In an embodiment,the epitope may be an amino acid sequence tag, for example, FLAG or HAtags, incorporated into the amino acid sequence of the antibodycomponent of the RNA-antibody fusion protein, for example, at theN-terminal, C-terminal or in the inter variable region linker.

Selection of antibodies from a library may include the use ofimmobilized target molecules. In one embodiment, the target molecule maybe directly linked to a solid substrate for example, agarose beads. Inanother embodiment, the target molecule may first be modified, forexample, biotinylated and the modified target molecule may be bound viathe modification to a solid support, for example, streptavidin-M280,neutravidin-M280, SA-M270, NA-M270, SA-MyOne, NA-MyOne, SA-agarose, andNA-agarose.

In some aspects, fluorescently-labeled antigens are used to single cellsort only plasmablasts or other B lineage cells with reactivity againstspecific, labeled antigens. In other aspects, fluorescently-labeledantigens are used to enrich for plasmablasts or other B lineage cellswith reactivity against specific, labeled antigens, before single cellsorting occurs. In some aspects, fluorogenic or chromogenic moleculesmay be used to identify and sort B lineage cells. In some aspects,desired plasmablasts or other B lineage cells may be isolated bymagnetic-activated cell sorting (MACS) or even by panning. Productsresulting are generally monoclonal antibodies, against a variety oftargets, including but not restricted to: cancer antigens, cytokines,chemokines, growth factors, secreted proteins, cell surface and otherantigens to deplete cell types of specific interest, microbes, bacteria,mycobacteria, parasites, and viruses. Other screening methods aredescribed in the Examples section below.

Computer Implementation

In some aspects, one or more methods described herein can be implementedon a computer. In one embodiment, a computer comprises at least oneprocessor coupled to a chipset. Also coupled to the chipset are amemory, a storage device, a keyboard, a graphics adapter, a pointingdevice, and a network adapter. A display is coupled to the graphicsadapter. In one embodiment, the functionality of the chipset is providedby a memory controller hub and an I/O controller hub. In anotherembodiment, the memory is coupled directly to the processor instead ofthe chipset.

The storage device is any device capable of holding data, like a harddrive, compact disk read-only memory (CD-ROM), DVD, or a solid-statememory device. The memory holds instructions and data used by theprocessor. The pointing device may be a mouse, track ball, or other typeof pointing device, and is used in combination with the keyboard toinput data into the computer system. The graphics adapter displaysimages and other information on the display. The network adapter couplesthe computer system to a local or wide area network.

As is known in the art, a computer can have different and/or othercomponents than those described previously. In addition, the computercan lack certain components. Moreover, the storage device can be localand/or remote from the computer (such as embodied within a storage areanetwork (SAN)).

As is known in the art, the computer is adapted to execute computerprogram modules for providing functionality described herein. As usedherein, the term “module” refers to computer program logic utilized toprovide the specified functionality. Thus, a module can be implementedin hardware, firmware, and/or software. In one embodiment, programmodules are stored on the storage device, loaded into the memory, andexecuted by the processor.

Embodiments of the entities described herein can include other and/ordifferent modules than the ones described here. In addition, thefunctionality attributed to the modules can be performed by other ordifferent modules in other embodiments. Moreover, this descriptionoccasionally omits the term “module” for purposes of clarity andconvenience.

Kits

A kit can include a polynucleotide, a polynucleotide library, a vector,and/or a host cell disclosed herein and instructions for use. The kitsmay comprise, in a suitable container, a polynucleotide, apolynucleotide library, a vector, and/or a host cell disclosed herein,one or more controls, and various buffers, reagents, enzymes and otherstandard ingredients well known in the art.

The container can include at least one well on a plate comprising one ormore wells. The container can include at least one vial, test tube,flask, bottle, syringe, or other container means, into which apolynucleotide, a polynucleotide library, a vector, and/or a host cellmay be placed, and in some instances, suitably aliquoted. Where anadditional component is provided, the kit can contain additionalcontainers into which this component may be placed. The kits can alsoinclude a means for containing the polynucleotide, a polynucleotidelibrary, a vector, and/or a host cell and any other reagent containersin close confinement for commercial sale. Such containers may includeinjection or blow-molded plastic containers into which the desired vialsare retained. Containers can include labeling with instructions for useand/or warnings.

EXAMPLES

The examples are offered for illustrative purposes only, and are notintended to limit the scope of any embodiment of the present inventionin any way. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect tonumbers used (e.g., amounts, temperatures, etc.), but some experimentalerror and deviation should, of course, be allowed for.

Various methods can employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventionalmethods of protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniquesand pharmacology, within the skill of the art. Such techniques areexplained fully in the literature. See, e.g., T. E. Creighton, Proteins:Structures and Molecular Properties (W.H. Freeman and Company, 1993); A.L. Lehninger, Biochemistry (Worth Publishers, Inc., current addition);Sambrook, et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2nd Edition,1989); Methods In Enzymology (S. Colowick and N. Kaplan eds., AcademicPress, Inc.); Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Edition (Easton,Pennsylvania: Mack Publishing Company, 1990); Carey and SundbergAdvanced Organic Chemistry 3^(rd) Ed. (Plenum Press) Vols A and B(1992); Current Protocols in Molecular Biology (2002-; Wiley; OnlineISBN: 9780471142720; DOI: 10.1002/04711142727); Current Protocols inImmunology (2001-; Wiley; Online ISBN: 9780471142737; DOI:10.1002/0471142735).

General Materials and Methods

Blood Collection and Isolation of PBMCs

All human samples were collected after informed consent and underInvestigational Review Board (IRB)-approved human subject protocols.Blood was collected in heparin tubes (Beckton Dickinson and Company,catalog #BD366664) or in CPT tubes (Beckton Dickinson and Company,catalog BD362761) tubes. For processing of the heparin tubes, onemilliliter of blood was transferred into a microfuge tube and spun downat 12,000 rpm for 3 minutes, plasma was collected and frozen at −80° C.(for later testing for antibody reactivities), the remainder of theblood was layered over Ficoll and centrifuged in a Beckman CoulterAllegra X-15R benchtop centrifuge with a SX4750 Swinging Bucket Rotor at800 g for heparin tubes for 20 min at room temperature, with minimalacceleration and without use of the brake, and the peripheral bloodmononuclear cell (PBMC) layer was collected. Alternatively, CPT tubeswere directly centrifuged at 1,500 g for 20 min at room temperature,with minimal acceleration and without use of the brake, and the PMBClayer was collected. The collected PBMCs were then washed twice with PBSbefore use.

PBMCs may also be frozen for future use and isolation of B-cells, memoryB-cells, plasmablasts, plasma cells, or other B-cell populations. Onemethod for freezing PBMCs involves resuspending the PBMCs in 90% fetalbovine serum (FBS) and 10% dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) in cryovials, andthen slowly freezing the cells contained in the vials overnight at −80°C. in a Mr. Frosty (Sigma C1562-1EA). The vials of frozen cells werethen transferred for long-term storage in liquid nitrogen, and can bethawed at a later date for the isolation of individual B-cells and forthe high-throughput sequencing of paired immunoglobulin genes. Thawedcells were incubated in a media containing an excess of DNase I, usually25 ug/ml (Sigma D4513) till the end of the 1st sort to prevent cellclumping.

Isolation and Enrichment of Cells and Cell Subpopulations

Plasmablasts. For some samples, PBMCs were first enriched forplasmablasts by using a modified Plasma Cells Isolation Kit II (Miltenyi130-093-628). This is an optional step. This yielded fewer total cellsfor subsequent sorting, resulting in shorter sort times. This was usedprimarily when multiple samples needed to be single-cell sorted on thesame day. It is also possible to use different kits to enrich fordifferent B-cell populations (see below). For every 5×10⁷ PBMCs, cellswere suspended in 200 μL of ice-cold MACS buffer (PBS with 0.5% FBS). 50uL of non-plasma cell biotin-antibody cocktail was added, and cells wereincubated in the fridge (4° C.) for 10 minutes. 100 μL of MACS buffer,100 μL of non-plasma cell microbead cocktail, and 50 μL of CD56microbeads were added and incubated in the fridge for an additional 10minutes. Cells were then washed with 7 mL of MACS buffer, centrifuged at300 g for 5 minutes at 4° C., resuspended in 500 μL of MACS buffer, andrun on an equilibrated LS column in a magnetic field. The column waswashed with 4×3 mL of MACS buffer and enriched cells were in thenegative fraction.

Memory B-cells. CD19+ microbeads (Miltenyi 130-050-301) and CD27+microbeads (130-051-601) may be used to enrich for memory B-cells beforecell sorting, to shorten sort times. Other enrichment methods, such asMemory B-cell isolation kit (Miltenyi 130-093-546), may also be used,provided that they enrich for CD19⁺CD27⁺ cells. For every 5×10⁷ PBMCs,300 μL of ice-cold MACS buffer is used for resuspension. 100 μL of CD19microbeads and 100 μL of CD27 microbeads are then added, and the sampleis incubated at 4° C. for 15 minutes. Cells are then washed with 7 mL ofMACS buffer, centrifuged at 300 g for 5 minutes at 4° C., andresuspended in 500 μL of MACS buffer. Cells are then run through anequilibrated LS column in a magnetic field, and washed with 2×3 mL ofMACS buffer. The LS column is then removed from the magnetic field, andthe cells are washed out with 5 mL of MACS buffer to elute the enrichedcells.

Total B-cells. CD19+ microbeads (Miltenyi 130-050-301) may be used toenrich for total B-cells before cell sorting, e.g., to shorten sorttimes. Other enrichment methods may also be used, provided that theyenrich for CD19⁺ cells. For every 5×10⁷ PBMCs, resuspend cells in 400 μLof ice-cold MACS buffer. Add 100 μL of CD19+ microbeads and incubate inthe fridge (4° C.) for 15 minutes. Cells are then washed with 7 mL ofMACS buffer, centrifuged at 300 g for 5 minutes at 4° C., andresuspended in 500 μL of MACS buffer. Cells are then run through anequilibrated LS column in a magnetic field and washed with 2×3 mL ofMACS buffer. The LS column is then removed from the magnetic field, andthe cells are eluted with 5 mL of MACS buffer, yielding the enrichedcells.

Other cell types. Although not necessary, MACS enrichment of the desiredcell population can shorten sort times. Other cell populations,including plasma cells, other B-cell populations and non-B-cellpopulations may also be enriched using MACS or other systems using theappropriate reagents. For example, total T-cells may be enriched usingCD3+ microbeads, and effector T-cells and helper T-cells isolated usingCD8+ and CD4+ microbeads, respectively. CD45RO microbeads may be used toisolate memory T-cells and, in conjunction with CD8+ or CD4+ beads, usedto isolate memory effector or memory helper T-cells, respectively.

Single-Cell Sorting

MACS enrichment is not required for sorting, but MACS enrichment forplasmablasts may be performed to shorten sort times. If PBMCs haveundergone MACS enrichment, an aliquot of unenriched PBMCs (˜1 millioncells) is also analyzed in tandem, allowing the baseline plasmablastpercentage in the sample to be determined. For sorting plasmablasts,cells were stained with manufacturer-recommended volumes of CD3-V450 (BD560365), IgA-FITC (AbD Serotec STAR142F), IgM-FITC (AbD SerotecSTAR146F) or IgM-PE (AbD Serotec STAR146PE), CD20-PerCP-Cy5.5 (BD340955), CD38-PE-Cy7 (BD 335808), CD19-APC (BD 340437) and CD27-APC-H7(BD 560222) in 50 μL of FACS buffer (PBS or HBSS with 2% FBS) on ice for20 minutes in the dark. Some cells may also be stained with IgG-PE (BD555787), CD138-PE (eBioscience 12-1389-42), or HLA-DR-PE (BD 555812)together with IgM-FITC instead. For simultaneous sorting ofplasmablasts, memory and naive B-cells, the following staining schemewas used: IgD-FITC (Biolegend 348205), IgG-PE (BD 555787),CD20-PerCP-Cy5.5, CD38-PECy7, IgM-APC (BD 551062), CD27-APC-H7,IgA-biotin (AbD Serotec 205008) followed by Strepavidin-eFluor710(eBioscience 49-4317-82) and CD19-BV421 (Biolegend 302233). MemoryB-cells have also been sorted either as CD19⁺CD27⁺IgG⁺ orCD19⁺CD20⁺IgG⁺, naive B-cells have been sorted as CD19⁺IgD⁺IgM⁺. IgA⁺plasmablasts have also been sorted, and are defined as CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺IgA⁺IgM⁻. Other cell surface markers may also be used, aslong as the B-cell or other cell population is phenotypicallyidentifiable using cell surface markers, the population can besingle-cell sorted. See below. Cells were then washed once with 2 mL ofFACS buffer and resuspended at an appropriate volume for FACS. Cellswere first sorted on a BD Aria II into a 5 mL round bottom tube.Typically, purities of >80% were achieved from the first sort. Singlecells were sorted into the first 11 columns of a 96-well PCR platecontaining 6.65 μL of a hypotonic buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6)containing 2 mM dNTPs (NEB N0447L), 5 μM oligo(dT)₂₀ VN, and 1 unit ofRibolock (Fermentas E00384), an RNase inhibitor. As a negative control,the last column was left devoid of cells. For IgG⁺ plasmablasts, thegating (selection of cells) strategy was CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺IgA⁻IgM⁻.Sorted plates were sealed with aluminum plate sealers (AxygenPCR-AS-600) and immediately frozen on dry ice and stored at −80° C.

Single-Cell Sorting Gating Strategies

B-cells. For B-cells, the gating approach comprises sorting for one ormore of the following markers: IgM, IgG, IgA, IgD, CD19, or CD20. Fortotal IgG⁺ B-cells, the gating approach comprises sorting for IgG⁺. Fortotal IgA⁺ B-cells, the gating approach comprises sorting for IgA⁺. Fortotal IgM⁺ B-cells, the gating approach comprises sorting for IgM⁺.

Activated B cells. Activated B cells include B cells that have beenstimulated through binding of their membrane antigen receptor to itscognate antigen and/or have received T cell help from T cellsrecognizing epitopes derived from the same macromolecular antigen.Activated B cells can be identified by a variety of properties includingincreased cell size (e.g. “blasting B cells”; see below), expression ofcell surface marker or markers, expression of intracellular marker ormarkers, expression of transcription factor or factors, exiting the gap0 (G0) phase of the cell cycle, progressing through the cell cycle,production of cytokines or other factors, and/or the down regulation ofcertain cell surface marker or markers, intracellular marker or markers,transcription factor or other factor. One method of identifying anactivated B cell is to combine detection of a B cell marker such as CD19or immunoglobulin with a marker of activation such as increased cellsize or volume, the cell surface activation marker CD69, or progressionthrough the cell cycle based on cell-permeable acridine orange DNA stainor another cell cycle analysis.

Blasting B cells. “Blasting B cells” are B cells that are activated andincreased in size relative to resting B cells. Blasting B cells includethe plasmablast population as well as other populations of activated Bcells, and blasting B cells are physically larger in size than resting Bcells. Blasting B cells can be single-cell sorted using severaldifferent approaches, including gating (selection) of B cells based ontheir physically being larger based on cell diameter, cell volume,electrical impedance, FSC, the integral (area) of a FSC pulse (FSC-A),FSC height (FSC-H), forward scatter pulse width (FCS-W), side scatter(SSC), side scatter pulse area (SSC-A), side scatter height (SSC-H),side scatter width (SSC-W), autofluorescence and/or other measures ofcell size.

In flow cytometry, forward scatter (FSC) is measured using a light beamin line with the stream of cells and provides information regarding theproportional size and diameter of each cell. Using FSC one can select Bcells with FSC greater than the median FSC of resting B cell, forexample an FSC-A or FSC-H 5% greater than resting B cells, 10% greaterthan resting B cells, 15% greater than resting B cells, 20% greater thanresting B cells, 30% greater than resting B cells, 40% greater thanresting B cells, 50% greater than resting B cells, 60% greater thanresting B cells. By analyzing calibration beads of specific sizes, onecan use FSC to determine the relative size of B cells relative to thecalibration beads. By doing so, one can specifically gate on and therebyselect B cells that possess diameters of about 8 um, >8 um, >9 um, >10um, >11 um, >12 um, >13 um, >14 um, >15 um, >16 um, >17 um, >18 um, >19um, or >20 um.

Another measurement of cell size is cell volume. The “gold standard” forcell volume uses the Coulter principle which is based on an electronicmeasurement (Tzur et al, PLoS ONE, 6(1): e16053.doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0016053, 2011). Although the method of sortingby droplet charging and deflection was first used in a device thatmeasured cell volume by impedance, the currently available flowcytometers make only optical measurements. FSC measurements,specifically the FSC-A (FSC integral area) are commonly used to assesscell size, although FSC measurements can be influenced by the refractiveindex differences between particles and fluid (Tzur et al, PLoS ONE,6(1): e16053. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0016053, 2011). Some have shownthat volume estimation can be improved by combining optical parameters,including FSC-W, SSC and 450/50-A auto fluorescence (Tzur et al, PLoSONE, 6(1): e16053. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0016053, 2011).

For example, selection of activated B cells based on increased size canbe achieved through identifying B cells using a marker such as CD19 andassessing size through FSC or FSC-A. Other B cell markers and/orparameters for assessment of size are described herein.

Plasmablasts. For isolation of plasmablasts, the gating approachcomprises sorting for CD19⁺CD38⁺⁺ B-cells. For isolation of IgG⁺plasmablasts, the gating approach comprises sorting forCD19⁺CD38⁺⁺IgA⁻IgM⁻ B-cells. For isolation of IgA+ plasmablasts, thegating approach comprises sorting for CD19⁺CD38⁺⁺IgA⁺ B-cells. Forisolation of IgM+ plasmablasts, the gating approach comprises sortingfor CD19⁺CD38⁺⁺IgM*B-cells. In addition, other gating strategies can beused to isolate a sufficient number of plasmablasts to carry out themethods described herein. Plasmablasts were also isolated using thefollowing marker expression patterns CD19^(low/+), CD20^(low/−), CD27⁺and CD38⁺⁺. Although use of all these markers generally results in thepurest plasmablast population from single cell sorting, not all of theabove markers need to be used. For example, plasmablasts may also beisolated using the following gating strategies: forward scatter high(FSC^(hi)) for larger cells, FSC^(hi)CD19^(lo) cells, FSC^(hi) andCD27⁺, CD38⁺⁺, or CD20⁻ cells. Combination of any of these markers orother markers found to be able to distinguish plasmablasts from otherB-cells will generally increase the purity of sorted plasmablasts,however any one of the above markers alone (including FSC^(hi)) candistinguish plasmablasts from other B-cells, albeit with a lower purity.

For memory B-cells. For IgG⁺ memory B-cells, the gating approachcomprises sorting for CD19⁺ CD27⁺IgG⁺ or CD19⁺CD20⁺IgG⁺. For IgM⁺ memoryB-cells, the gating strategy comprises CD19⁺CD27⁺IgA⁺ or CD19⁺CD20⁺IgM⁺.For IgM⁺ memory B-cells, the gating strategy comprises CD19⁺CD27⁺IgM⁺ orCD19⁺CD20⁺IgM⁺.

For other cell types. As long as the B-cell, T-cell, or other cellpopulation is phenotypically identifiable using cell markers, it can besingle-cell sorted. For example, T-cells can be identified as CD3⁺ orTCR⁺, naïve T-cells identified as CD3⁺CD45RA⁺, memory T-cells identifiedas CD3⁺CD45RO⁺. Effector and helper T-cells can be identified asCD3⁺CD8⁺ and CD3⁺CD4⁺, respectively. Cell populations can be furthersubdivided by using combinations of markers, such as CD3⁺CD4⁺CD45RO⁺ formemory helper T-cells.

Sequencing of Paired Light and Heavy Chain Immunoglobulin Genes fromSingle B-Cells

Reverse Transcription with Adaptor Molecules

Single-cell sorted plates were thawed on ice and briefly centrifugedbefore use. Plates were incubated in the thermal cycler at 55° C. for 3minutes, 42° C. for 2 minutes, and indefinitely at 4° C. Plates werebriefly centrifuged again and carefully opened to avoid the formation ofaerosols. 1 μL of a 10 μM solution of the appropriate adapter molecule(each adapter molecule generally has a sample identification region(sample-ID)) was added to each well, with all negative control wells(containing RNA preservative buffer alone, or non-B-cells) receivingidentical adapter molecules. 2.35 μL of a mix containing 0.75 μL H₂O, 1μL of 10× M-MuLV RT buffer (NEB B0253S), 0.6 μL of 50 mM MgCl₂, 0.25 μLof Ribolock (40 U/μL), and 0.125 μL of Superscript III (200 U/μL)(Invitrogen 18080-085) was added and mixed by pipetting. Plates werebriefly centrifuged and incubated at 42° C. for 120 minutes to 8 hoursusing a thermal plate shaker and then kept at −20° C. After thereaction, RT products from all wells were pooled in a microfuge tube.Pooled RT products were then extracted with phenol-chloroform-isopropylalcohol with ˜0.1% 8-hydroxychloroquine (Sigma 77617), and thenextracted with chloroform extraction in gel-lock phase tubes (5 PRIME2302820). RT products were then concentrated and desalted by 5-minutespins at 14 000 g with Amicon Ultra-0.5 30 kDa (Millipore UFC503096) orUltra-0.5 100 kDa (Millipore UFC510096), followed by a 5 min spin at 14000 g with TE (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6 with 1 mM EDTA) and a final5-minute spin at 14 000 g with EB (Qiagen 19086). RT products wereeluted by inverting the Amicon Ultra column in a new centrifuge tube andcentrifuging at 1000 g for 2 minutes. At this point, RT products werekept at −20° C. or −80° C.

Touchdown PCR

For 454 sequencing runs 1 and 2, the Touchdown PCR method was used asfollows. For some samples in PCR runs 3 and 4, the PCR method waschanged, leading to increased numbers of paired heavy and light chains.This change is detailed under the sub-section “Non-touchdown PCR” below.

For both the 1^(st) PCR and the nested 2^(nd) PCR, Phusion Hot Start IIDNA polymerase (NEB F-549L) was used in the provided GC buffer. For IgG,primers and adapter molecules are shown in Table 1. Sample-ID sequencesare shown in Table 2. Plate-ID sequences are shown in Table 3. See alsoFIGS. 3 and 9 . Reaction conditions included a final MgCl₂ concentrationof 1.8 mM, 200 μM dNTPs, 0.2 μM for all primers, 0.2 U of Phusionpolymerase, varying amounts of DMSO as an additive and 2 μL of templatein a final volume of 25 μL. For the 1^(st) PCR, lambda and kappa lightchains and the gamma heavy chain were amplified in different wells, andDMSO is used at a final concentration of 8%, 5% and 10%, respectively.Forward primers used in the 1^(st) PCR were the FW long primer1 and theFW short primer1. Because the FW long primer1 added a plateidentification region (plate-ID) to the 5′ end of amplicon regions(amplicons), FW long primer1 containing different plate-IDs was added todifferent samples. Gene-specific reverse primers were used to amplifythe kappa, lambda, and gamma chains were kappa GSP1, lambda GSP1, andgamma GSP1, respectively. Cycling conditions for the 1^(st) PCR includedan initial denaturation step at 98° C. for 30″, followed by 2 cycles of98° C. for 10″, 72° C. for 25″; 7 touchdown cycles of 98° C. for 10″,71.5° C. to 68.5° C. for 15″ and 72° C. for 20″ with a drop of 0.5° C.for each subsequent annealing step; 30 cycles of 98° C. for 10″, 68° C.for 15″ and 72° C. for 20″, followed by a final extension at 72° C. for5′ and hold at 4° C. indefinitely. Products from 1 PCR were diluted 100×in TE and 2 μL used for the nested 2^(nd) PCR. For the 2^(nd) PCR, 5%DMSO was used as an additive in all samples. Forward primer is the FWprimer2 and reverse primers were the RV primer2 and the GSP longprimer2. Kappa GSP long primer2, lambda GSP long primer2 and gamma longprimer2 were used to amplify their respective amplicons. Because the GSPlong primer2 also added the plate-ID to the 3′ end of the amplicons, adifferent GSP long primer2 with plate-specific plate-IDs was added toeach pooled-plate sample. Cycling conditions for the nested 2^(nd) PCRincluded an initial denaturation step of 98° C. for 30″, 30-40 cycles of98° C. for 10″, 67° C. for 15″, and 72° C. for 20″, followed by a finalextension of 72° C. for 5′ and hold at 4° C. indefinitely.

Non-Touchdown PCR

For the non-touchdown PCR, conditions were identical to the touchdownPCR unless otherwise stated. The 1st PCR cycling parameters were aninitial denaturation of 95° C. for 5′, 15-25 cycles of 98° C. 30″, 62°C. 30″, 72° C. 30″, a final extension of 72° C. 5′ and hold at 4° C.indefinitely. 1st PCR was a multiplex PCR, where all 3 gene-specificreverse primers, the kappa, lambda, and gamma constant regions reverseprimers were used in conjunction at 0.2, 0.2 and 0.24 μM, respectively.All other primers used were the same as in touchdown PCR. Thegene-specific primers can be those used in touchdown PCR and also anyone of those designated as suitable for 1st PCR (Table 6). DMSO was usedat a final concentration of 5%; 0.1 mg/ml of BSA (NEB B9001S), andET-SSB (NEB M2401S) may also be added at 1:100 for the PCR reaction.During the 1st PCR, 4-6 ul of cDNA template was used in a total 80 or 90ul reaction volume. Each PCR1 reaction was split into eight or nine 10ul reactions, each occurring in a different well. 1st PCR was pooledagain after the PCR and diluted 100× in TE0.1, and 2 ul used for 2ndPCR. 2nd PCR is a separate reaction for each gene-specific primer (notmultiplex), and the reaction mix was identical to the touchdown 2nd PCRexcept for the following: any of the gene-specific constant regionprimers designated as working for the 2nd PCR may be used (Table 6),primers were used at either 0.2 μM or 0.4 μM throughout, or thegene-specific primers were used at 0.2 μM and the rest used at 0.4 μM.0.1 mg/ml BSA was added to the reaction and ET-SSB may also be used at1:100. The 2nd semi-nested PCR cycling parameters were an initialdenaturation of 95° C. for 5′, 20-35 cycles of 98° C. 30″, 67° C. 30″,72° C. 30″, a final extension of 72° C. 5′ and hold at 4° C.indefinitely. The total number of PCR cycles for 1st and 2nd PCRcombined was typically between 50-60 cycles for the non-touchdown PCR.As different pooled-wells undergoing the PCR cycling tend to usedifferent number of cycles to obtain a reasonable amount of DNA product(typically between 1-12 ng/ul), 4 different PCR cycles were carried outfor each 2nd PCR, e.g. 23, 26, 30 and 33 cycles, 5 ul run on a 2%agarose gel and compared. Based on qualitative judgment of the amount ofPCR product, only PCR product from one of the 2nd PCR cycle numbers wasused for each pooled-well 2nd PCR in preparing for the 454 sequencingrun.

For PCR of other immunoglobulin heavy chains in humans, immunoglobulinheavy and light chains in mice and TCR chains in humans and mice, PCRconditions are identical to the non-touchdown PCR section above exceptthat 1st PCR is non-multiplex, with each cDNA being individuallyamplified. The following 3′ primers in Tables 10 and 11 are used in PCR1and 2.

Preparing for 454 XLR70 Sequencing Run

For the 1^(st) and 2^(nd) 454 runs, sequencing primers (Titanium PrimersA and B, respectively) for a 454 Titanium sequencing run were added ontothe amplicons during the 1^(st) and nested 2^(nd) PCRs. 5 μL of eachamplicon were run on an agarose gel with a mass DNA ladder (FermentasSM0383), an image was taken, and band intensities were analyzed andquantified with AlphaFC Imager software (Cell Biosciences). 5 ng of eachof the kappa, lambda, and gamma amplicons were separately pooled, run ona 0.8% agarose gel, and visualized with GelGreen (Biotium 41005). Bandsof the appropriate sizes (˜600 bp for kappa and lambda, and ˜750 bp forgamma) were cut and purified with MinElute Gel Extraction kit (Qiagen28606), according to manufacturer's instructions with slightmodifications. Briefly, agarose gel was melted in QG buffer withoutheating, and the additional QG wash step is done. PE wash buffer wasallowed to sit for 5 minutes before spinning. An additional PE wash stepwas also performed. Samples were eluted with 25 uL of EB buffer. Sampleswere also cleaned once with SPRI beads using a ratio of 1:0.65 for DNAvolume:bead volume for 454 2^(nd) run. DNA concentration was determinedwith Picogreen DNA assay kit (Invitrogen P11496), and samples werepooled such that DNA concentration of gamma:kappa:lambda is 2:1:1.Pooled samples were at a concentration of >0.5 ng/μL and were shipped toa 454 DNA sequencing facility for 454 sequencing.

For the 3^(rd) and subsequent 454 sequencing runs, the protocol waschanged. The amplicons were still separately pooled to normalize DNAquantities from each PCR reaction, but first underwent an SPRI beadcleanup to remove small DNA fragments according to manufacturer'sinstructions. The amplicons were run on a 3% agarose gel, and theappropriate bands cut and purified with MinElute Gel Extraction kit asbefore. Thereafter, the amplicons underwent another 2 rounds of SPRIbead cleanup to remove even more small DNA fragments, and quantitatedwith Picogreen, quality checked with Nanodrop to ensure the OD260/280ratio was >1.8 and 1 μl run on a gel to ensure there were no small DNAfragments. Lambda and kappa amplicons were pooled in a 1:1 ratio, gammawas used as-is. DNA was then diluted to 1×10⁹ copies per 454'sinstructions, and sent to sequencing facility (Roche) for emPCR at 1 cpband sequenced; gamma heavy chain in one region and the pooled lightchains in the other region of the picotiter plate.

Preparing for 454 XL+ Sequencing Run

Currently the 454 XL+ sequencing run does not support the Lib-Asequencing kit that was used for the XLR70 run. XL+ currently onlysupports the Lib-L kit, which is unidirectional sequencing. To adapt ourprotocol to do XL+ sequencing, the protocol for XLR70 run is followed,but after the gel cleanup step, each amplicon (kappa, lambda and gamma)underwent 2 separate PCRs, each 5 cycles long to add on the Lib-L A andB adaptors. PCR conditions are as follows: Phusion polymerase is used,with 5×GC buffer and a final concentration of 5% DMSO. Primers are usedat 0.2 uM. 0.1 mg/ml BSA is added to the reaction. The PCR cyclingparameters are an initial denaturation of 95° C. for 5′, 20-35 cycles of98° C. 30″, 67° C. 30″, 72° C. 30″, a final extension of 72° C. 5′ andhold at 4° C. indefinitely. Two PCRs are done for each amplicon: 5LIB-LAand 3LIB-LB in one PCR, and 5LIB-LB and 3LIB-LA in the other PCR. Theadaptors are added such that each amplicon becomes either5′-LibA-amplicon-LibB-3′ or 5′-LibB-amplicon-LibA-3′. These ampliconshave either the LibA “A” or “B” adaptors on the 5′ end (and thecorresponding “B” or “A” adaptor on the 3′ end), which allows forbidirectional sequencing. Amplicons with the new Lib A adaptors thenundergo 3 rounds of SPRI bead cleanup before following the protocol forXLR70 runs to quantitate and quality check the DNA before diluting it to1×10⁹ copies and sending to a 454 sequencing facility (Roche) for emPCRat 1 cpb and sequencing.

Preparing for PacBio Sequencing Run

For PacBio sequencing run, touchdown PCR was employed as above. DNApooling and cleanup was done as the section above on “preparing for 454XLR70 run.” To obtain sufficient DNA (500 ng) for sequencingrequirements, a minimum of 1 ug of DNA was pooled for gel and SPRIcleanup. Picogreen quantitation and 1×10⁹ dilutions were not done as itwas not required for PacBio sequencing. If insufficient DNA was obtainedfrom the 2nd PCR, the 2nd PCR and pooling steps were repeated untilsufficient DNA was obtained. A minimum of 500 ng of cleaned-up DNA wassent to PacBio sequencing facility for sequencing.

Other Sequencing Approaches

The methods disclosed herein are not dependent on 454 or PacBiosequencing. Lambda and kappa light chains are ˜600 bp and gamma heavychain ˜700 bp. Thus, what is generally desired is the ability to havelonger sequencing reads such that the forward and reverse sequencingreads overlap enough to enable reconstruction of the entire,approximately 600 bp sequence of the light chains (LCs) (exact sequencelength depends on the length of the 5′ untranslated region (UTR)), andapproximately 700 bp sequence of the heavy chains (HCs). Therefore, anysequencing technology that can yield sequencing reads of at least about350-400 bp and thereby achieve the overlap used for sequence assemblycan be utilized, and sequencing technologies that enable app. 600-700+bp reads would allow one to sequence using just the forward (Fw) primer(sequencing from the 5′ end).

Sequences

The sequence data for the above runs was received from the relevantfacility and processed as described below.

Sequence Nomenclature

Each sequence in the sequence listing which corresponds to a sequencingread, sequence assembly or amino acid translation from a sequence has anidentifier. Each such identifier has 9 fields separated by a period,“.”. The fields are numbered from 1 to 9 and give the followinginformation:

-   -   1. Read ID. A Read ID assigned by the software associated with        the sequencing technology used to determine the read, or “NA” if        the sequence is not a raw read.    -   2. Plate Number. A plate number that the sequence is associated        with. See Table 12 (plate to sample mapping table) for        corresponding biological sample information.    -   3. Sample ID. Sample ID indicating the well that the sequence is        associated with. Sample ID numbers are between 1 and 89        inclusive. See Table 2 for correspondence between Sample ID and        Well Name.    -   4. Well Name. Well name containing the well that the sequence is        associated with. The well name corresponds to the usual 96 well        plate name, e.g. D07. The well name and the Sample ID are        equivalent ways of specifying a particular well on a plate.    -   5. Contig ID. The contig ID distinguishes different sequences        associated with a well from a given assembly and chain type.    -   6. Platform. The platform field indicates the sequencing        technology that the sequence is derived from. The possible        values for platform are 454, Sanger, and PacBio.    -   7. Chain Type. The chain type field indicates whether the        sequence is associated with a set of heavy chain antibody        sequences, light chain antibody sequences, or a set containing        both heavy and light chain antibody sequences. Possible values        are “heavy”, “light” or “CMB”.    -   8. Run ID. An identifier for a set of reads on a particular        platform.    -   9. Sequence Type. The type of the sequence. Possible values are        “raw” for raw sequencing technology reads, “nb”, “urt”,        “multim50”, “zerom50” or “pb” for assembled reads (see Assembly        of Sequences section), or “nb-aa”, “urt-aa”, “multim50-aa”,        “zerom50-aa” or “sanger-aa” for amino acid sequences derived        from the various nt assembly consensus sequences.

Preparation of Sequences for Analysis

Data generated from the 454 sequencing were analyzed by 454 GS FLX dataanalysis software, and filter-passed high quality sequences werereturned. Due to the stringency of the default amplicon filter used by454 GS FLX data analysis software, filter stringency may need to berelaxed to obtain sufficient long reads. One way is to follow thesuggestions in 454 technical bulletin APP No. 001-2010. Changing<vfScanAllFlows> from “TiOnly” to “False” of the amplicon filter canlead to a large increase in filter-passed sequences of good quality.Another option is to change the <vfTrimBackScaleFactor> to a lowernumber. For 454 run 1, standard shotgun processing was used and for run2, <vfScanAllFlows> was changed to “False”, and standard ampliconpipeline processing was used for runs 3 and 4.

Data generated from Pacific Biosciences sequencing was received fromPacific Biosciences as Circular Consensus Sequence reads with associatedquality scores.

Assignment of Sequences to Wells

cDNA from samples was sequenced with either 454 or Pacific Biosciencessequencing technology. The reads are those in the Sequence Listing whoseSequence Type is “raw”. The sequencing reads were analyzed and eitherassigned to a source plate and well or discarded.

Plate and well assignments for reads were made by comparing the observedread sequence to the possible plate identification region, universalprimer region, and sample identification region sequences using regularexpressions. The comparison was done in three stages using the regularexpressions listed in Tables 13, 14 and 15.

In stage 1, analysis of possible plate identification regions, a readwas checked against all of the regular expressions listed in column“Plate Identification Region Regular Expression” in Table 13, requiringa match to begin with the first nucleotide of the sequence. If no matchwas found the read was discarded and plate/well assignment continuedwith the next available read to process, if any. If a match was found,the sequence was assigned the corresponding ID from the “Plate ID”column as its plate ID. The nucleotides of the read matching to theplate regular expression were recorded for use during later stages ofmatching and during assembly.

In stage 2, analysis of the universal primer region, a read was checkedagainst the “universal primer regular expression”“CACGACCGGTGCTCGATT+AG” (SEQ ID NO: 796597), requiring a read match tobegin with the first nucleotide following the last read nucleotidematching to the Plate Regular Expression. If the read did not match theuniversal primer regular expression, the read was discarded andplate/well assignment continued with the next available read to process,if any. Otherwise the nucleotides of the read matching to the universalprimer regular expression were recorded for use during the last stage ofmatching and during assembly.

In stage 3, analysis of possible sample identification regions, a readwas checked against all of the regular expressions listed in column“Sample Identification Region Regular Expression” in Table 14, requiringa match to begin with the first nucleotide following the last readnucleotide matching to the universal primer regular expression. If nomatch was found the read was discarded and plate/well assignmentcontinued with the next available read to process, if any. If a matchwas found and the sample ID column contained only a single identifier,the sample ID of the read was assigned to be the ID found in the sampleID column. If the sample ID column contained more than a singleidentifier, those identifiers were considered “candidate sample IDs”.The read was then checked sequentially against all of the regularexpressions listed in column “Sample Identification Region RegularExpression” of Table 15 where at least one of the corresponding sampleIDs in the “Sample ID” column of Table 15 matched with a candidatesample ID. If the read matched the regular expression, and the matchbegan with the first nucleotide after the last read nucleotide matchingto the universal primer regular expression, the right-most identifierfrom the candidate sample IDs was assigned as the read's sample ID.Otherwise, the right-most identifier was removed from the list ofcandidate sample IDs and the process repeated with the smaller list ofcandidate sample IDs until either a match was found, or, if no matchingregular expression was found in the list of regular expressions in Table15 then the last candidate sample ID (that is, the left-most in theoriginal list of candidate sample IDs) was assigned as the sample ID forthe read.

Reads that were discarded during the plate ID and sample ID assignmentprocess were not included in the sequence listing.

Assembly of Sequences

All sequence reads assigned to a sample ID associated with a well wereassembled to produce consensus sequences. These consensus sequencescorrespond to the heavy and light chain mRNA sequences expressed in thesorted cells.

Sequences were assembled with Newbler 2.5 (Runs 1 and 2), and Newblerversion 2.6 and/or Mira version 3.4.0 for other sequences.

Sequences in the listing with a Platform field of “454”, a Chain Typefield of “mixed”, a Run ID of “1” or “2” and a Sequence Type of “nb” arecontigs resulting from an assembly using newbler. To assemble thesesequences, sff output files from 454 sequencing, which contain bothsequences and quality scores for each nucleotide, were read into Pythonusing the Biopython package and sequences subdivided according to theircompound barcodes (sample-ID+plate-ID) as described above and outputinto separate sff files. These files were then reparsed by sfffile(provided by GS FLX data analysis software) into sff files with fileheaders understood by Newbler, a sequence assembler provided in the GSFLX data analysis software suite, using the “-force”, “-cdna” and “-urt”options. Newbler then assembled forward reads with shared compoundbarcodes. Because reverse reads have only a 3′ plate-ID, it is possiblethat sequence assembly could occur between forward and reverse reads ofsequences from different cells. For circumventing this potentialproblem, the heavy- and light-chain V(D)J usage of both assembledforward and unassembled reverse reads can be first identified usingHighV-QUEST (http://imgt.cines.fr/HighV-QUEST/index.action). Sequencescan then further grouped according to their V(D)J usage before beingassembled again with Newbler using one assembled forward read and thereverse reads that share the same V(D)J usage. This can be repeated forall assembled forward reads. Sequence assembly can also be done to beintolerant of nucleotide mismatches, thereby preventing assembly offorward and reverse reads from different cells that share the same V(D)Jusage. This way, inappropriate sequence assembly of reverse readsbetween highly similar sequences from different cells can be largelyavoided.

Sequences in the listing with a Platform field of “454”, a Chain Typefield of “heavy” or “light”, a Run ID of “3” or “4” and a Sequence Typeof “nb” are contigs resulting from assemblies of 454 reads, executingNewbler with this command line: runAssembly-cdna-o output seqs.fastaqwhere seqs.fastq contained a single well's trimmed reads in FastQformat.

Any wells for Run ID 3 or Run ID 4 reads which Newbler did not createexactly one heavy chain contig or exactly one light chain contig werereanalyzed by assembling with mira. Sequences in the listing with aPlatform field of “454”, a Chain Type field of “heavy” or “light”, a RunID of “3” or “4” and a Sequence Type of “multim50” or “zerom50” arecontigs resulting from these assemblies, executing mira with thiscommand line: mira--project=seqs--job=denovo,est,accurate,454454_SETTINGS-ED:ace=yes-AL:egp=no-CL:pvlc=yes--fastq-notraceinfo

A file named seqs_in.454.fastq contained a single well's trimmed readsin FastQ format.

For wells from Run ID 3 or Run ID 4 reads where neither Newbler nor miracreated contigs using the above assembly commands, a different Newblercommand was executed. Sequences in the listing with a Platform field of“454”, a Chain Type field of “heavy” or “light”, a Run ID of “3” or “4”and a Sequence Type of “urt” are contigs resulting from theseassemblies, where Newbler was executed with this command line:runAssembly-cdna-ud-urt-o output seqs.fastaq where seqs.fastq containeda single well's trimmed reads in FastQ format.

Sequences in the listing with a Platform field of “PacBio”, a Chain Typeof “heavy” and a Sequence Type of “pb” are contigs resulting fromassemblies of reads from the PacBio platform, executing mira with thecommand line: mira--project=seqs--job=denovo,est,accurate,454454_SETTINGS-ED:ace=yes-AL:egp=no-CL:pvlc=yes--fastq-notraceinfo

A file named seqs_in.454.fastq contained a single well's trimmed readsin FastQ format.

Amino Acid Sequences

Sequences in the listing with a Platform Field of “454” and a SequenceType of “nb-aa”, “urt-aa”, “multim50-aa” or “zerom50-aa” are amino acidsequences determined by translating the nucleotide sequences ofassemblies of 454 reads as described under “Assembly of Sequences”.

Sequences in the listing with a Platform Field of “PacBio” and aSequence Type of “pb-aa” are amino acid sequences determined bytranslating the nucleotide sequences of assemblies of PacificBiosciences reads as described under “Assembly of Sequences”.

Sequences in the listing with a Sequence Type of “sanger-aa” are aminoacid sequences determined by directly translating reads determined bySanger sequencing.

Other Sequencing Data Analysis Options

The workflow of data analysis described above can be used to accuratelydetermine the heavy- and light-chain sequences of each cell. However,this information is not absolutely necessary for our “selectionscreening” approach (see “screening of expressed human antibodies”). Forthe selection screen to work, we first cluster paired antibody sequencesinto clonal families, on the basis of their heavy chain V(D)J usage andlight chain VJ usage. Therefore, we do not require the full sequence ofthe immunoglobulin heavy and light chains, and can use sufficientsequence information to determine V(D)J usage. Therefore, we cantolerate sequencing errors and can use lower-quality reads generated by454 or any other sequencing technology. Sequence assembly of the forwardread is not generally an issue because all sequences can be firstgrouped according to their compound barcode before being assembled.Because each compound barcode comes from one sample/cell, there is onlyone ‘correct’ sequence for each immunoglobulin chain with the samecompound barcode. Sequencing errors in different strands can then beaveraged out because it is unlikely that all sequencing errors occur atthe same bases, meaning that taking the consensus base sequence willgive the most accurate sequence. In cases of ambiguity, bases with highPhred quality scores will generally be chosen instead. Because 454 trimssequence reads from the 3′ end until only higher quality reads remain,this can result in very short reads. With our method, we can toleratelower-quality reads and thereby use much longer reads generated by 454(400-500 bp). With these longer reads, we can identify V(D)J usagewithout requiring assembly of the forward read with the reverse read,thereby making the 3′ plate-ID non-essential in some aspects.Furthermore, the latest generation of 454 sequencing can sequence up toa mean of 746 bp and a mode of 800 bp. Thus, sequencing from just theforward reads can be sufficient to cover the entire heavy- andlight-chain immunoglobulin amplicons, also making the 3′ plate-IDnon-essential, in some aspects, because assembling forward with reversereads is no longer required.

Selection and Cloning of Antibodies

After assembly, heavy and light chain sequences were analyzed to selectantibodies for characterization. Antibodies were selected based onpredicted V(D)J germline usage and inspection of evolutionary treesderived from the antibody sequences. The selected antibodies werecloned, expressed, and characterized in different assays.

V(D)J Assignment

Heavy and light chain sequences from Runs 1 and 2 were analyzed withV-QUEST (Brochet, X. et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 36, W503-508 (2008)),software that compares an antibody chain sequence to a database of knownalleles of germline sequences and predicts the germline alleles used inthe antibody, how the germline sequences were recombined, and mutationsin the antibody relative to the germline. Table 18 shows results of aV-QUEST V(D)J assignment for the antibodies which were chosen forfurther characterization; the same data were obtained for all othersequence assemblies from Run 1 and Run 2 as well. Some sequences fromRun 3 and Run 4 assemblies were analyzed with SoDA (Volpe, Cowell andKepler, Bioinformatics (2006) 22 (4): 438-444), software similar toV-QUEST.

If the patient's genome has been sequenced, the genome sequence data canbe used as the germline sequences for the VDJ assignment analysis,further improving the ability to reliably identify somatichypermutations in the patient's antibody sequences.

Evolutionary Trees and Clonal Families

The nucleotide sequences corresponding to the mature peptides of heavychains from Runs 1 and 2 were separated into sets that corresponded tothe patient from which they were derived. From these individual sets thesoftware clustalx2 (Larkin M A, Blackshields G, Brown N P, Chenna R,McGettigan P A, McWilliam H, Valentin F, Wallace I M, Wilm A, Lopez R,Thompson J D, Gibson T J, Higgins D G. (2007) Bioinformatics, 23, 294;7-2948) was used to generate an alignment and tree using defaultsettings for all parameters.

Evolutionary trees of sequences from a patient can also be constructedfrom the set of sequences from individual clonal families The putativeprogenitor antibody heavy and light chain sequences for the family canbe inferred and added to the set of sequences if they are not already inthe set. An evolutionary tree for the set can be constructed using, forexample, Maximum Parsimony, Maximum Likelihood, or any suitablealgorithm, and the tree can be rooted at the sequence of the progenitorantibody. The tree can be constructed on the basis of the heavy chainsalone, or the light chains alone, or preferably by constructing the treebased on the individual heavy and light chains simultaneously, so thatthe tree represents the co-evolution of the heavy and light chains.

Antibody Selection

For each patient, the table of V-QUEST results was reviewed inconjunction with the trees built from Run 1 or Run 2 sequences (viewedin TreeViewX: http://darwin.zoology.gla.a.c.uk/˜rpage/treeviewx).Representative sequences were selected to cover the different familiesof VDJ present based on the V-QUEST data, inspecting the correspondingsequences on the tree to choose sequences that appeared to berepresentative of the clade. Typically one sequence was selected fromeach clade. Some of the selected sequences came from families with manymembers, but some were also selected from families with few members orone member. The selected sequences are described in Table 18. For eachantibody in Table 18, the column “Antibody” is the same as the textfollowing the “-” in the Contig ID field of the name associated with thesequence in the Sequence Listing.

Cloning and Expression of Cloned Light and Heavy Chain ImmunoglobulinPairs Vectors

One system is a Neomycin and dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) selectablevector system modified from Invitrogen vectors pcDNA3.3 and pOptivec. Analternative system is the Lonza GS system, in which the amplifiable,selectable marker is glutamine synthetase (GS) (see below). Sequencesencoding the immunoglobulin kappa light chain, lambda light chain, andgamma heavy chain are inserted into vectors. Kozak consensus and leadersequences are already present in the clones, and thus do not need to beengineered into the vectors. The constant regions are synthesized tocontain 5′-flanking restriction sites and one or more other internalrestriction sites. For facilitating the cloning of varied immunoglobulinheavy and light chains, inserts are engineered with multiple restrictionsites that increase the possibility that the clone itself will notcontain the restriction site and therefore not be cut internally. Theinserts have two different 8-cutter restriction sites at the 5′ end ofthe insert region and at two different restriction sites engineered intoconstant regions. The 5′ restriction sites are FseI and PacI for bothlight chains, and AscI and AsiSI for the gamma heavy chain. Restrictionsites engineered into the constant region themselves are NheI and XhoIfor both light chains, and EcoRI and SacII for the gamma heavy chain.See Table 16 for the sequence of the constant region inserts containingthe restriction sites. Heavy or light chain clones from the 1^(st) PCRreaction are then subjected to a 2^(nd) round of PCR with cloningprimers, which have 5′ flanking restriction sites that are incorporatedinto the clones. Appropriate restriction enzymes are used for cuttingthe expression vectors and the clones, which now have complementary endsand are ligated together using T4 DNA ligase. Both the Invitrogen andLonza GS vector systems contain an amplifiable selection marker. Thismarker is DHFR in the Invitrogen system and GS in the Lonza GS system.Under selection pressure from the appropriate selector (methotrexate forDHFR and L-methionine sulfoximine for the glucose synthetase (GS)),genes linked to the selection marker are amplified together with it.With more copies of the immunoglobulin genes, there is greater secretionof antibodies. This is useful when large amounts of antibody need to bepurified for subsequent in vivo screening for neutralizing antibodies.

Cloning and Expression

Assuming that the highest-affinity plasmablasts are selected for duringgerminal center maturation, we expect that the highest-affinity clonalfamily also has the highest number of clones. Furthermore, thehighest-affinity clone within each clonal family will also be the mostfrequent clone within that family. On the basis of these assumptions, wechoose to express the highest-frequency clone from the 5 largest clonalfamilies from each patient sample in some aspects. Clones are amplifiedfrom the 1^(st) PCR cDNA, where all samples from the same plate, eachcontaining a single cell, have been pooled together. The forward primercontains the sample-ID and therefore amplifies only DNA barcoded withthat particular sample-ID. This is highly specific because sample-IDscontain nucleotide differences between one another. Some sample-IDs canhave identical cloning forward primers and clones amplified by theseprimers must subsequently be distinguished from each other by bacterialcolony selection too. Both forward and reverse primers contain flankingrestriction sites (first and second restriction site regions) that allowthe clone to integrate (with coding frame aligned) into a vector thatalready contains a kappa, lambda, or gamma constant region. See Tables 4and 5 for cloning primer sequences. Light chains are cloned intomodified pcDNA3.3, and heavy chains into modified pOptivec, or bothchains are cloned into the Lonza GS dual-expression vector. Mammaliancells are either doubly transfected with separate expression vectorsencoding the immunoglobulin heavy and light chain genes, or singlytransfected with a dual-expression vector containing both the heavy andlight chain genes. Supernatants containing the secreted antibodies arethen collected and screened for the desired properties.

In some instances, variable regions of Ig genes may be cloned by DNAsynthesis, and incorporating the synthesized DNA into the vectorcontaining the appropriate constant region using restriction enzymes andstandard molecular biology. During synthesis, the exact nucleotidesequence need not be followed as long as long as the amino acid sequenceis unchanged, unless mutagenesis is desired. This allows for codonoptimization that may result in higher expression levels. This alsoallows for adding in restriction sites for the purpose of cloning.Non-translated sequences such as 5′ UTR and barcode sequences need notbe synthesized and leader sequences can also be swapped for other signalpeptide sequences known for higher expression levels. These result in anIg nucleotide sequence that can be very different from thehigh-throughput reads but give identical amino acid sequenced whenexpressed.

In some instances, the sample-ID barcode adaptor added on during reversetranscription may already incorporate a restriction enzyme site. Thisresults in an adaptor with a restriction site 3′ of the sample-IDbarcode in the PCR amplicon pool. During cloning with cloning primers,desired amplicons are amplified from a plate-specific amplicon poolusing 5′ primers that are complementary to the sample-ID barcodesequences, and chain specific 3′ primers (for the kappa, lambda andgamma chains). 3′ primers will add on 3′ restriction sites. 5′ primersdo not need to add restriction sites as the 5′ primer already contains arestriction site 3′ of the well-ID barcode. Following thisamplification, restriction enzymes are used to cut the amplicon forligation into the vector containing the constant region insert. Duringthe restriction enzyme digest, sequences added on to the 5′ end of theIg gene sequences, such as barcodes and universal sequences are cut asthey are 5′ of the 5′ restriction site.

Alternative Methods for Cloning and Expression

In another aspect, variable regions of Ig genes may be cloned by DNAsynthesis, and incorporating the synthesized DNA into the vectorcontaining the appropriate constant region using restriction enzymes andstandard molecular biology. During synthesis, the exact nucleotidesequence need not be followed as long as long as the amino acid sequenceis unchanged, unless mutagenesis is desired. This allows for codonoptimization that may result in higher expression levels. This alsoallows for adding in restriction sites for the purpose of cloning.Non-translated sequences such as 5′ UTR and barcode sequences need notbe synthesized, leader sequences can also be swapped for other signalpeptide sequences known for higher expression levels. These result in anIg nucleotide sequence that can be very different from thehigh-throughput reads but give identical amino acid sequenced whenexpressed.

In another aspect, the well-ID barcode adaptor added on during reversetranscription may already incorporate a restriction enzyme site. Thisresults in an adaptor with a restriction site 3′ of the well-ID barcodein the PCR amplicon pool. During cloning with cloning primers, desiredamplicons are amplified from a plate-specific amplicon pool using 5′primers that are complementary to the well-ID barcode sequences, andchain specific 3′ primers (for the kappa, lambda and gamma chains). 3′primers will add on 3′ restriction sites. 5′ primers do not need to addrestriction sites as the 5′ primer already contains a restriction site3′ of the well-ID barcode. Following this amplification, restrictionenzymes are used to cut the amplicon for ligation into the vectorcontaining the constant region insert. During the restriction enzymedigest, sequences added on to the 5′ end of the Ig gene sequences, suchas barcodes and universal sequences are removed as they are 5′ of the 5′restriction site.

Cloning of Heavy and Light Chains into Lonza Vectors

Cloning Immunoglobulin Constant Regions

Lonza vectors were obtained through Stanford University's academiclicensing agreement with Lonza. Kappa and lambda light chains wereinserted into vector pEE12.4 and the gamma heavy chain was inserted intovector pEE6.4. Heavy and light chain sequences were cloned in two steps:first, the constant regions were cloned in, followed by the 5′ end ofthe immunoglobulin chains (the leader and V(D)J sequences). Constantregions inserts were gene-synthesized by Integrated DNA Technologies(IDT), and contained appropriate silent mutations for gene optimizationand incorporation of restriction sites. Inserts were obtained from IDTin their proprietary pIDTSmart vector. Insert sequences are in Table 17.IgG1 was used as the gamma heavy chain constant region. The alleles usedwere Km3, Mcg⁻Ke⁻Oz⁻ and G1m3 for kappa, lambda and gamma chainsrespectively. To incorporate the constant regions into the Lonzavectors, the Lonza vectors and the pIDTSmart-constant region insertswere all individually transformed into competent dam⁻dcm⁻ E. coli andplasmids were purified using Qiagen miniprep kit followingmanufacturer's instructions. Plasmids were then digested using HindIIIand BclI at 37° C. for 1 hour and run on a 1.2% agarose gel at 150V for1 hour. Digested Lonza vectors and the constant region inserts were gelpurified and ligated (pEE12.4 with Km3 or Mcg⁻Ke⁻Oz⁻ light chains andpEE6.4 with G1m3 gamma1 heavy chain) using T4 DNA ligase for 10 minutesat RT in a ratio of 3:1 insert:vector. T4 DNA ligase was theninactivated at 70° C. for 8 minutes and 5 ul of the ligation mix wastransformed into heat shock competent TOP10 cells using standardmolecular biology techniques. Colonies were picked and insertion wasverified via Sanger sequencing.

Cloning Immunoglobulin Variable Regions

Next, pEE12.4 containing either lambda or kappa light chain was digestedusing AscI and XmaI for 5 hours at 37° C. and gel purified. pEE6.4containing the gamma 1 heavy chain was digested using AscI and AgeI for5 hours at 37° C. and gel purified. Selected amplicons were selectivelyamplified using well-ID specific forward primers and constantregion-specific reverse primers (Tables 4 and 5) from the specificplate-ID 100× dilution of the 1^(st) PCR. The forward primers had therestriction site AscI on the 5′ end of the primer, and the reverseprimers contained the XmaI or AgeI restriction site for the light andheavy chain primers constant region primers respectively. PCR cyclingwas done using an initial denaturation at 98° C. for 30 seconds, and 35to 45 cycles at 98° C. for 10 seconds, 68° C. for 15 seconds and 72° C.for 20 seconds. The final extension was 72° C. at 5 minutes and on holdat 4° C. indefinitely. The PCR products were purified using PCR_(u96)ultrafiltration plates from Millipore, following manufacturer'sinstructions. Following this, PCR products were double digested for 3hours at 37° C. using AscI and XmaI for the light chains and AscI andAgeI for the gamma 1 heavy chain. Digested products were then run on a2.5% low melt agarose with gelgeen (Biotium) and visualized under bluelight. Gel slices containing bands at the appropriate sizes wereexcised. In gel ligation was performed by melting the gel slices at 65°C. and adding the appropriate digested and Antarctic phosphatase(NEB)-treated Lonza vectors containing the constant region insert, andincubating with T4 DNA ligase for 1-3 hours at RT. Heat-shock competentbacteria were then transformed and plated on ampicillin agar. 6 clonesper construct were picked and grown in 2×LB (2× concentratedLuria-Bertani broth). Miniprep was performed using Millipore'sMultiscreen 96-well filter plates according to manufacturer'sinstructions (www.millipore.com/techpublications/tecg1/tn004) to obtainplasmid DNA. Colony PCR was performed using an initial denaturation of95° C. for 5 minutes, and 40 cycles of 95° C. for 1 minute, 50° C. for 2minutes, 72° C. for 1 minute, and a final extension at 72° C. for 5minutes and holding t 4° C. indefinitely. Clones with the appropriateinsert were sent for Sanger sequencing at Sequetech, Mountain View, CA,USA. Clone VDJ identification was done using IMGT HIGHV-Quest and thecorrect clones were kept as both bacterial stock (stored at −80° C. with15% glycerol) and plasmids.

Expression of Monoclonal Antibodies in 293T

Transient dual transfections of paired pEE12.4-lightchain andpEE6.4-heavychain constructs were done using Lipofectamine 2000following manufacturer's protocol. Transfections have been done in48-well, 24-well, 6-well, 60 mm and 100 mm dishes. In brief, 293T cellswere cultured in DMEM+10% ultralow IgG FBS (Invitrogen) to preventbovine IgG from competing with secreted human IgG at the downstreamprotein A purification step. 293T cells were cultured for 20 passagesbefore new aliquots liquid N₂ were thawed and used. For 48-well platetransfections, each well was seeded the day before with 8×10⁴ cells, andallowed to grow to ˜90% confluency the next day. 50 ng each of heavy andlight chain constructs were incubated in Optimem media for a finalvolume of 50 ul, and Lipofectamine 2000 was also separately incubatedwith 50 ul of Optimem media. Both incubations were from 5-25 minutes.Lipofectamine 2000 and the constructs were then mixed by gentlepipetting and incubated for 20 minutes before adding to 293T cells andgently mixed. Media was changed the next day and culture supernatantswere collected every other day (e.g., Monday, Wednesday, and Friday) for2 weeks. For transfections of other sizes, the following amounts ofconstructs and Lipofectamine 2000 were used: for 24-well platetransfections, 100 ng of each construct were used with 1.25 ul ofLipofectamine 2000. For 60 mm dishes, 625 ng of each construct were usedwith 12.5 ul of Lipofectamine 2000. For 100 mm dish transfections, 3 ugof each construct were used in 37.5 ul of Lipofectamine 2000.

Anti-Human IgG ELISA

In some instances, human IgG ELISA was done on the sample to quantitatethe amount of expressed IgG in the culture supernatant, and the culturesupernatant was used directly in downstream applications afternormalizing the amount of antibody. Anti-human IgG ELISA quantitationkit was purchased from Bethyl Laboratories and performed according tomanufacturer's instructions. In brief, 100 ul of capture antibody wascoated on Nunc Maxisorp plates overnight at 4° C. and washed 5× withPBST (PBS with 0.05% Tween20). Wells were blocked with 1% BSA in PBS foran hour at RT, then washed 5× with PBST. Wells were then incubated withthe appropriate standard dilutions from the kit or diluted culturesupernatants for 1 hr at RT, then washed 5× with PBST. 100 ul of dilutedHRP detection antibody was added to each well and incubated at RT for anhour, then washed 5× with PBST. 50 ul of TMB substrate solution wasadded and the reaction stopped with 50 ul of stop solution. Absorbancewas read on a SpectraMax M5 spectrophotometer at 450 nm and standardcurves generated with a 4-parameter curve. Antibodies were kept at 4° C.in PBS with 0.1% sodium azide as a preservative.

Protein A-IgG Purification of Expressed Monoclonal Antibodies

In other instances, antibodies were first purified from culturesupernatant and quantitated using BCA before use. In brief, culturesupernatants were collected 3× a week for 2 weeks into 50 ml tubes andstored at 4° C. with 0.1% sodium azide as an additive until proteinA-IgG purification. Culture supernatants were spun down and decanted toremove any cellular aggregates. 1M pH 9.0 Tris was added to culturesupernatants to ensure pH is between 7.5-8.0 as determined by pHindicator strips. Protein A plus agarose beads (Pierce) were washed 2×with PBS before 400 ul of a 50% slurry was added to culture supernatantsand incubated at 4° C. overnight on a rotator to ensure even mixing ofthe beads. Beads were recovered by spinning culture supernatant at 1000g for 5 minutes and pipetting out the beads from the bottom of the tubesinto 5 ml gravity flow columns. Beads were washed with 4×2 ml of PBSbefore elution with 2×1.5 ml of IgG elution buffer (Pierce), which is alow pH elution buffer, into an Amicon-4 100 kDa concentrator column.Eluted antibody was immediately neutralized with 400 ul of 1M TrispH8.0. Antibodies were then concentrated by spinning at 1000 g inAmicon-4 100 kDa concentrators for 10 minutes, followed by a 2 mL washof PBS, and a 2 ml wash of PBS with 0.1% sodium azide. Antibodyconcentrations were determined by BCA assay, and adjusted to 0.5 mg/ml.Protein A Plus Agarose was regenerated by washing with 1×2 ml of PBS,3×2 ml of IgG elution buffer and a wash with 3 ml of PBS with 0.1%sodium azide and kept at 4° C. Columns can be regenerated up to 5 times.

Screening of Expressed Human Antibodies

Screens for Antibody-Antigen Binding

Selected antibodies (see cloning and expression section above) are firstscreened for their ability to bind to the antigen of interest, and thenantibodies of the entire clonal family are expressed and screened fortheir ability that block or neutralize the antigen (see “functionalscreens” below). The IgG concentration in supernatants containingantibodies of interest is first determined by IgG ELISA, so that thesame amount of IgG can be used for each sample in the antibody-antigenbinding screen. In other cases, IgG was purified from the supernatantusing Protein A agarose beads, and quantified with BCA assay usingbovine immunoglobulins as the standard. Purified IgGs were thennormalized to the same concentration before use in screening antibodies.To screen antibodies that bind antigen, we perform an indirect ELISA. A96-well plate is coated overnight with the antigen of interest, andexcess antigen is then washed off. Supernatants containing antibodies ofinterest are then added to the wells and incubated for four hours, afterwhich the wells are washed. As a positive control, known amounts ofcommercially available antibodies (from non-human species) that arespecific for the antigen are added to separate wells containing theantigen. As a negative control, commercially available antibodiesspecific for an irrelevant antigen are added to separate wellscontaining the antigen of interest. An HRP-conjugated secondary antibodyis then added to the wells, incubated for 30 minutes, and excess washedoff. Tetramethylbenzidine (TMB) is then added to the plate, and thereaction allowed to proceed until color is observed in thepositive-control wells. The reaction is then stopped with acid, andabsorbance is measured. Specific well supernatants are deemed to containantibodies that bind the antigen of interest if the absorbance readoutthey yield is significantly higher than that in the negative control.

Fluzone ELISA

Volunteers were administered the 2010/2011 season flu vaccine fromFluzone, which consists of 3 strains of inactivated virus, theA/California/7/2009, A/Perth/16/2009, B/Brisbane/60/2008 strains.Fluzone ELISAs were done to determine if monoclonal antibodies derivedfrom vaccinated volunteers bind to the flu vaccine itself as an initialscreen for expressed antibodies with binding activity. Fluzone vaccinewas diluted 100× in a pH9 carbonate buffer and coated on Nunc Maxisorpplates either at RT for 1 hour or overnight at 4° C. Plates were thenwashed 5× with PBST (PBS w/0.05% Tween20) and blocked with PBS w/ 1% BSAfor 1 hour at RT. 100 ul of 100 ng/ml of expressed flu antibodies werethen added to wells at RT for 1 hour, before washing 5× with PBST andadding diluted HRP detection antibody (from Bethyl Labs human IgG ELISAquantitation kit) for 1 hour at RT. Plates were washed 5× with PBST and50 ul of TMB substrate were added. Color was allowed to develop for upto 30 min before stopping the reaction with 50 ul of stop solution.Plates were read on a SpectroMax M5 spectrophotometer at 450 nmabsorbance. Antibodies used in this assay are described in Table 19.Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the master table, Table18.

Surface Plasmon Resonance Determination of Flu Antibody Affinities

Binding of monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) to HA molecules was analyzed at25° C. using a ProteOn surface plasmon resonance biosensor (BioRadLabs). Expressed flu monoclonal antibodies derived from the plasmablastsof a flu-vaccinated donor (25 nM in pH 4.5 acetate buffer) were coupledto a GLC sensor chip with amine coupling at a target density of 800resonance units (RU) in the test flow cells using EDAC-NHS chemistry.Unreacted active ester groups were quenched with ethanolamine. Purifiedrecombinant hemagglutinin H3 (HA(ΔTM)(H3N2/Perth/16/2009) and H1(HA(ΔTM)(A/California/07/2009)(H1N1)) were purchased from ImmuneTechnology Corp. (New York, NY) and were diluted to 100, 50, 25, 12.5,6.25, nM, along with a blank buffer control were injected at a flow rateof 30 μL/min with 120 seconds contact time and 2000 seconds dissociationtime. Binding kinetics and data analyses were performed with BioRadProteON manager software. Affinity measurements were calculated usingthe bivalent analyte algorithm, as HA consisted of several repeatingunits. The accuracy of the fitted curves was verified by checking thatthe χ2 values of the goodness of each fit was below 10% of the peakbinding value (Rmax). Antibodies used in this assay are described inTable 20. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the mastertable, Table 18.

RA Antibody Reactivities on RA Antigen Microarrays

To print the antigen microarrays, antigens were diluted in phosphatebuffered saline to 0.2 mg/mL and attached to ArrayIt SuperEpoxy slidesusing an ArrayIt NanoPrint Protein LM210 system. Slides were marked witha hydrophobic marker pap pen and blocked overnight in PBS with 3% fetalbovine serum and 0.05% Tween 20 at 4° C., gently rocked at 30 rpm.Arrays were probed with 400 uL of 40 ug/mL monoclonal antibody for onehour at 4° C., gently rocked at 30 rpm. Arrays were then washed andincubated in Cy3 conjugated anti-human IgG/IgM secondary antibodydiluted at 1:2500 for 45 minutes at 4° C., gently rocked at 30 rpm.Following another wash, slides were scanned using a GenePix 4300AMicroarray Scanner. GenePix 7 software was used to find the medianflorescence intensity of each feature and background.

To analyze the data, background fluorescence intensities were subtractedfrom each feature and expressed as the median value of the four antigenfeatures on each array. Median intensities were log transformed with acut-off value of 10. These values were subjected to hierarchicalclustering using Cluster software to arrange antigens based onsimilarities to each other. The relationships were displayed as aheatmap using Java TreeView software. Antibodies used in this assay aredescribed in Table 21. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in themaster table, Table 18.

Anti-Histone 2A ELISA

A direct ELISA was used for detection of antibodies to histone 2A.Microtiter plates (Nunc Maxisorp) were coated with 100 μl of recombinantH2A in carbonate buffer, at a concentration of 20 μg/ml, and incubatedat 4° C. overnight. After blocking in PBS containing 1% bovine serumalbumin (BSA), RA patient-derived antibodies were used in a titrationfrom 15 ug/ml to 250 ug/ml in dilution buffer (PBS containing 0.1% BSAand 0.1% Tween-20), added to the plate in duplicate at 100 μl/well, andincubated for 2 hours at room temperature. The samples were thenincubated for 1 hour at room temperature with a 1:5,000 dilution of amonoclonal, horseradish peroxidase-labeled goat anti-human antibody. Thereaction was developed by application of 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethylbenzidinesubstrate (TMB) (Sigma-Aldrich) for 15 minutes and stopped by additionof 50 μl of 2N H2SO4. Relative quantification of antibodies against wasperformed by optical densitometry at 450 nm using known seropositive RAserum as a positive control. Antibodies used in this assay are describedin Table 22. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the mastertable, Table 18.

Anti-CCP2 ELISA

Anti-CCP2 ELISA was performed according the manufacturer's instructions(Eurodiagnostica, Malmo, Sweden). Briefly, antibodies derived from RApatients are diluted to approximately 125 ug/ml in dilution buffer (PBScontaining 0.1% BSA and 0.1% Tween-20), added to the pre-blockedcommercial CCP2 ELISA plate at 100 μl/well, and incubated for 2 hours atroom temperature. The samples were then incubated for 1 hour at roomtemperature with a 1:5,000 dilution of a monoclonal, horseradishperoxidase-labeled goat anti-human antibody. The reaction was developedby application of 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethylbenzidine substrate (TMB)(Sigma-Aldrich) for 15 minutes and stopped by addition of 50 μl of 2NH2SO4. Relative quantification of antibodies against was performed byoptical densitometry using standards provided by the vendor and knownpositive RA serum. Antibodies used in this assay are described in Table22. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the master table,Table 18.

Anti-Rheumatoid Factor ELISA

For detection of antibodies to rheumatoid factor (RF), microtiter plates(Nunc Maxisorp) were coated with 10 ug/ml of rabbit IgG in carbonatebuffer, and incubated at 4° C. overnight. After blocking in PBScontaining 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA), RA patient derived antibodieswere at 5 ug/ml dilution buffer (PBS containing 0.1% BSA and 0.1%Tween-20), added to the plate in duplicate at 100 μl/well, and incubatedfor 2 hours at room temperature. The samples were then incubated for 1hour at room temperature with a 1:5,000 dilution of a monoclonal,horseradish peroxidase-labeled goat anti-human antibody. The reactionwas developed by application of 3,3′,5,5′-tetramethylbenzidine substrate(TMB) (Sigma-Aldrich) for 15 minutes and stopped by addition of 50 μl of2N H2SO4. Relative quantification of antibodies against was performed byoptical densitometry at 450 nm using two known RF+ control serum as apositive controls. Antibodies used in this assay are described in Table23. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the master table,Table 18.

Immunohistochemistry of Antibodies from Lung Adenocarcinoma Patient onLung Cancer Tissue Arrays

Two different types of tissue microarray slides were purchased from USBiomax. They were VLC 12 and BS0481. A variety of lung carcinomas tissuecores are included on the slides, including lung adenocarcinomas, andalso normal lung tissue controls. Slides were heated in a citrate pH6.0antigen retrieval buffer at 95-99° C. for 40 minutes before allowing tocool to RT. Slides were pre-treated with 0.02% Triton-X and 0.6% H2O2for 20 minutes. Slides were then blocked with 10% normal goat serum inTBST (TBS with 0.05% Tween20) for 2 hours before further blocking in 100ug/ml of F(ab) goat-anti-human IgG (Jackson Immunoresearch) overnight at4° C. Slides then underwent an avidin/biotin block (Vector Laboratories)according to manufacturer's instructions. Slides were then incubated in5 or 10 ug/ml of expressed lung antibody for 1 hour at RT, washed 3×5minutes with TBST, and then incubated with a biotinylatedgoat-anti-human secondary antibody for 20 minutes at RT. Slides werethen washed 3×5 minutes with TBST and incubated with prepared VectastainABC reagent for 30 minutes at RT. Slides were then washed 3×5 minutes ofTBST and stained with Vector Red (Vector Laboratories) and the colordevelopment tracked with a light microscope. After the appropriatestaining time, the reaction was stopped by washing with distilled waterand counterstained with hematoxylin. Slides were aqueous-mounted andphotographed with a BX-51 microscope. Antibodies used in this assay aredescribed in Table 24. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in themaster table, Table 18.

Flow Cytometry Determination of Binding of Antibodies Expressed fromLung Adenocarcinoma Patient to Lung Cancer Cell Lines

Lung cancer cell lines used were A549, H226, H441, H23, H1975, H1437,H2126, H1650 and H2009. HEK 293T cells were also used as a negativecontrol. Cells were detached by incubating cells in PBS without Ca²⁺ andMg²⁺ with 2 mM EDTA for 1 hour at 37° C. This is to prevent damagingcell surface antigens that may be done with trypsinizing or any otherproteolytic digest to detach cells. Cells were washed once with FACSbuffer (HBSS with 2% FCS) before suspended in 50 ul of FACS buffer andincubated with 10 ug/ml, 3 ug/ml, 1 ug/ml, 0.2 ug/ml of expressed lungantibodies to titrate the dose. The optimal concentration was found tobe from the 0.2-1 ug/ml range. Therefore, 1 ug/ml, 0.5 ug/ml, 0.25 ug/mlof lung antibodies were used subsequently. Lung antibodies wereincubated for 30 minutes at 4° C. before washing with 2×200 ul of FACSbuffer in 96-well plates. Anti-human IgG-PE was then added and incubatedfor 15 minutes at 4° C. in the dark. Samples were then washed 2×200 ulwith FACS buffer and resuspended in 200 ul of FACS buffer and analyzedon a BD LSR II or LSR Fortessa. Sytox blue was used as a live/deadstaining. Antibodies used in this assay are described in Table 24.Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the master table, Table18.

Staph Flow Cytometry

Fixed S. aureus particles (Wood strain) were obtained from Invitrogen.Wood strain is a strain that expresses minimal protein A by some of thebacteria. The particles were suspended in 50 ul of FACS buffer at 10×10⁶cells/50 ul, and incubated with a titration of 10 ug/ml, 5 ug/ml or 1ug/ml of expressed antibodies derived from staph individuals for 1 hourminutes at 4° C. Fixed staph particles were then washed with twice withFACS buffer before incubating for 15 min in the dark at 4° C. withanti-human IgG-FITC antibody. Particles were then washed with 1 ml ofFACS buffer and resuspended in 200 ul of FACS buffer for analysis on aBD LSR II or LSR Fortessa. Antibodies used in this assay are describedin Table 25. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the mastertable, Table 18.

Functional Screens

Blocking Antibody to Receptor-Ligand Interactions

To screen antibodies for their ability to block ligand-receptorinteractions (e.g. cytokine-receptor interactions), we transfect 293Tcells with a vector encoding the appropriate receptor. These 293T cellsare also stably transfected with an NF-κB-dependent luciferasereporter—such that these stably transfected 293T cells expressluciferase when NF-κB is activated. We then culture the transfected 293Tcells with the appropriate ligand in the presence or absence of thecandidate antibodies. 293T cells are finally assayed for luciferaseexpression by measuring luciferase-dependent light emission. Interactionbetween the ligand and its receptor, e.g. interaction between IL-17A andIL-17R, activates NF-κB. Blocking antibodies prevent NF-κB signaling byligand-receptor binding and therefore abrogate the expression ofluciferase. In cases where the ligand-receptor interaction does notactivate NF-κB, other transcriptional response elements are used todrive the promoter of the luciferase gene, e.g. AP-1 response elements,etc.

Screening Antibodies for their Ability to Inhibit Cytokine Function orInhibit a Functional Assay

Functional assays can also be used to screen for anti-cytokineantibodies in patient sera or in cloned and expressed antibodies. Inthis approach, the expressed human antibodies are tested for theirability to inhibit cytokine or other immune mediator induction of acellular response.

Antibodies Targeting Bacteria, Virally-Infected Cells, Parasites orCancer Cells

To screen for antibodies that kill or neutralize bacteria,virally-infected cells, parasites, or cancer cells, we culture theappropriate cell type either in the presence or absence of antibody,together with non-heat-inactivated serum (which contains complementfactors). If the antibody is a neutralizing antibody, it will opsonizethe bacteria, other microbes, or cancer cells and activate complementcomponents that form the membrane attack complex (MAC), which inducescell death. To test neutralization, we run a fluorescent live/dead assay(Invitrogen), in which live and dead cells are stained with differentfluorophores. Cells can be assayed for percentages of live and deadcells by using flow cytometry. The antibody that results in the highestpercentage of dead cells will be a good candidate neutralizing antibodythat will be further analyzed in in vivo screens.

Antibodies that Neutralize Viruses

To screen for antibodies that neutralize viruses, we perform a standardplaque-reduction assay or other in vitro cellular infection assays.Neutralizing antibodies are expected to decrease viral infection ofcells. Candidate antibodies are then tested in an in vivo model.

Influenza Microneutralization Assay

Some expressed flu antibodies that showed binding activity to theFluzone ELISA were sent to an external CRO, Virapur, LLC formicroneutralization assays. In brief, two-fold dilutions of eachantibody, starting from 100 ug/ml, were mixed with an equal volume ofapproximately 100 TCID₅₀ infectious units of titered stock virus inquadruplicates in wells of a 96-well plate. Virus/antibody solutionswere incubated for 2 hours and then the mixture was transferred to a96-well plate containing 80% confluent MDCK cells. Cells, antibody andvirus were incubated for an additional 2 hours at 37° C., after whichvirus was removed, monolayers rinsed and viral growth media added toeach well. Wells were observed microscopically after 72 hours for thepresence of influenza virus infection. Antibodies used in this assay aredescribed in Table 26. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in themaster table, Table 18.

Staph Inhibition Assay

S. aureus were used when in log-phase growth. They were added to 96-wellpolypropylene plates, and anti-staph antibody from staph patients wasadded at 10 ug/ml. Baby rabbit complement (Cedarlane) was added atmanufacturer's recommended amount and mixed thoroughly. Plates wereincubated at 37° C. for 45 minutes before being diluted 1:10, 1:100 and1:1000 and plated on 5% TSA blood agar plates and grown overnight.Bacterial CFUs were counted and tabulated the next day. Antibodies usedin this assay are described in Table 27. Sequences of antibodies can bereferred to in the master table, Table 18.

Immunoprecipitation of Staph Antigens with Antibodies Derived fromStaph-Infected Patients

Staph protein lysate was made by lysing S. aureus using B-Per BacterialProtein Extraction Reagent (Pierce) with 100 ng/ml of lysostaphin for 30minutes at RT along with 1× Halt protease inhibitor, and separated fromthe insoluble fraction by centrifuging at 15000 rpm in amicrocentrifuge. Lysate was precleaned by incubating with protein GDynabeads for 1 hour at RT. 5 ug of antibody derived from Staph patientwas bound onto protein G Dynabeads by incubating for 1 hour at RT.Protein G-bound antibodies were then incubated with precleaned staphlysate overnight at 4° C. Beads were then washed 3× with PBST (PBS with0.1% Tween20) and heated with 5× reducing lane sample buffer (ThermoScientific) at 95° C. for 5 minutes before running an SDS-PAGE on a4-12% Criterion Bis-Tris gel. Proteins were visualized with RAPIDStainReagent (Calbiochem). Antibodies used in this assay are described inTable 28. Sequences of antibodies can be referred to in the mastertable, Table 18.

Mass Spectrometry Identification of Peptides

Stained protein bands of interest were cut out of the gels, immersed in10 mM ammonium bicarbonate containing 10 mM DTT and 100 mMiodoacetamide, treated with 100% acetonitrile, and then digestedovernight at 37° C. with 0.1 mg trypsin (Sigma-Aldrich) in 10 mMammonium acetate containing 10% acetonitrile. The trypsinized proteinswere identified with LCMS by using the Agilent 1100 LC system and theAgilent XCT Ultra Ion Trap (Agilent Technologies, Santa Clara, CA) aspreviously described (Lopez-Avila V, Sharpe O, Robinson WH:Determination of ceruloplasmin in human serum by SEC-ICPMS. Anal BioanalChem 2006, 386:180-7). LCMS data was scanned against the SwissProt orNCBInr databases by using the SpectrumMill software (Agilent) for thedetection of peptides used to identify proteins. Antibodies used in thisassay are described in Table 29.

Example 1: High-Throughput Sequencing of Paired Heavy- and Light-ChainSequences from Individual B Cells

We developed a method of adding compound barcodes (sample-ID+plate-ID)to sequences in order to unambiguously identify which sequencesoriginated from the same well in a plate. We used this approach tosequence paired heavy chain and light chain immunoglobulin genes fromindividual B cells. Individual B cells can be sorted by flow cytometryfrom blood, bulk peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), bulk Bcells, plasmablasts, plasma cells, memory B cells, or other B cellpopulations (FIG. 1 ).

First, B cells were single-cell-sorted into 96-well PCR plates, leavingone column of wells empty, as a negative control. Oligonucleotidescontaining different sample-ID barcodes were added into different wellsduring reverse transcription (RT). After reverse transcribing the mRNA,the MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptase switches templates and transcribes theoligonucleotide, incorporating it and the sample-ID barcode into the 3′end of the 1^(st) strand cDNA (FIG. 2 a ). All cDNAs (barcoded with asample-ID) from one plate were then pooled and subjected to two roundsof PCR. During the PCR, 454 sequencing primers (first and secondsequencing regions) and plate-ID barcodes were added onto the 5′ and 3′ends of the amplicon by using PCR primers with 5′-flanking barcodesequences. Amplicons (amplicon regions) from different plates now have ndifferent plate-IDs, and the compound barcode comprising a plate-ID anda sample-ID unambiguously identifies sequences as coming from aparticular cell, allowing pairing up of sequenced heavy- and light-chaingenes (FIG. 2 b-c ).

FIG. 3 describes the general methodology used and the associatedsequences. Primers and adapter molecules are shown in Table 1. Sample-IDsequences are shown in Table 2. Plate-ID sequences are shown in Table 3.Cloning primers are shown in Table 4, with the 3′ sequence of cloningforward primers shown in Table 5.

We obtained PCR products at the expected sizes: ˜600 bp for the kappaand lambda light chains, and ˜700 bp for the gamma heavy chain (FIG. 4 a). Next, we sent the material for Sanger sequencing. We obtainedsequences that were identified by NCBI BLAST as kappa, lambda, and gammachains (data not shown). Further investigation of the DNA chromatogramshowed a mix of several peaks starting at the sample-ID barcodes,showing that we successfully added sample-ID barcodes to cDNA from cellsin different wells during RT and successfully amplified them in twosubsequent rounds of PCR (FIG. 4 b ). The Sanger sequencing chain fromthe 3′ end also showed a mix of several peaks starting at the VJjunction, owing to amplification of genes from different cells, whichdiffered after the VJ junction as a result of insertions and deletionsand random recombination of different V and J genes. Furthermore, whenwe performed PCR with cloning primers specific for the well A1sample-ID, we obtained a single peak rather than a mix of several peaks,showing that we indeed can amplify sequences from a specific cell withinthe pool (FIG. 4 c-d ).

Example 2: Gating Scheme for Single Cell Sorting of Plasmablasts

Plasmablasts were defined as CD19⁺CD20⁻CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺ for this experiment.FIG. 22 shows a gating scheme for flow cytometry sorting of singleplasmablast cells into 96-well plates.

Single PBMCs were prepared and stained as described above. Cells werefirst gated on based on their FSC and SSC profile (data not shown). LiveCD19⁺ B cells were then gated on (left panel), and further narrowed downto CD20⁻ B cells (2^(nd) panel from left), and refined to CD27⁺CD38⁺⁺cells. From this, IgG⁺ plasmablasts were determined as IgA⁻ and IgM⁻, asIgG⁺ plasmablasts do not express cell surface IgG. This population wassingle cell sorted into 96-well plates.

Example 3: Plasmablasts are Present in Subjects Undergoing ImmunologicalChallenge

Plasmablasts generally represent about 0.15% of B cells in healthydonors, but can range from about 3.3%-16.4% in subjects undergoing avariety of immunological challenges including infections (e.g., S.aureus and C. diff infections), cancer associated with non-progression(e.g., metastatic melanoma and metastatic adenocarcinoma of the lung inwhich patients following an intervention (chemotherapy in the case ofthe lung adenocarcinoma patient and ipilimumab therapy in the case ofthe metastatic melanoma patient) became long-term non-progressorsassociated with an active B cell response), and vaccinations (e.g.,influenza).

FIG. 23 shows that plasmablasts were present in and obtainable from arange of subjects for high-throughput sequencing of the paired antibodyrepertoire and characterization of the active humoral response antibodyrepertoire. This demonstrates that the methodologies disclosed hereincan be used to obtain evolutionary trees of heavy and light (H&L) chainsand use this information to clone and/or express antibodies for, e.g.:a) novel antigen discovery; b) to inform vaccine design—for example,using the immune system to inform us as to which are the known and novelantigens are likely useful for opsonization and phagocytosis and/orkilling/inhibition of a pathogen or target of interest and, optionally,to put that into vaccine design; c) making neutralizing monoclonalantibodies, e.g., from vaccines; d) making binding monoclonalantibodies; e) making antibodies against microbial pathogens; and f)making antibodies against cancers. Examples of these are described inmore detail below.

Example 4: Disease Activity in CCP+ RA is Correlated with CirculatingPlasmablasts

Having shown that our method can be used for sequencing ofimmunoglobulin genes in identifiable pairs, we used our method toinvestigate the antibody repertoire of plasmablasts in CCP+ RA patients.We obtained blood samples from consented RA patients and stained forplasmablasts by flow cytometry (FIG. 5 a ). Circulating plasmablastswere expressed as a percentage of total PBMCs. We found that CCP+ RApatients have significantly higher peripheral blood plasmablastpercentages than CCP− RA patients (FIG. 5 b ). Furthermore, plasmablastpercentages in CCP+ patients, but not in CCP− patients, correlated withdisease activity (r=0.35 and p=0.028) (FIG. 5 c ).

Example 5: Plasmablasts Produced Anti-CCP Antibodies

Although CCP+ patients have plasmablast percentages that correlate withdisease activity, these patients could have an ongoing infection orother factors that elevated their circulating plasmablast percentages.To determine the specificity of circulating plasmablasts in CCP+patients, RosetteSep-enriched B cells from patients were cultured inRPMI supplemented with 10% FBS. Other media supplements, such asanti-IgM, IL-6, BAFF etc., were not used so that plasmablasts would bethe only cells secreting antibodies (with other B cells remaininginactivate). To confirm that only plasmablasts produce antibodies, wedepleted some of the samples of plasmablasts (FIG. 5 d ). B cells werethen cultured for seven days before collecting the supernatant andrunning it on a Luminex peptide array. The array assays antibodyreactivity to citrullinated peptides. Antibody reactivity was absent insupernatants of plasmablast-depleted samples compared to supernatants ofmock-depleted B cells, suggesting that plasmablasts secrete significantamounts of anti-citrulline peptide autoantibodies (FIG. 5 e ).Furthermore, when peptides with a mean fluorescent intensity (MFI) above60 for each sample were counted, a strong correlation was found betweencirculating plasmablast percentages and the number of peptides to whichantibodies reacted (r=0.90 and p=0.0139). An MFI of 60 was chosen asthis was the threshold below which >99% of peptide reactivity falls insupernatants of plasmablast-depleted samples.

Example 6: 454 Sequencing and Analysis of Sequences

Plasmablasts from patients were single-cell sorted into 96-well platesas described above, and their RNA reverse transcribed and PCR amplifiedaccording to “Touchdown PCR” in materials and methods section such thatthey contained sample-ID (sample identification region) and plate-ID(plate identification region) barcodes, as described above. See FIG. 3 .Sequences of the cDNA were then obtained from a 454-sequencing facility(DNA Sequencing Center, Brigham Young University and 454 sequencingcenter, Roche).

Sequences were obtained from a first 454 sequencing run using theshotgun pipeline. Sequences of acceptable quality were obtained from a2nd 454 sequencing run through a modified amplicon filter of the 454 GSFLX data analysis suite. The amplicon filter was modified to have<vfScanAllFlows> set to “false”, and <vfBadFlowThreshold> changed to“6”. Sequences from a third and fourth run were obtained using astandard 454 amplicon filter. Filter-passed sequences were thenprocessed as described in “Assignment of sequences to wells” section inthe materials and methods, and sequences in each well were individuallyassembled as described in “Assembly of sequences” in the materials andmethods. Assembled sequences were then parsed with IMGT HighV-Quest toobtain identification of VDJ regions used.

After sequence assembly and V(D)J usage identification, ClustalX wasused to cluster sequences into clonal families (FIG. 6 ). Alternatively,sequences can be assembled using both forward and reverse reads. In thiscase, subdivided forward sequences are first assembled as above. Forwardand reverse sequences V(D)J usage are then identified using HighV-QUESTand forward and reverse sequences subset according to plate-ID and V(D)Jusage, and forward and reverse sequences assembled using Newbler.Because immunoglobulin sequences are largely similar, assembly from asmaller subset of sequences avoids potential problems of sequences fromdifferent cells being incorrectly paired.

Example 7: Clustering of Sequences into Evolutionary Trees

Peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) were isolated from humansubjects with the indicated diagnoses or after vaccination. Plasmablastswere single-cell sorted into individual wells in 96-well plates,creating single-cell samples in each well, the mRNA in each well wasthen reverse transcribed, and then well contents were pooled andsubjected to two rounds of PCR to amplify the immunoglobulin heavy andlight chain cDNAs. The reverse transcription added an identifyingsample-ID to all cDNAs generated from each single sample, and the firstround and second rounds of PCR added plate-IDs and then 454 TitaniumPrimers A and B to every amplicon, respectively, as described in“Touchdown PCR and non-touchdown PCR” in the materials and methodssection. The general methodology is outlined in FIG. 3 . Pooledamplicons were sequenced with 454 sequencing technology, reads ofacceptable quality obtained as described above. Reads were assigned towells and assembled as described in “Assignment of reads to well” and“Assembly of sequences” sections in the materials and methods. V(D)Jsegments in assembled sequences were then identified using HighV-QUEST.Identified heavy and light chain sequences with shared compound barcodescan then paired simply by putting assembled sequences with matchingcompound barcodes together.

Amplicons from individual human subjects were clustered based on theseV(D)J segments, and sequences expressing the same V(D)J segments wereclassified as being from the same clonal family (FIG. 7 ). Each piechart represents the percentage of clones derived from individualplasmablasts from an individual human subject expressing identical V(D)Jgene segments (i.e., percentage of clones in each clonal family). Humansubjects included those with sepsis (2 subjects), rheumatoid arthritis(3 subjects), lung cancer (1 subject), and after vaccination forinfluenza (1 subject). These subjects were chosen to show that clonalfamilies can be isolated from plasmablasts of subjects undergoing bothacute (sepsis and flu vaccine) and chronic conditions (rheumatoidarthritis and lung cancer).

The immunoglobulin heavy chain V(D)J sequences from the individual humansubjects of FIG. 7 were clustered using ClustalX and displayed usingTreeview as unrooted radial trees (FIG. 8 ). Each radial tree representsthe heavy chain sequences derived from an individual human subject. Foreach radial tree, the terminal ends represent a unique sequence. Themajor branches represent clonal families, and the smaller branchesrepresent clonal subfamilies that differ from one another by mutationsthat arose via junctional diversity (addition of P-nucleotides orN-nucleotides, or nucleotide deletion), somatic hypermutation andaffinity maturation.

Example 8: Cloning, Expression, and Purification of Antibodies

All selected antibodies were cloned, expressed, and isolated asdescribed above in the Materials and Methods section (See sections:Cloning of heavy and light chains into Lonza vectors; Expression ofmonoclonal antibodies in 293T; Anti-human IgG ELISA; and Protein A-IgGpurification of expressed monoclonal antibodies). Purified antibodieswere then used for further study, as discussed below.

Example 9: Characterization of Antibodies from Subjects FollowingInfluenza Vaccination

Antibodies from humans administered an influenza vaccine were selectedand isolated as described above. The antibodies selected for furthercharacterization below are indicated in the appropriate sections.

Fluzone ELISA

Volunteers were administered the 2010/2011 season flu vaccine fromFluzone, which consists of 3 strains of inactivated virus, theA/California/7/2009, A/Perth/16/2009, B/Brisbane/60/2008 strains.Fluzone ELISAs were performed as described above to determine ifmonoclonal antibodies derived from vaccinated volunteers bind to the fluvaccine itself as an initial screen for expressed antibodies withbinding activity. 14 of 31 antibodies bound to Fluzone ELISA (FIG. 26 )and a subset of these were subsequently selected and tested for bindingactivity to hemagglutinin using surface plasmon resonance. Antibodiescharacterized by Fluzone ELISA were: Flu14-Flu23, Flu25-Flu27, Flu29,Flu30, Flu34, Flu35, Flu37, Flu39-Flu41, Flu43-Flu46. S1 and S2 wereused as negative controls.

Surface Plasmon Resonance Determination of Flu Antibody Affinities

Binding of monoclonal antibodies (mAbs) to HA molecules was analyzed at25° C. using a ProteOn surface plasmon resonance biosensor (BioRad Labs)as described above. Of the 14 antibodies that bound to Fluzone ELISA, 10bound to H3, and 1 bound to H1, while 3 did not bind (FIG. 27 ). One ofthe non-binders, the H1 binder, and 4 other randomly chosen H3 binderswere selected and sent to a contract research organization (CRO) to testneutralization activity in a microneutralization assay. Antibodiescharacterized by SPR were: Flu14-Flu22, Flu26, Flu29, Flu34, Flu35,Flu46.

Influenza Microneutralization Assay

Some of the expressed flu antibodies that showed binding activity in theFluzone ELISA were sent to an external CRO, Virapur LLC, formicroneutralization assays as described above. The results of the assaysshowed that the antibody that bound to H1 in previous assays neutralizedH1, while the antibodies that bound to H3 in previous assays neutralizedH3. The non-binder did not neutralize influenza virus (FIG. 28 ).Antibodies characterized by microneutralization assay were Flu15, Flu16,Flu18, Flu19, Flu20, Flu21.

CDR Variation

Flu antibodies were obtained as described above. FIG. 25A shows apartial dendrogram blown-up for clarity. Clonal families are clearlyvisible and the shaded clonal family has the assigned V(D)J as shown inthe grey box. Amino acid sequence across the CDRs (boxed region) for theheavy and light chains are shown in FIGS. 25B and C respectively,showing some residue differences between the chains.

These above results demonstrate that evolutionary trees can be obtainedusing the compositions and methods described herein. Fully humanmonoclonal antibodies can be isolated from activated B cells, such asplasmablasts, of subjects undergoing acute conditions using thecompositions and methods described herein. These fully human monoclonalantibodies can also be neutralizing antibodies using the compositionsand methods described herein. The results also demonstrate that thecompositions and methods disclosed herein can be used to isolate mAbstargeted against foreign antigens.

Example 10: Characterization of Antibodies from Subjects with RA

Antibodies from humans suffering from rheumatoid arthritis (RA) wereselected and isolated as described above. The antibodies selected forfurther characterization below are indicated in the appropriatesections.

RA Antibody Reactivities on RA Antigen Microarrays

Antibodies derived from RA patients were probed on an RA antigen arrayand florescence scanned with a GenePix machine as described in “RAantibody reactivities on RA antigen arrays” section in materials andmethods. The identified relationships were displayed as a heatmap usingJava TreeView software (FIG. 37 ). The antibodies characterized by thisassay were: RA1, RA2, RA3, RA4, RA8-RA13, RA16, RA19, RA22 and RA23.Flu14 and Flu26 were used as negative controls.

Anti-Histone 2A ELISA

For detection of antibodies to H2A, a direct ELISA was performed asdescribed in “Anti-histone 2A ELISA” in materials and methods section.FIG. 35 a shows the absorbance values detected for each antibody tested.The antibodies characterized in FIG. 35 a and in anti-CCP2 ELISA belowwere: RA1, RA2, RA4-RA16, RA19, RA23-RA24. FIG. 36 shows the selectedantibodies (RA1, RA2, RA8, RA9) on another independent ELISA using 30ug/ml of antibodies.

Anti-CCP2 ELISA

Anti-CCP2 ELISA was performed as described in “Anti-CCP2 ELISA” inmaterials and methods section. FIG. 35 b shows the absorbance valuesdetected for each antibody tested.

Anti-Rheumatoid Factor ELISA

Antibodies derived from RA patients were used as the primary antibody ina direct ELISA and anti-human IgG-HRP was used as the secondaryantibody, and visualized with TMB substrate. For detection of antibodiesto rheumatoid factor (RF), Anti-RF ELISA was performed as described in“anti-rheumatoid factor” ELISA in the materials and methods section.FIG. 34 shows that antibodies RA2 and RA3 showed reactivity. Antibodiescharacterized here were: RA1-RA6, RA8-RA12, RA14.

These above results demonstrate that antibodies can be isolated fromactivated B cells, such as plasmablasts, of subjects undergoing chronicconditions using the compositions and methods described herein. Theresults also demonstrate that the compositions and methods disclosedherein can be used to isolate mAbs targeted against self antigens.

Example 11: Characterization of Antibodies from Subjects with LunmCancer

Antibodies from a long-term non-progressor human suffering frommetastatic lung adenocarcinoma were selected and isolated as describedabove. This human developed metastatic lung adenocarcinoma and wasexpected to succumb to cancer, however following chemotherapy thispatient entered a state of long-term non-progression for over 4 yearsthat was associated with plasmablasts constituting 3.1% of allperipheral blood B cells. The elevated peripheral blood plasmablastlevels in this patient indicated that an ongoing immune response couldbe contributing to her long-term non-progression. The followingantibodies were selected for further characterization below: LC1,LC5-LC7, LC9-LC18. Flu16 was used as the negative control.

Immunohistochemistry of Antibodies from Lung Adenocarcinoma Patient onLung Cancer Tissue Arrays

Immunohistochemistry using two different types of tissue microarrayslides was performed as described in “Immunohistochemistry of antibodiesfrom lung adenocarcinoma patient on lung cancer tissue arrays” in thematerials and methods section. Our results demonstrated one of theexpressed antibody bound to lung adenocarcinoma (FIG. 32 ).

Flow Cytometry Determination of Binding of Antibodies Expressed fromLung Adenocarcinoma Patient to Lung Adenocarcinoma Cell Lines

Binding of antibodies to various lung cancer cell lines was performed asdescribed in “Flow cytometry determination of binding of antibodiesexpressed from lung adenocarcinoma patient to lung cancer cell lines” inthe materials and methods section. Our results showed that one antibodybound to lung adenocarcinoma cell lines and may be specific for lungadenocarcinomas (FIG. 33 ).

These above results demonstrate that antibodies can be isolated fromactivated B cells, such as plasmablasts, of subjects undergoing chronicconditions such as cancer using the compositions and methods describedherein. The results also demonstrate that the compositions and methodsdisclosed herein can be used to isolate mAbs targeted against selfantigens.

Example 12: Characterization of Antibodies from Subjects withStaphylococcus aureus Infection

Humans with S. aureus infections, including a human with chronic S.aureus osteomyelitis with immune-mediated control of the infection inthe absence of antibiotics, were used as sources for peripheral bloodfrom which peripheral blood plasmablasts were stained and sorted. cDNAprocessing with barcoding, 454 sequencing, and bioinformatics analysisgenerated evolutionary trees of antibody repertoires in humans mountingeffective immune responses against Staph. aureus. Antibodies from humansmounting effective immune responses against S. aureus infection wereselected and isolated as described above. The antibodies selected forfurther characterization below are indicated in the appropriatesections.

Staph Flow Cytometry

Anti-staph antibodies were used to stain fixed S. aureus as described in“Staph Flow Cytometry” in the materials and methods. Our results showedthat antibodies S6 and S11 bind to the surface of S. aureus and may becandidates for opsonization, resulting in phagocytosis andkilling/inhibition of S. aureus (FIG. 29 ). The antibodies characterizedin this assay were: S1-S4, S6-S13, with F26 as a negative control.

Staph Inhibition Assay

S. aureus in log-phase growth were combined with anti-staph antibody todetermine the inhibitory activity of the antibodies as described in“Staph Inhibition Assay” in the materials and methods. Our resultsdemonstrate that several of the antibodies cloned and expressedexhibited potent killing/inhibition activity on S. aureus (FIG. 30 ).Antibodies characterized by this assay were S6 and S9, with LC1 as thenegative control.

Immunoprecipitation of Staph Antigens with Antibodies Derived fromStaph-Infected Patients

Antibodies were used to immunoprecipitate various candidate staphantigens as described in “Immunoprecipitation of staph antigens withantibodies derived from staph-infected patients” of the materials andmethods. Immunoprecipitated proteins were then identified with massspectrometry as described below. Antibodies characterized by this assaywere S1-S13.

Mass Spectrometry Identification of Peptides

Stained protein bands of interest were selected and subjected to massspectrometry as described in “Mass spectrometry identification ofpeptides” of the materials and methods. The results identified eitherphenol-soluble modulin alpha 1 peptide or delta-hemolysin as the likelybinding target for antibody S4. This demonstrates that the methodsdisclosed herein can be used to perform novel antigen discovery (FIG. 31). Antibody characterized by this assay was S4.

These above results demonstrate that antibodies can be isolated fromactivated B cells, such as plasmablasts of subjects undergoing acuteconditions such as a bacterial infection using the compositions andmethods described herein. The results also demonstrate that thecompositions and methods disclosed herein can be used to isolate mAbstargeted against foreign antigens and to determine the identity ofantigens bound by selected antibodies.

Example 13: Blasting Cells and Plasmablast Characterization

Immunoglobulin sequences from B cells that are activated by an ongoingimmune response can be used to produce an evolutionary tree of anongoing immune response, as described above. This evolutionary tree istypically characterized by multiple clonal families representingactivated B cells from multiple lines of descent. Sequences from naive Bcells will not generally be able to be used to produce such anevolutionary tree, as they have not been activated and therefore providelittle to no information on the active, ongoing immune response.Activated B cells first become blasting cells, which are activated andare larger in size. These blasting cells then go on to become eithermemory B cells or plasma cells. In humans, although memory B cells andplasma cells result from an immune response, they join large pools ofmemory B cells and plasma cells that have resulted from responses toprevious immunological insults, making it difficult to distinguishmemory B cells and plasma cells against recent or previous immuneresponses. Therefore, in humans, blasting cells are a preferredcandidate for sequencing to obtain evolutionary trees of an ongoingimmune response. In research animals bred in controlled conditions(e.g., mice) however, blasting B cells, memory B cells, and plasma cellsare all candidates for sequencing to obtain evolutionary trees as theyare bred in a clean environment, making it possible for the majority ofmemory B cells and plasma cells after a rigorous immune response to beagainst the insult, especially after booster shots, as they should nothave large memory or plasma cell populations that have seen any majorimmunological challenge before.

Similarly for T cells, in humans, the preferred cells to sequence toobtain an evolutionary tree of an ongoing immune response will beblasting T cells. For mice, activated, blasting, and memory T cells areall preferred candidates to sequence to obtain an evolutionary tree.

Blasting B cells are known to be larger than typical B cells. The sizeof a small lymphocyte, of which a resting B cell is one, is typicallybetween 6-8 m in size. Blasting lymphocytes (T and B cells) aretypically between 8-14 m in size. (See FIG. 41 , also Tzur et al, PLoSONE, 6(1): e16053. doi:10.1371/journal.pone.0016053, 2011; Teague et al,Cytometry, 14:7 2005). Plasmablasts can have the following expressionpattern: CD19^(low/+), CD20^(low/−), CD27⁺ and CD38^(high). Although useof all of these markers results in the purest population for single cellsorting, not all of the above markers need to be used to isolateplasmablasts.

As exemplified in FIG. 39 , plasmablasts can be gated on by using anFSC^(hi) for larger cells, resulting in a 37% pure plasmablastpopulation. Gating on FSC^(hi)CD19^(hi) cells gives 72% plasmablastpurity. Gating on FSC^(hi) and CD27⁺, CD38^(hi), or CD20⁻ gives 44, 80,and 71 percent plasmablast purity, respectively. Combination of any ofthese markers or other markers found to be able to distinguishplasmablasts from other B cells can be used to increase the purity ofsorted plasmablasts, however any one of these markers alone candistinguish plasmablasts from other B cells, albeit with a lower purity.

Example 14: Alternative Platform for Sequencing and Analysis

Heavy chain reads from a single plate, plate 44, was prepared for PacBiosequencing run using the methods described in “Touchdown PCR” in thematerials and methods to amplify gamma heavy chain cDNA. 48 2nd PCRswere done to obtain sufficient DNA for PacBio run. Pooling and cleanupof DNA was done as described in “Preparing for PacBio sequencing run”.DNA was sent to PacBio for prep and sequencing. CCS reads were obtainedfrom PacBio and assigned to wells and assembled according to “Assignmentof sequences to wells” and “Assembly of sequences” in the materials andmethods. Results of the assignment is in FIG. 38 . This shows that ourmethods and compositions are not platform-specific for high-throughputsequencing.

Example 15: Sequencing and Analysis on 454 XL+ Runs

Sequencing can be adapted to 454 XL+ runs by following the methoddescribed in “Preparing for 454 XL+ sequencing run”. This needs to bedone as 454 XL+ runs currently only support Lib-L chemistry, while our454 XLR70 runs utilize the Lib-A chemistry. This can also generally beadapted to situations where Lib-L chemistry is preferred to the typicalLib-A chemistry for amplicon sequencing on XLR70 runs. Reads from 454XL+ runs can still be assigned to wells and assembled following themethods described in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and “Assembly ofsequences”. Reads from XLR70 and XL+ runs after 454 filtering can beused in identical fashion, i.e. downstream selection of antibodies forcloning and expression and assaying of antibody functional propertiescan still proceed as per FIGS. 6 and 9 .

Example 16: Cloning of Paired Immunoglobulin Genes

Assuming that each clonal family recognizes the same epitope, and thatsequence variance within each family is due to somatic hypermutation, wecan first clone and express the most frequent clone of each clonalfamily for screening of antibodies that bind the antigen of interest(FIG. 6 ). We use the most frequent clone because, during affinitymaturation and selection in the germinal center, centrocytes that bindantigen with the highest affinity out compete other centrocytes forsurvival factors. Therefore, we expect the highest frequency clone toalso have the highest binding affinity. Once a clone has been identifiedas an antibody capable of binding antigen, representative pairedimmunoglobulin sequences from the entire clonal family are then cloned,expressed, and screened for being neutralizing antibodies (FIG. 6 ).This process may involve cloning and expression of sequencesrepresenting multiple sub-clones within the clonal family, or encodingantibodies of different isotypes within the clonal family, to enabledirect testing and comparison of the binding and functional propertiesof specific clones representing the spectrum of antibodies containedwithin the clonal family. The specific clone exhibiting the desiredbinding and functional properties are then selected for furthercharacterization and consideration for development as a therapeutichuman antibody.

An alternative approach to selecting candidates for cloning from afamily (or any other set of antibodies of interest) is to build aphylogenetic tree for the antibodies (rooted at the germline sequence inthe case of a clonal family). Leaf nodes in such a tree correspond tothe antibody family members. Candidates for cloning are then selected bydescending from the top of the tree, always choosing the branch with thelargest number of leaf nodes underneath (choosing randomly in case of atie), then at the last node above the leaves choosing the leaf with thelargest number of mutations, or choosing randomly in the event of a tie.Additional candidates could then be selected, if desired, by repeatedlyselecting candidates until the desired number is achieved, as follows.For every node in the tree, if none of the leaves that are descendantsof the node have been selected, count the number of leaves that aredescendants. For the node with the largest such count (choosing randomlyin case of a tie), descend, always choosing the branch with the largestnumber of descendant leaf nodes (choosing randomly in case of a tiebetween branches). Then, at the last node above the leaves, choose theleaf with the largest number of mutations or choose randomly in case ofa tie.

Yet another approach to selecting candidates from a family of antibodies(or any other set of antibodies of interest) is to list the antibodiesby descending number of non-silent mutations relative to germline andselect from the list in order, thereby choosing the antibodies that aremost evolved.

Example 17: Permanent Transfection and Expression of Candidate HumanAntibodies

Desired clones are selectively amplified from a pooled plate ofsequences by using cloning primers specific to a given sample-ID; theseprimers also incorporate different 5′ and 3′ restriction sites into theclone. The restriction sites are then used for inserting the clone intovectors. Because the amplified clones may contain only a partialconstant region sequence, vectors already contain either the kappa,lambda or gamma constant regions with the appropriate restriction sitesneeded for inserting the amplified clones in the open reading frame.Multiple restriction sites are engineered into the vector, becauseclones have variable sequences, to avoid the potential problem of therestriction site existing also in the clone itself, which would thenalso be cut by the restriction enzyme. This allows as many clones to beinserted as possible. Vectors used are either two separate vectors withdifferent mammalian selectable markers (modified Invitrogen pcDNA3.3 orpOptivec vectors that contain constant-region gene with engineeredrestriction sites) or a dual-expression vector containing both the genes(Lonza GS system; pEE6.4 and pEE12.4). See Tables 16 and 17 respectivelyfor sequences of the constant region inserts. Selection markers areamplifiable, such as dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) in pOptivec orglutamine synthetase (GS) in Lonza GS system, to allow for geneamplification and efficient production of antibodies for furtherscreening purposes requiring large amounts of antibody (e.g. an in vivoscreen). Mammalian cells are either transfected using a doubletransfection, with a light chain in one and the heavy chain in the othervector (modified pOptivec and pcDNA3.3), or a dual-expression vector(Lonza GS system) containing both genes.

Modified Invitrogen Vectors. Vectors are two separate vectors withdifferent mammalian selectable markers and engineered restrictionsites). pcDNA3.3 has a Neomycin resistance gene as a selectable marker,and pOptivec has a DHFR-selectable marker. CHO DHFR-cells areco-transfected with modified pcDNA3.3 and pOptivec under selection fromGeneticin. Only DHFR-cells transfected with pOptivec, which contains acopy of DHFR, will survive, and the Neomycin resistance gene in pcDNA3.3confers resistance to Geneticin, This allows for selection of cells thatare successfully transfected with both vectors (containing the lightchain in one vector and heavy chain in the other vector), and thereforewill produce functional immunoglobulins.

Lonza GS System. Lonza GS system utilizes the vectors pEE12.4 andpEE6.4. Vector pEE12.4 contains the GS gene as the amplifiable selectionmarker, and pEE6.4 is a supplementary vector. The light chain will becloned into one of the vectors and the heavy chain into the othervector. Thereafter, both vectors are cut with restriction enzymes andligated together to form a single vector that can express both heavy andlight chain genes on separate promoters. Therefore, is a dual-expressionvector system, allowing for expression of both genes from a singlevector. CHO cells are transfected with the dual-expression vector underthe selection of methionine sulfoximine. Transfected cells are thusselected for.

Gene Amplification

Both dihydrofolate reductase (DHFR) and GS are amplifiable selectionmarkers. Under selection pressure from increasing amounts ofmethotrexate and methionine sulfoximine respective, transfected celllines that have duplicated genomic regions containing the DHFR and GSgenes will survive because they are more resistant to the selectionreagents. Genes near the selection markers, such as the inserted heavy-and light-chain immunoglobulin genes are also amplified, resulting inhigher gene copies and greater production rates of immunoglobulins.Clones producing antibodies that have been found to have neutralizingproperties in the in vitro screens (see below) are amplified so thatmore antibodies can be obtained for subsequent in vivo studies.

Example 18: Identifying the Specificity of the Expressed HumanAntibodies

Antibody screening occurs in two stages. We are utilizing a novel‘selective screening’ process, in which we first select appropriateclonal families to be used in the screen for neutralizing antibodies. Wescreen the most frequent 1-3 clones of each clonal family for itsability to bind to the antigen. Our screen typically takes the format ofan indirect ELISA, although flow cytometry may be used to identifycell-binding antibodies. This comprises first binding the appropriateantigen to an ELISA plate, then incubating it with supernatantscontaining the expressed antibodies. Antibodies that bind to the antigenare detected by a specific secondary antibody.

Once binding antibodies have been identified, the entire clonal familyof that clone is cloned and expressed in the screening stage of the‘selection screen’. Although all antibodies in a clonal family areexpected to bind to the same epitope, they may differ slightly inavidity of antigen binding and in their positioning over the antigen,differences that may affect the binding properties and/or neutralizationability of the antibodies; thus, in most cases, several differentantibodies (possessing minor differences in their CDR3 regions) areexpressed and screened for binding and neutralizing properties.

For neutralizing antibodies that target a specific ligand/receptor pair,293T cells are first stably transfected with a signaling pathwayreporter construct, such as a plasmid containing the luciferase genelinked to NF-kB transcription response elements. Activation of NF-kB inthe transfected cell induces the expression of luciferase, whose levelscan be determined in a luciferase assay. This measures NF-kB signalingactivated by ligand-receptor binding. NF-kB is the signaling element ofchoice because most signaling events activate NF-kB. For assaying othersignaling pathways, the luciferase gene promoter region contains theappropriate transcriptional binding site, such as that for AP-1, forexample. Next, the 293T cells are transfected with the target receptor.293T cells are then incubated with the ligand and binding antibodies ofinterest in 96-well plates. After 24 or 48 hours, a luciferase assay isdone to determine expression of luciferase gene. Wells with neutralizingantibodies have minimal to no luciferase expression. Results areverified by Western blotting for phosphorylated signaling proteins inthe NF-kB signaling pathway. A neutralizing antibody preventsligand-receptor signaling; and consequently abrogates phosphorylation ofsignaling proteins.

For antigens present on live cells, such as cancer antigens andbacterial antigens, the in vitro neutralization assay takes the form ofan assay that detects live/dead cells, and can be done in ahigh-throughput format. Cancer cells or bacteria are incubated in96-well plates with a candidate antibody. A stain that distinguisheslive from dead cells and is compatible with flow cytometry can then beapplied to each well. Live and dead cells are stained with differentfluorophores and screened using flow to give percentages of live anddead cells. Antibodies that pass the in vitro screen will then bescreened in vivo for their neutralizing activity.

Virus in vitro neutralization assay may be conducted using a standardplaque neutralization assay. By doing plaque neutralization assays in96-well plates, each well can be imaged using a microscope and plaquecounting can be automated with image-analysis software. Neutralizingantibodies reduce plaque formation. These antibodies are then furtherscreened in vivo for neutralizing activity.

See example 9 section “Fluzone ELISA”, example 11 section “Flowcytometry . . . ” and example 12 section “Staph Flow Cytometry” forsuccessful assays of binding activity using ELISA (example 7) and flowcytometry (examples 9 and 10). See example 9 section “Influenzamicroneutralization assay” for a successful assay of antibodies withneutralizing activity.

Example 19: Sequencing of B Cells with More than One Cell Per Well

Individual samples having multiple B cells are separately reversetranscribed in containers. Reverse transcription adds a sample-ID and a5′ universal primer region to all 1⁴ strand cDNA. cDNA from allcontainers of a set of containers are pooled and undergo 2 rounds ofPCR. Steps are as described in “Touchdown PCR and non-touchdown PCR”,“Preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing run” in the materials and methods.Sequences for primers are also shown in FIG. 9 . Note that regardless ofwhich gene is amplified, the forward primers remain constant (b). AfterRT and 2 PCRs, amplicons from all container sets are pooled and454-sequenced. Assignment to wells and assembly of sequences follow theprotocol as described in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and“assembly of sequences” in the materials and methods. The combination ofplate-IDs and sample-IDs allows for identification of sequences thatoriginate from the same sample.

Even though there are multiple cells in a well, we can pair individualheavy chains with light chains. The heavy chains from B cells derivedfrom a common progenitor will be clonally related, as will the lightchains. Therefore, we can associate a heavy chain clonal family to alight chain clonal family by observing the correlation across wells.Once an association is established between the heavy chains of a clonalfamily and the light chains of a clonal family, pairs are assigned ineach well by selecting the heavy chain that is a member of the heavychain clonal family and a light chain that is a member of the lightchain clonal family. The selection of the pair is unambiguous when onlya single instance of the heavy chain family and a single instance of thelight chain family is present in a well. After determining which heavyand light chains are associated with one another, evolutionary trees maybe drawn and antibodies selected for downstream characterization oftheir functional properties.

Example 20: Sequencing of B Cells with One or More Cells Per Well

Samples could be sorted with one B cell per well in some plates, andmultiple B cells per well in other plates, yet heavy and light chainscould still be paired for those wells having more than one B cell. Weexamined the sequences generated from the flu vaccination patient ofexample 9 above, where some wells had more than one distinct heavy chainsequence assembly or more than one distinct light chain sequenceassembly observed. RT, PCR, sequencing and assignment to wells andassembly of sequences followed the protocol in example 9 above. Fordetermining which heavy and light chains were associated with eachother, heavy chains were assigned to clonal families by grouping allheavy chains with the same V and J gene usage, and the same number ofnucleotides between the end of the V gene segment and the beginning ofthe J gene segment. Light chains were assigned to clonal families bygrouping all light chains with the same V and J gene usage, and the samenumber of nucleotides between the end of the V gene segment and thebeginning of the J gene segment. Pairing relationships between heavy andlight chains were first assigned for wells with exactly one heavy chainand one light chain, based on them sharing a well (i.e. having the samecompound barcodes). Then, a score was computed for each possible pairingof a heavy chain clonal family with a light chain clonal family. Thescore was determined by counting the number of times a member of theheavy chain family and the light chain family share a well. Then, eachheavy chain family was associated with the light chain family with whichthe highest score was achieved, or the heavy chain family was notassociated to a light chain family if the highest score was achievedwith more than one light chain family. Individual heavy and light chainswere then paired by starting with the overall highest-scoring heavychain family, and proceeding well by well through the family assigningpairs, then continuing on with the next heavy chain family. For a givenheavy chain family, for each well, if there was a single heavy chainwithin the well that was a member of the heavy chain family, then thelight chain from that well which belonged to the heavy chain family'sassociated light chain family was assigned to be the heavy chain's pair.If more than one such light chain existed, no pairing was assigned. Thisprocess of associating heavy chains with light chains was continueduntil all families and all chains within those families had beenconsidered. If, for a given heavy or light chain, the process resultedin more than one candidate for pairing, both heavy and light chain werediscarded. Evolutionary trees were generated from the paired chains, andantibodies selected for downstream characterization of their functionalproperties. A portion of the evolutionary tree is shown in FIG. 25A.

Example 21: Use of Sorted Plasmablasts to Generate Human MonoclonalAntibodies

From a subject with a recent or current condition resulting in acute,subacute, or ongoing generation of circulating plasmablast, flowcytometry is performed on peripheral blood (either whole blood orperipheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs)) to identify the plasmablastpopulation. This population of B cells is then sorted by flow cytometryas single cells into wells containing a hypotonic buffer with an RNAseinhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen at this time or used immediatelyfor RT-PCR to create cDNA. During RT, well-specific sample-ID adaptoroligonucleotides are added to the reaction. These adaptors havewell-specific barcode sequences (sample-IDs) that can identify sequencesas originating from different wells. Utilizing the 3′ tailing andtemplate-switching activity of MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptases,sample-IDs are added to the 3′ end of the 1^(st) strand cDNA. cDNA fromeach plate are pooled together. During the first round of PCR, aplate-specific FW long primer1 adds the plate-ID to the 5′ end of theamplicons. Thus, FW long primer1 with different plate-IDs are added todifferent plates giving each PCR product an identifying barcodesequence. Gene specific reverse primers are used to amplify the kappa,lambda and gamma chains, they are kappa GSP1, lambda GSP1 and gamma GSP1respectively. These primers bind to the constant region of theimmunoglobulin genes. Products from the first round of PCR are dilutedand used for a second nested PCR. FW primer2 is used as the forwardprimer and reverse primers kappa, lambda, and gamma GSP long primers areused to amplify their respective amplicons. Notably, the GPS longprimer2 for each plate adds a common plate ID to the 3′ end of eachamplicon for each plate, thus each will end up having two plate-IDs anda sample-ID barcode. Further details for RT, 1st and 2nd PCR are foundin “non-touchdown PCR” in the materials and methods. Multiple plates arethen pooled according to the method detailed in “preparing for 454 XLR70sequencing run” and subjected to high-throughput 454 DNA sequencing andindividual sequences identified with their barcodes serving asidentifiers of which heavy and/or light chain is obtained from each wellthus providing a guide for matching individual variable heavy and lightchains derived from the same initial cell, according to the methodsdetailed in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and “Assembly ofsequences” in the materials and methods. Evolutionary trees are thendrawn and antibodies selected for cloning, expression and determinationof functional activity (see FIGS. 6-8 ).

Candidate heavy and light chain genes from particular cells of originare then cloned and expressed for screening of desired properties as inexample 8. Once stably or transiently transfected, the expression of thepaired heavy and light chains will result in generation of monoclonalantibodies recapitulating the specificity of the initially sorted cell.Supernatants containing secreted antibodies are then screened fordesired properties including but not limited to antigen specificityagainst the target antigen of interest as well as functionality byappropriate functional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example ofa general methodology for carrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27demonstrate how this was done using the compositions and methods hereinto obtain human monoclonal antibodies against hemagglutinin from singlecell sorted plasmablasts from an influenza-vaccinated human.

Example 22: Use of Sorted Unbiased or Antigen-Specific Memory B Cells toGenerate Human Monoclonal Antibodies

From a subject with a documented or suspected exposure to an antigen ofinterest, FACS is performed on peripheral blood (either whole blood orisolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells, PBMCs) to identify thememory B cell population (defined as CD19⁺CD20⁺CD27⁺). Additionally,memory B cells specific against antigens of interest may also be sortedby staining peripheral blood or PBMCs with memory B cell surface markersand with fluorophore-conjugated antigen(s) (CD19⁺CD20⁺CD27⁺ antigen⁺).This population of cells is then sorted by FACS either as single cellsor multiple cells into wells. The process described in detail in Example21 is repeated to barcode and obtain sequences from 454 sequencing andassign sequences to wells and assemble sequences. HighV-QUEST is used toidentify VDJ gene usage, and a few members of each clonal family on anevolutionary tree selected for cloning and expression as in example 8.Cloning and expression is done as detailed in example 8. Oncetransfected, the expression of the entire paired heavy and light chainswill result in generation of monoclonal antibodies recapitulating thespecificity of the initially sorted cell. Supernatants containingantibodies will be screened for antigen specificity against the targetantigen(s) of interest as well as functionality by appropriatefunctional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example of a generalmethodology for carrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provide anotherexample of obtaining human monoclonal antibodies from functionalcharacterization of selected cloned and expressed antibodies fromevolutionary trees.

Example 23: Use of Sorted Unbiased or Antigen-Specific Total B Cells toGenerate Human Monoclonal Antibodies

From a subject with or without documented or suspected prior exposure anantigen of interest, FACS is performed on peripheral blood (either wholeblood or isolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells, PBMCs) to identifythe CD19⁺ B cell population. This population of cells is then sorted byFACS either as single cells or multiple cells into wells. The processdescribed in detail in Example 21 is repeated. The process described indetail in Example 21 is repeated to barcode and obtain sequences from454 sequencing and assign sequences to wells and assemble sequences.HighV-QUEST is used to identify VDJ gene usage, and a few members ofeach clonal family on an evolutionary tree selected for cloning andexpression as in example 8. Once transfected, the expression of pairedheavy and light chains will result in generation of monoclonalantibodies recapitulating the specificity of the initially sorted cell.Supernatants containing expressed antibodies will be screened forantigen specificity against the target antigen of interest as well asfunctionality by appropriate functional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 eachprovide one example of a general methodology for carrying out thismethod. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example of obtaining humanmonoclonal antibodies from functional characterization of selectedcloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 24: Use of Plasma Cells to Generate Human Monoclonal Antibodies

From a subject with or without documented or suspected prior exposure anantigen of interest, FACS is performed on peripheral blood (either wholeblood or isolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells, PBMCs) or bonemarrow cells to identify the CD138⁺ plasma cell population. Thispopulation of cells is then sorted by FACS either as single cells ormultiple cells into wells. The process described in detail in Example 21is repeated to barcode and obtain sequences from 454 sequencing andassign sequences to wells and assemble sequences. HighV-QUEST is used toidentify VDJ gene usage, and a few members of each clonal family on anevolutionary tree selected for cloning and expression. Once transfected,the expression of paired heavy and light chains will result ingeneration of monoclonal antibodies recapitulating the specificity ofthe initially sorted cell. Supernatants containing expressed antibodieswill be screened for antigen specificity against the target antigen ofinterest as well as functionality by appropriate functional assays.FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example of a general methodology forcarrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example ofobtaining human monoclonal antibodies from functional characterizationof selected cloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 25: Use of Blasting B Cells to Generate Human MonoclonalAntibodies

From a subject with or without documented or suspected prior exposure anantigen of interest, FACS is performed on peripheral blood (either wholeblood or isolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells, PBMCs) to identifythe FSC^(hi) blasting B cell population. Blasting cells are activated Bcells, and therefore are cells that have responded against the antigenand are actively proliferating. These B cells consist of clonal familiesand their paired heavy and light chains can be used to obtainevolutionary trees. Other markers of B cell activation, such asCD69^(hi) and CD44^(hi) may also be used in conjunction. AdditionallyDNA content, which may be stained using cell permeable DNA stains suchas SYTO Blue (Invitrogen), to determine cells that are activated,proliferating and in the cell cycle may also be used in conjunction todelineate blasting B cells. This population of cells is then sorted byFACS either as single cells or multiple cells into wells. The processdescribed in detail in Example 21 is repeated to barcode and obtainsequences from 454 sequencing and assign sequences to wells and assemblesequences. HighV-QUEST is used to identify VDJ gene usage, and a fewmembers of each clonal family on an evolutionary tree selected forcloning and expression. Once transfected, the expression of paired heavyand light chains will result in generation of monoclonal antibodiesrecapitulating the specificity of the initially sorted cell.Supernatants containing expressed antibodies will be screened forantigen specificity against the target antigen of interest as well asfunctionality by appropriate functional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 eachprovide one example of a general methodology for carrying out thismethod. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example of obtaining humanmonoclonal antibodies from functional characterization of selectedcloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 26: Use of Murine B Cells to Generate Monoclonal Antibodies

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine B cells. Murine B cells may be obtained from blood, fromsplenocytes or from the bone marrow. Flow cytometry is performed toobtain CD19⁺ or B220⁺ B cells. This population of B cells is then sortedby flow cytometry as single cells into wells containing a hypotonicbuffer with an RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen at this timeor used immediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2nd PCR isperformed as detailed in “non-touchdown PCR” in the materials andmethods. Mouse gene-specific primers are found in Table 11 and otherprimers used for RT and PCR are found in Table 1. Multiple plates arethen pooled according to the method detailed in “preparing for 454 XLR70sequencing run” and subjected to high-throughput 454 DNA sequencing andindividual sequences identified with their barcodes serving asidentifiers of which heavy and/or light chain is obtained from each wellthus providing a guide for matching individual variable heavy and lightchains derived from the same initial cell, according to the methodsdetailed in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and “assembly ofsequences” in the materials and methods. Evolutionary trees are thendrawn and antibodies selected for cloning, expression and determinationof functional activity.

Sequences for cloning can either be obtained through synthetic genesynthesis or amplified from the 1^(st) PCR products using cloningprimers. The forward cloning primer is sample-ID specific and canamplify specific sequences from a pool of amplicons. The sequence foreach heavy and light chain is then cloned into an expression vectorcontaining complementary restriction sites for those introduced by thecloning primers. Vectors also contain the either the heavy or lightchain constant region, which the heavy or light chain sequences arecloned into (reading frame aligned) to produce the entire antibody.Vectors contain either heavy or light chain clones are then dualtransfected into a mammalian expression system or alternately, bothamplicons can be cloned into a dual expression vector to allow for asingle transfection into mammalian cells.

Candidate heavy and light chain genes from particular cells of originare then expressed using the for screening of desired properties asabove. Once stably or transiently transfected, the expression of thepaired heavy and light chains will result in generation of monoclonalantibodies recapitulating the specificity of the initially sorted cell.Supernatants containing secreted antibodies are then screened fordesired properties including but not limited to antigen specificityagainst the target antigen of interest as well as functionality byappropriate functional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example ofa general methodology for carrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provideanother example of obtaining monoclonal antibodies from functionalcharacterization of selected cloned and expressed antibodies fromevolutionary trees.

Example 27: Use of Murine Plasma Cells to Generate Monoclonal Antibodies

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine B cells. Murine plasma cells may be obtained from blood, fromsplenocytes or from the bone marrow, although the splenocytes and bonemarrow are typically used. Flow cytometry is performed to obtainCD19^(low/−)B220^(low/−) CD138⁺ plasma cells. This population of plasmacells is then sorted by flow cytometry as single cells into wellscontaining a hypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells canbe frozen at this time or used immediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA.RT, 1st and 2nd PCR is performed as detailed in “non-touchdown PCR” inthe materials and methods. Mouse gene-specific primers are found inTable 11, and other primers used for RT and PCR are found in Table 1.Multiple plates are then pooled according to the method detailed in“preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing run” and subjected tohigh-throughput 454 DNA sequencing and individual sequences identifiedwith their barcodes serving as identifiers of which heavy and/or lightchain is obtained from each well thus providing a guide for matchingindividual variable heavy and light chains derived from the same initialcell, according to the methods detailed in “Assignment of sequences towells” and “assembly of sequences” in the materials and methods.Evolutionary trees are then drawn and antibodies selected for cloning,expression and determination of functional activity.

Sequences for cloning can either be obtained through synthetic genesynthesis or amplified from the 1 PCR products using cloning primers asdescribed in example 26. Candidate heavy and light chain genes fromparticular cells of origin are then expressed using the for screening ofdesired properties as above. Once stably or transiently transfected, theexpression of the paired heavy and light chains will result ingeneration of monoclonal antibodies recapitulating the specificity ofthe initially sorted cell. Supernatants containing secreted antibodiesare then screened for desired properties including but not limited toantigen specificity against the target antigen of interest as well asfunctionality by appropriate functional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 eachprovide one example of a general methodology for carrying out thismethod. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example of obtaining monoclonalantibodies from functional characterization of selected cloned andexpressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 28: Use of Unbiased or Antigen-Specific Murine Memory B Cells toGenerate Monoclonal Antibodies

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine B cells. Murine memory B cells may typically be obtained fromsplenocytes or lymph nodes. Flow cytometry is performed to obtain CD19⁺or B220⁺ and CD38⁺IgG⁺ memory B cells. Other markers, such as CD45RO,may also be used. Antigen-specific memory B cells may also be visualizedby staining with fluorophore-conjugated antigen and sorted for. Thispopulation of memory B cells is then sorted by flow cytometry as singlecells into wells containing a hypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor.Sorted cells can be frozen at this time or used immediately for RT-PCRto create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2nd PCR, followed by sequencing, assignmentof sequences to wells and sequence assembly is performed as in example26. Evolutionary trees are then drawn and antibodies selected forcloning, expression and determination of functional activity.

Sequences for cloning can either be obtained through synthetic genesynthesis or amplified from the 1^(st) PCR products using cloningprimers as described in example 26. Candidate heavy and light chaingenes from particular cells of origin are then expressed using the forscreening of desired properties as above. Once stably or transientlytransfected, the expression of the paired heavy and light chains willresult in generation of monoclonal antibodies recapitulating thespecificity of the initially sorted cell. Supernatants containingsecreted antibodies are then screened for desired properties includingbut not limited to antigen specificity against the target antigen ofinterest as well as functionality by appropriate functional assays.FIGS. 3 and 9 each provide one example of a general methodology forcarrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example ofobtaining monoclonal antibodies from functional characterization ofselected cloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 29: Use of Murine Short-Lived Plasmablasts to GenerateMonoclonal Antibodies

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine B cells. Murine short-lived plasmablasts may typically beobtained from splenocytes. These plasmablasts have been variouslydescribed as CD19^(low/−)B220^(low/−) and CD22^(low) or CD11⁺c, and alsoas CD138⁺. Flow cytometry is performed to obtain plasmablasts. Thispopulation of plasmablasts is then sorted by flow cytometry as singlecells into wells containing a hypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor.Sorted cells can be frozen at this time or used immediately for RT-PCRto create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2nd PCR, followed by sequencing, assignmentof sequences to wells and sequence assembly is performed as in example26. Evolutionary trees are then drawn and antibodies selected forcloning, expression and determination of functional activity.

Sequences for cloning can either be obtained through synthetic genesynthesis or amplified from the 1^(st) PCR products using cloningprimers as described in example 26. Candidate heavy and light chaingenes from particular cells of origin are then expressed using them forscreening of desired properties as above. Once stably or transientlytransfected, the expression of the paired heavy and light chains willresult in generation of monoclonal antibodies recapitulating thespecificity of the initially sorted cell. Supernatants containingsecreted antibodies are then screened for desired properties includingbut not limited to antigen specificity against the target antigen ofinterest as well as functionality by appropriate functional assays.FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example of a general methodology forcarrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example ofobtaining monoclonal antibodies from functional characterization ofselected cloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 30: Use of Murine Blasting B Cells to Generate MonoclonalAntibodies

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine B cells. Murine blasting B cells may typically be obtained fromsplenocytes. Blasting cells are activated B cells, and therefore arecells that have responded against the antigen and are activelyproliferating. These B cells consist of clonal families and their pairedheavy and light chains can be used to obtain evolutionary trees.Blasting B cells may be gated as FSC^(hi), and may also be furtheridentified via cell surface markers such as CD44^(hi) CD69^(hi) and asblasting B cells are proliferating, they may also be identified ashaving entered the cell cycle by having increased DNA content as stainedby cell permeably DNA stains such as SYTO Blue. Flow cytometry isperformed to obtain blasting B cells. This population of plasmablasts isthen sorted by flow cytometry as single cells into wells containing ahypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen atthis time or used immediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2ndPCR, followed by sequencing, assignment of sequences to wells andsequence assembly is performed as in example 26. Evolutionary trees arethen drawn and antibodies selected for cloning, expression anddetermination of functional activity.

Sequences for cloning can either be obtained through synthetic genesynthesis or amplified from the 1^(st) PCR products using cloningprimers as described in example 26. Candidate heavy and light chaingenes from particular cells of origin are then expressed using the forscreening of desired properties as above. Once stably or transientlytransfected, the expression of the paired heavy and light chains willresult in generation of monoclonal antibodies recapitulating thespecificity of the initially sorted cell. Supernatants containingsecreted antibodies are then screened for desired properties includingbut not limited to antigen specificity against the target antigen ofinterest as well as functionality by appropriate functional assays.FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example of a general methodology forcarrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example ofobtaining monoclonal antibodies from functional characterization ofselected cloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees

Example 31: Obtaining Monoclonal Antibodies from Unbiased orAntigen-Specific Human IgA⁺ B Cells

From a subject with or without documented or suspected prior exposure anantigen of interest, FACS is performed on peripheral blood (either wholeblood or isolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells, PBMCs) or on bonemarrow to isolate IgA+ B cells. These B cells may be memory B cells,plasma cells, or plasmablasts. These IgA+ B cells may also beantigen-specific, by sorting for antigen-positive B cells using afluorophore-conjugated antigen to stain for the IgA+ B cells. Thispopulation of cells is then sorted by FACS either as single cells ormultiple cells into wells. The process described in detail in Example 21is repeated to barcode and obtain sequences from 454 sequencing andassign sequences to wells and assemble sequences, and IgA constantregion specific primers used for PCR are in Table 10. HighV-QUEST isused to identify VDJ gene usage, and a few members of each clonal familyon an evolutionary tree selected for cloning and expression as inexample 8. Supernatants containing expressed antibodies will be screenedfor antigen specificity against the target antigen of interest as wellas functionality by appropriate functional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 eachprovide one example of a general methodology for carrying out thismethod. FIGS. 26-27 provide another example of obtaining humanmonoclonal antibodies from functional characterization of selectedcloned and expressed antibodies from evolutionary trees.

Example 32: Obtaining Monoclonal Antibodies from Unbiased orAntigen-Specific Human IgM+ B Cells

From a subject with or without documented or suspected prior exposure anantigen of interest, FACS is performed on peripheral blood (either wholeblood or isolate peripheral blood mononuclear cells, PBMCs) to isolateIgM+ B cells. These B cells may be memory B cells, plasma cells, orblasting B cells. These IgM⁺ B cells may also be antigen-specific, bysorting for antigen-positive B cells using a fluorophore-conjugatedantigen to stain for the IgM+ B cells. This population of cells is thensorted by FACS either as single cells or multiple cells into wells. Theprocess described in detail in example 21 is repeated to barcode andobtain sequences from 454 sequencing and assign sequences to wells andassemble sequences, and IgM constant region specific primers used forPCR are in Table 10. HighV-QUEST is used to identify VDJ gene usage, anda few members of each clonal family on an evolutionary tree selected forcloning and expression as in example 8. Supernatants containingexpressed antibodies will be screened for antigen specificity againstthe target antigen of interest as well as functionality by appropriatefunctional assays. FIGS. 9 and 6 each provide one example of a generalmethodology for carrying out this method. FIGS. 26-27 provide anotherexample of obtaining human monoclonal antibodies from functionalcharacterization of selected cloned and expressed antibodies fromevolutionary trees.

Example 33: Obtaining Monoclonal Antibodies from Unbiased orAntigen-Specific Murine IgA+ B Cells

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine IgA⁺ B cells. These B cells may be memory B cells, plasma cells,plasmablasts or blasting B cells, and can typically be obtained fromsplenocytes. These IgA⁺ B cells may also be antigen-specific, by sortingfor antigen-positive B cells using a fluorophore-conjugated antigen tostain for the IgA⁺ B cells. This population of IgA⁺ B cells is thensorted by flow cytometry as single cells into wells containing ahypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen atthis time or used immediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2ndPCR, followed by sequencing, assignment of sequences to wells andsequence assembly is performed as in example 26, and IgA constant regionspecific primers used for PCR are in Table 11. Evolutionary trees arethen drawn and antibodies selected for cloning, expression anddetermination of functional activity. FIGS. 9 and 6 provides one exampleof a general methodology for carrying out this method.

Example 34: Obtaining Monoclonal Antibodies from Unbiased orAntigen-Specific Murine IgM+ B Cells

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine IgM⁺ B cells. These B cells may be memory B cells, plasma cells,plasmablasts or blasting B cells, and can typically be obtained fromsplenocytes. These IgM⁺ B cells may also be antigen-specific, by sortingfor antigen-positive B cells using a fluorophore-conjugated antigen tostain for the IgM+ B cells. This population of IgM⁺ B cells is thensorted by flow cytometry as single cells into wells containing ahypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen atthis time or used immediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2ndPCR, followed by sequencing, assignment of sequences to wells andsequence assembly is performed as in example 26, and IgA constant regionspecific primers used for PCR are in Table 11. Evolutionary trees arethen drawn and antibodies selected for cloning, expression anddetermination of functional activity. FIGS. 9 and 6 provides one exampleof a general methodology for carrying out this method.

Example 35: Sequencing of More than One Sequence from Human T Cells

From a subject with a recent or current condition resulting in acute,subacute, or ongoing generation of circulating T cells, flow cytometryis performed on peripheral blood (either whole blood or peripheral bloodmononuclear cells (PBMCs)) to identify the T cell population ofinterest. This population of T cells may be activated T cells orblasting T cells. Activated T cells may be identified using CD44^(hi),CD69^(hi), CD154⁺, CD137⁺, or blasting T cells, which are also activatedT cells may be delineated by their size or FSC^(hi), and may also beidentified as being in the cell cycle using a cell permeant DNA dye suchas SYTO Blue. Activated T cells should consist of clonal families whichthen can be clustered into an evolutionary tree, with identical familymembers in clonal families, which can be used to select clones fordownstream functional analysis. T cells are then sorted by flowcytometry as single cells into wells containing a hypotonic buffer withan RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen at this time or usedimmediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA. RT and PCR to barcode the TCRgenes are detailed in “Non-touchdown PCR” in the materials and methods,sequencing prep is detailed in “Preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing run”in the materials and methods, and assignment of sequences to wells andassembly of reads are detailed in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and“assembly of sequences” in the materials and methods, TCR gene-specificprimers are found in Table 10. Evolutionary trees are then constructedand candidate genes from particular cells of origin are then chosen tobe cloned and expressed for screening of desired properties. Sequencesfor cloning can either be gene-synthesized or amplified from the 1^(st)PCR products with cloning primers. Specific clones can be isolated froma pool of clones by having the forward cloning primer specific for thesample-ID barcode sequence. Reverse cloning primers are complementaryfor the appropriate gene. Both forward and reverse primers containflanking restriction sites to integrate the clone (coding frame aligned)into a vector. Cells are either doubly transfected with two expressionvectors, each containing either a gene of interest, or singlytransfected with a dual expression vector that expresses both genes ofinterest, e.g., T cell alpha and beta chains.

Once stably or transiently transfected, the genes of interest can beexpressed and screened for function properties using the desiredscreens.

Example 36: Sequencing of More than One Sequence from Murine T Cells

A mouse is challenged with an antigen of interest, and may be givenbooster shots several times before sacrificing the mouse to obtainmurine T cells. T cells are CD3⁺, and helper T cells are CD4⁺ andcytotoxic T cells are CD8⁺. This population of T cells may be memory oractivated T cells or blasting T cells. Memory T cells may be identifiedas CD45RO⁺. Activated T cells may be identified using CD44^(hi),CD69^(hi), or blasting T cells, which are also activated T cells may bedelineated by their size or FSC^(hi), and may also be identified asbeing in the cell cycle using a cell permeant DNA dye such as SYTO Blue.All these T cells in a mouse kept in a clean environment after repeatedantigen exposure should have a large fraction of clonal families whichcan then be displayed as an evolutionary tree, which can then be used toselect TCRs for cloning and expression and downstream functionalanalysis.

T cells are sorted by flow cytometry using the suggested markers above.as single cells into wells containing a hypotonic buffer with an RNAseinhibitor. Sorted cells can be frozen at this time or used immediatelyfor RT-PCR to create cDNA. RT and PCR to barcode the TCR genes aredetailed in “Non-touchdown PCR” in the materials and methods, sequencingprep is detailed in “Preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing run” in thematerials and methods, and assignment of sequences to wells and assemblyof reads are detailed in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and“assembly of sequences” in the materials and methods, TCR gene-specificprimers are found in Table 11. Evolutionary trees are then constructedand candidate genes from particular cells of origin are then chosen tobe cloned and expressed for screening of desired properties. Sequencesfor cloning can either be gene-synthesized or amplified from the 1^(st)PCR products with cloning primers. Specific clones can be isolated froma pool of clones by having the forward cloning primer specific for thesample-ID barcode sequence. Reverse cloning primers are complementaryfor the appropriate gene. Both forward and reverse primers containflanking restriction sites to integrate the clone (coding frame aligned)into a vector. Cells are either doubly transfected with two expressionvectors, each containing either a gene of interest, or singlytransfected with a dual expression vector that expresses both genes ofinterest, e.g., T cell alpha and beta chains.

Once stably or transiently transfected, the genes of interest can beexpressed and screened for function properties using the desiredscreens.

Example 37: Sequencing of More than One Sequence from a Sample

A single sample comprising nucleic acids of interest is identified. Thesingle sample can have a single cell or a population of cells. Thesample can be sorted by flow cytometry as single cells into wellscontaining a hypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor. Sorted cells canbe frozen at this time or used immediately for RT-PCR to create cDNA.This population of B cells is then sorted by flow cytometry as singlecells into wells containing a hypotonic buffer with an RNAse inhibitor.Sorted cells can be frozen at this time or used immediately for RT-PCRto create cDNA. RT, 1st and 2nd PCR is performed as detailed in“non-touchdown PCR” in the materials and methods. Multiple plates arethen pooled according to the method detailed in “preparing for 454 XLR70sequencing run” and subjected to high-throughput 454 DNA sequencing andindividual sequences identified with their barcodes serving asidentifiers of which heavy and/or light chain is obtained from each wellthus providing a guide for matching individual variable heavy and lightchains derived from the same initial cell, according to the methodsdetailed in “Assignment of sequences to wells” and “assembly ofsequences” in the materials and methods. Evolutionary trees are thendrawn and antibodies selected for cloning, expression and determinationof functional activity.

Candidate genes from particular cells of origin are then chosen to becloned and expressed for screening of desired properties or other needs.Sequences for cloning can either be gene-synthesized or amplified fromthe 1^(st) PCR products with cloning primers. Specific clones can beisolated from a pool of clones by having the forward cloning primerspecific for the sample-ID barcode sequence. Reverse cloning primers arecomplementary for the appropriate gene. Both forward and reverse primerscontain flanking restriction sites to integrate the clone (coding framealigned) into a vector. Cells are either transfected with two or moreexpression vectors, each containing either a gene of interest, or singlytransfected with an expression vector that expresses the genes ofinterest.

Once stably or transiently transfected, the genes of interest can beexpressed and screened where desired. FIGS. 9 and 6 provides one exampleof a general methodology for carrying out this method.

Example 38: Cloning of Immunoglobulin V(D)J Regions by DNA Synthesis

The desired immunoglobulin light chain and heavy chain V(D)J regions canbe synthetically generated by DNA synthesis for cloning into expressionvectors. The sequence used for the synthesis can be derived directlyfrom the high-throughput 454 sequences, or alternatively cDNA encodingthe heavy and light chain immunoglobulins from the sample(s) of interestcan be re-sequenced from the individual sample or pooled samples forfurther verification of the sequence, and this sequence is used tosynthesize the selected light chain and heavy chain V(D)J regions.Variable regions of Ig genes may be cloned by DNA synthesis, andincorporating the synthesized DNA into the vector containing theappropriate constant region using restriction enzymes and standardmolecular biology. During synthesis, the exact nucleotide sequence neednot be followed as long as long as the amino acid sequence is unchanged,unless mutagenesis is desired. This allows for codon optimization thatmay result in higher expression levels. This also allows for adding inrestriction sites for the purpose of cloning. Non-translated sequencessuch as 5′ UTR and barcode sequences need not be synthesized, leadersequences can also be swapped for other signal peptide sequences knownfor higher expression levels. These result in an Ig nucleotide sequencethat can be very different from the high-throughput reads but giveidentical amino acid sequenced when expressed.

In one embodiment, the amplified V(D)J regions are inserted into vectorsthat already contain either the kappa, lambda, gamma or other heavychain isotype constant regions with the appropriate restriction sitesneeded for inserting the amplified clones in the open reading frame. Inanother embodiment, the entire variable region may be gene synthesizedwith constant region and cloned into an expression vector for expressionand downstream functional testing of antibody properties.

Example 39: Cloning of Immunoglobulin V(D)J Regions by Using RestrictionSite Already Present in Sample Identification Adaptor

In another aspect, the desired immunoglobulin light chain and heavychain V(D)J regions can be cloned using restriction site alreadyincorporated in the sample-ID adaptor added on during reversetranscription. This results in an adaptor with a restriction site 3′ ofthe well-ID barcode in the PCR amplicon pool. During cloning withcloning primers, desired amplicons are amplified from a plate-specificamplicon pool using 5′ primers that are complementary to the well-IDbarcode sequences, and chain specific 3′ primers (for the kappa, lambdaand gamma chains). 3′ primers will add on 3′ restriction sites. 5′primers do not need to add restriction sites as the 5′ primer alreadycontains a restriction site 3′ of the well-ID barcode. Following thisamplification, restriction enzymes are used to cut the amplicon forligation into the vector containing the constant region insert. Duringthe restriction enzyme digest, sequences added on to the 5′ end of theIg gene sequences, such as barcodes and universal sequences are cut asthey are 5′ of the 5′ restriction site.

Example 40: Identification of Clonal Families by Sequencing of Just OneImmunoglobulin Chain (Heavy Chain or Light Chain), Followed by Cloningof Paired Immunoglobulin Heavy and Light Chain V(D)J Regions

Antibody heavy and light chains are reversed transcribed from mRNA,incorporating distinct sample-IDs on the cDNAs generated from eachsample, and sample cDNAs pooled for amplifying PCR. The immunoglobulincDNAs are amplified and either the immunoglobulin heavy chain or thelight chain is sequenced using 454 high-throughput sequencing, and thesequences grouped according to their use of immunoglobulin heavy chainV(D)J or light chain V(D)J sequences that exhibit use of the samegenome-encoded V(D)J segments. Bioinformatics is used to identify clonalfamilies of interest, and the desired immunoglobulin light and heavychain V(D)J regions from the same sample are then selectively amplifiedfor sequencing and/or cloning. For PCR amplification, the forward primerincludes the sample-ID and the reverse primer is specific for the lightchain or heavy chain constant region. The primers can incorporaterestriction sites into the amplicons. Amplicons can then be insertedinto the appropriate expression vectors that already contain a heavy orlight chain constant region. Antibodies can then be expressed andscreened for desired properties.

Example 41: Identification of Clonal Families from Immunoglobulin Heavyand Light Chain V(D)J Sequencing for Cloning and Expression ofAntibodies Using Only Sample-IDs (and No Plate-IDs)

Antibody heavy and light chains are reversed transcribed from mRNA ineach sample, incorporating distinct sample-IDs into the cDNA generatedfrom each sample. Each sample-ID is at least 6 nucleotides long and 1base-pair different, resulting in 4096 distinct potential sample-IDs. Adistinct sample-ID is used for each sample, and the unique sample-IDsidentify cDNA derived from different samples and enables pairedsequencing and cloning of 2 or more cDNAs expressed in an individualsample. Heavy and light chain amplicons are amplified using PCR, whichadds on the Titanium adaptors A and B required for 454 high-throughputsequencing and all samples are then sent for sequencing. Sequences areassigned to wells and assembled following “Assignment of sequences towells” and “Assembly of sequences” sections in the materials andmethods. V(D)J assignments are made using HighV-QUEST and grouped intoclonal families based on their V(D)J usage. Selected clones are thenspecifically amplified with cloning primers, which also adds inrestriction sites into the amplicon. Amplicons are then insertedin-frame into expression vectors which already contain the appropriateheavy or light constant regions for expression of the antibodies forscreening for desired properties.

Example 42: Cloning of Paired Sequences by Ligating on the UniversalPrimer Sequence

Antibody heavy and light chain genes are reversed transcribed from mRNA,which adds a 3′ sequence to the newly synthesized cDNA consisting of anadaptor region and a sample-ID barcode. Samples are then pooled togetherand a universal primer sequence added to the 3′ end of the 1st strandcDNA using T4 DNA ligase and a 5′ phosphorylated anti-sense universalprimer oligonucleotide. Alternatively, 2nd strand cDNA synthesis may bedone to obtain double stranded cDNA instead of an mRNA/cDNA hybridbefore ligating on the universal primer sequence. Two rounds of PCR arethen performed to amplify the cDNA and to add on plate-IDs and Titaniumprimers A and B for 454 sequencing. Alternatively, plate-IDs andTitanium Primers may also be added by DNA ligation instead ofincorporated during PCR by using T4 DNA ligase. After 454 sequencing,sequences are assembled and clonal families identified. Selected clonesfrom clonal families may be specifically cloned using cloning primersthat add restriction sites to the amplicons. Sequences are then insertedin-frame into expression vectors that already have the appropriate heavyor light chain constant regions. Antibodies are then expressed andscreened for desired properties.

Example 43: Testing of Gene-Specific Primers for Reverse Transcription(RT-GSPs) of Immunoglobulin Heavy and Light Chains

RT-GSPs were used instead of oligo(dT)s as primers in reversetranscription of heavy and light chain genes. cDNA were then amplifiedby PCR and visualized on an agarose gel. RT-GSP primers were IgKC_v3(a),IgLC_v5, IgLC_v6, IgLC_v7 and IgLC_v8 in lanes 1-4 respectively (b),IgHGC_v10, IgHGC_v11, IgHGC_v13 and IgGC_v15 in lanes 1-4 respectively(c) and IgHGC_v16 (d). KC, LC and GC in the primer names indicate thatthe primer is specific for the kappa chain, lambda chain and gamma heavychain respectively. White bands in gel photos indicate wherenon-relevant lanes had been cropped out. See FIG. 10 and Table 6.

Example 44: Testing of Adaptor Region Sequences

RNA was reversed transcribed with oligonucleotides comprising auniversal primer region and an adaptor region at the 3′ terminal end.cDNA was then amplified using the universal primer region sequence as aforward primer and gene-specific sequences as reverse primers. Amplifiedproducts were visualized on an agarose gel. Adaptor region consists of G(a), GGGGG and rGrGrG in lanes 1 and 2 respectively (b). rG indicatesRNA nucleotides instead of DNA nucleotides. See FIG. 11 and Table 6.

Example 45: Testing of Universal Primer Sequences

RNA was reverse transcribed with oligonucleotides comprising a universalprimer sequence and an adaptor region at the 3′ terminal end. cDNA werethen amplified by PCR using a forward primer complementary to theuniversal primer region and a reverse primer complementary to the genespecific sequence. Univ_seq_4 (a), univ_seq_5 (b) and univ_seq_f (c).Vertical white bands in gel photos indicate where non-relevant laneshave been cropped out. Otherwise lanes belong to the same gel photo. SeeFIG. 12 and Table 6.

Example 46: Testing of Gene-Specific Primer Sequences for 1st PCRReaction

Gene-specific reverse primers were used in amplification of sequences inthe first PCR reaction. Either the 1st PCR reaction or the subsequent2nd nested PCR products were run and visualized on an agarose gel.Reverse primers used were IgKC_v4, IgLC_v5, IgHGC_v13 on lanes 1-3respectively (a), K_GSP1, L_GSP1, G_GSP1 on lanes 1-3 respectively (b),K_GSP1c, L_GSP1c on lanes 1-2 respectively (c), G_GSP1 (d), L_GSP1d,G_GSP1g on lanes 1-2 respectively (e), G_GSP1h, G_GSP1k, L_GSP1f,L_GSP1g on lanes 1-4 respectively (f), G_GSP1d (g) L_GSP1h-o on lanes1-8 respectively (h), G_GSP1m-q and G_GSP1t on lanes 1-6 respectively(K, L and G in the primer names indicate that the primers are specificfor the kappa, lambda and gamma immunoglobulin constant regionsrespectively). Each gel starts with a lane marker on the left followedby sample lanes. White bars between lanes on the same gel photo indicatewhere non-relevant lanes in-between have been cropped out. See Figure.13. Also, more primers were tested in FIG. 43 . These primers were usedfor the 1^(st) PCR, and then the 2^(nd) PCR was done using the primersfrom Table 1 and PCR products ran on a 2% agarose gel and image wastaken. Primers used for 1^(st) V PCR are Kappa GSP1, kappa GSP1e, kappaGSP1f, lambda GSP1, lambda GSP1× and lambda GSP1y respectively. Also seeTable 6 for sequences used.

Example 47: Testing of Gene-Specific Sequences for the 2nd PCR Reaction

Gene-specific reverse primers were used in amplification of sequences inthe 2nd PCR reaction. PCR products were run and visualized on an agarosegel. Reverse primers used were K_GSP2, L_GSP2, G_GSP2 in lanes 1-3respectively (a), K_GSP2v2a, K_GSP2v2b, L_GSP2v2 in lanes 1-3respectively (b), K_GSP2v2c, K_GSP2v2c, G_GSP2v2c1, G_GSP2v2c2 in lanes1-4 respectively (c), K_GSP2v2d-f in lanes 1-3 respectively (d),K_GSP2v2g, L_GSP2v2d and G_GSP2b in lanes 1-3 respectively (e). K, L, Gin the primer names indicates that they are specific for the kappa,lambda and gamma immunoglobulin constant regions respectively. Each gelstarts with a lane marker on the left followed by sample lanes. Whitebars between lanes on the same gel photo indicate that non-relevantlanes in-between have been cropped out. See FIG. 14 and Table 6.

Example 48: Testing of Gene-Specific Primers for Other Human VariableRegion Genes

1^(st) and 2^(nd) PCR were done using gene-specific reverse primers andproducts ran on a 2% agarose gel and imaged. Lanes are from left:marker, mu, alpha constant regions, TCR alpha (a) and marker, TCR beta(b). sequences of 3′ primers used are in table 10. White bars betweenlanes on the same gel photo indicate where non-relevant lanes in-betweenhave been cropped out. See FIG. 44 .

Example 49: Testing of Gene-Specific Primers for Mouse Variable RegionGenes

1^(st) and 2^(nd) PCR were done and products ran on a 2% agarose gel andimaged. Lanes are from left: marker, kappa, lambda, lambda, lambda,lambda light chains and mu heavy chain (a). The 4 lambda lanes had thiscombination of primers used: mouse_lambda_GSP1a with mouse_lambda GSP2a,mouse_lambda_GSP1a with mouse_lambda GSP2b, mouse_lambda_GSP1b withmouse_lambda GSP2a and mouse_lambda_GSP1b with mouse_lambda GSP2a.Marker and alpha heavy chain (b). Gamma1, 2a, 2c heavy chains with2^(nd) PCR using mo_gl2_GSP2d and mo_g12_GSP2e respectively, marker (c).Gamma 3 heavy chain with 2^(nd) PCR using mo_g3_GSP2d, mo_g3_GSP2erespectively followed by gamma 2b heavy chain with 2^(nd) PCR usingmo_g2b_GSP2d, mo_g2b_GSP2e respectively, followed by marker (d). Marker,TCR alpha (e). Marker, TCR beta (f). White bars between lanes on thesame gel photo indicate where non-relevant lanes in-between have beencropped out. See FIG. 45 and Table 11.

Example 50: Generation of Linked Pairs of Antibody Heavy and LightChains with a Barcode at One End

As shown in FIG. 1 , individual B cells can be sorted by flow cytometryfrom blood, bulk peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), bulk Bcells, plasmablasts, plasma cells, memory B cells, or other B cellpopulations. B cells are single-cell-sorted into 96-well PCR plates,leaving one column of wells empty, as a negative control. FIG. 17describes the general methodology for a method that can be used to linktwo polynucleotide sequences of interest and add a barcode at one end.

Single step multiplex overlap-extension RT-PCR can be performed using acommercially available one-step RT-PCR kit (e.g., Qiagen one-step RT PCRkit) according to the manufacturer's recommendations. In this particularexample, a polynucleotide synthesis reaction, such as a reversetranscription reaction, is used to generate cDNA templates from an mRNAsample. Referring to FIG. 17 , the forward gene specific primer for theRT-PCR reaction contains a restriction enzyme site (RE1), a sequencingprimer site, and a barcode, to add these elements to a first cDNA ofinterest. Two additional primers (shown as containing RE3) havecomplementary overlap-extension tails. Use of these primers in a PCRreaction results in the two cDNAs of interest carrying overlap extensiontails, which allow the two cDNAs of interest to anneal and link duringamplification. In the example shown, a product of the indicatedstructure would be generated in which the LC and HC chains arephysically linked with a barcode at one end.

The RE1 and RE2 restriction sites can be used clone the PCR product intosuitable vectors for sequencing.

Example 51: Generation of Linked Pairs of Antibody Heavy and LightChains with an Internal Barcode

As shown in FIG. 1 , individual B cells can be sorted by flow cytometryfrom blood, bulk peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), bulk Bcells, plasmablasts, plasma cells, memory B cells, or other B cellpopulations. B cells are single-cell-sorted into 96-well PCR plates,leaving one column of wells empty, as a negative control. FIG. 18describes the general methodology for a method that can be used to linktwo polynucleotides of interest with a barcode located in between.Primers and oligonucleotides which can be used for antibody heavy andlight chains are shown in Table 30. Restriction sites AsiSI and PacI areincluded in the RT oligonucleotides. Sample-ID sequences are shown inTable 2.

The method shown in FIG. 18 relies on the 3′ tailing and templateswitching activities of reverse transcriptase during a cDNA synthesisreaction. The 3′ C tail added to the synthesized cDNA can be used forthe annealing of an adaptor molecule carrying an overlap extensionsequence and a barcode. Two types of adaptor molecules are used to linktwo cDNAs. A first adaptor carrying an overlap extension and barcodesequence is added to a first cDNA. A second adaptor carrying the reversecomplement of the overlap extension without a barcode sequence is addedto a second cDNA. The template switching property of reversetranscriptase adds these sequences to the 3′ ends of their respectivecDNAs.

In a PCR reaction, as shown in FIG. 18 , the complementary overlapextension sequences anneal and corresponding strands of DNA aresynthesized from the site of annealing. Subsequent rounds of PCR usingexternal primers results in amplification of the linked cDNA molecules.

Through the addition of appropriate restriction sites and the additionof sequencing primer sites incorporated into primers for theamplification reaction or later by ligation, the PCR products can becloned into suitable vectors for sequencing.

Example 52: Generation of Linked Pairs of Antibody Heavy and LightChains with Two Internal Barcodes Using Universal SequenceOverlap-Extension Primers

As shown in FIG. 1 , individual B cells can be sorted by flow cytometryfrom blood, bulk peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), bulk Bcells, plasmablasts, plasma cells, memory B cells, or other B cellpopulations. B cells are single-cell-sorted into 96-well PCR plates,leaving one column of wells empty, as a negative control. FIG. 19describes the general methodology for a method that can be used tointroduce two internal barcodes in between two linked polynucleotides ofinterest. Primers and oligonucleotides which can be used for antibodyheavy and light chains are shown in Table 31. Restriction sites AsiSIand PacI are included in the RT oligonucleotide. Sample-ID sequences areshown in Table 2.

The method shown in FIG. 19 relies on the 3′ tailing and templateswitching activities of reverse transcriptase during a cDNA synthesisreaction. In this example, the 3′ C tail added to oligo (dT) primed cDNAcan be used for the annealing of an adaptor molecule carrying auniversal sequence and a barcode to each of the cDNAs to be joined. Thetemplate switching property of reverse transcriptase adds thesesequences to the 3′ ends of their respective cDNAs. Subsequentoverlap-extension PCR using primers to the universal sequence whichcarry complementary overlap-extension sequences in combination withexternal LC and HC specific primers results in a structure in which LCis linked to HC with two internal barcodes between them as shown in FIG.19 .

Through the addition of appropriate restriction sites and the additionof sequencing primer sites incorporated into primers for theamplification reaction or later by ligation, the PCR products can becloned into suitable vectors for sequencing.

Example 53: Generation of Linked Pairs of Antibody Heavy and LightChains with Two Internal Barcodes Using Overlap-Extension Adaptors

As shown in FIG. 1 , individual B cells can be sorted by flow cytometryfrom blood, bulk peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs), bulk Bcells, plasmablasts, plasma cells, memory B cells, or other B cellpopulations. B cells are single-cell-sorted into 96-well PCR plates,leaving one column of wells empty, as a negative control. FIG. 20describes the general methodology for another method that can be used tointroduce two internal barcodes in between two linked polynucleotides ofinterest. Primers and oligonucleotides which can be used for antibodyheavy and light chains are shown in Table 32. Restriction sites AsiSIand PacI are included in the RT oligonucleotides. Sample-ID sequencesare shown in Table 2.

The method shown in FIG. 20 also relies on the 3′ tailing and templateswitching activities of reverse transcriptase during a cDNA synthesisreaction. In this example, the 3′ C tail added to cDNA synthesized usinggene specific primers can be used for the annealing of adaptor moleculescarrying self complementary or palindromic overlap-extension sequencesand a barcode to each of the cDNAs to be joined. The template switchingproperty of reverse transcriptase adds these sequences to the 3′ ends oftheir respective cDNAs. Subsequent annealing of the overlap-extensionsequences added to the LC and HC cDNAs links them together at the siteof overlap. Overlap-extension PCR using external primers to LC and HCresults in a structure in which LC is linked to HC with two internalbarcodes between them as shown in FIG. 20 .

Through the addition of appropriate restriction sites and the additionof sequencing primer sites incorporated into primers for theamplification reaction or later by ligation, the PCR products can becloned into suitable vectors for sequencing.

Example 54: Studies on Different Methods of Adding Barcodes

We investigated a variety of methods through which barcode sequencescould be added during the course of a reverse transcription oramplification reaction using an oligonucleotide comprising the barcodesequence. We tested the addition of barcodes by incorporating them intogene-specific primers (GSPs) and into oligonucleotides containing one ormore Gs that can be added to the 3′ end of cDNAs by template switching.Based on the literature and our scientific knowledge, our expectationwas that we would be able to effectively barcode cDNA using either 5′barcoded oligonucleotides or 3′ barcoded GSPs.

As demonstrated in FIG. 21 , RT was performed with 1 μg of total PBMCRNA and 0.5 μM of univ_seq_2 template-switching oligo and 0.1 μM ofIgKC_v3 GSP (lanes 1-2) and IgLC_v5 GSP (lanes 3-4) with an additional5′ flanking sequence, of which the first part is the Fixed_PCR3sequence, and the last 8 bp AACAATAC is the barcode. The RT reaction wascleaned up using NucleoTraPCR (Macherey-Nagel) and dissolved in a finalvolume of 50 μl. 2 μl of this reaction was used in each subsequent PCRreaction, with either an internal 5′ V_(K) (lane 1) or V_(L) (lane 3)primer or the Univ_seq_2 (lanes 2 and 4) as the 5′ primer, andFixed_PCR3 as the 3′ primer. Note that the V_(K) primer is specific forkappa V genes 1 and 2, and the V_(L) primer is specific for lambda Vgene 2. Sequences are in Table 33. As can be seen, the PCR products inlanes 2 and 4 ran as a smear. In contrast, the internal 5′ primersproduced distinct bands (lanes 1 and 3), showing that the primer pairsdo work, and the smearing shown in lanes 1 and 3 cannot be attributed topoorly designed primers. As the oligonucleotide is added to allfull-length reverse transcribed cDNA sequences, when a smear is obtainedduring PCR amplification with the univ_seq_2 and 3′ barcoded GSPs, thissuggests that reverse transcription with barcoded GSPs results innon-specifically primed nucleic acid sequences in the RT reaction. Ourresults suggest that use of 5′ universal sequence adaptors and 3′barcoded primers is not a good strategy for the barcoding and specificamplification of immunoglobulin or other genes expressed by a B cell orother cell.

In hindsight, several biologic properties of DNA and the molecularreactions used likely contribute to our observations. Reversetranscription is usually performed at low temperatures such as 42° C. or56° C. Unlike PCR, where the annealing step is usually performed at atemperature just slightly below the Tm of the primers to promote primingspecificity, this cannot be done for reverse transcription, as reversetranscriptases are inactivated at high temperatures. Therefore, genespecific primers used during RT are typically not very specific for thegene of interest because the reaction proceeds at a temperature muchlower than the Tm of the primer. In such a situation, the primer canalso bind to off-target mRNA sequences with some mismatches, andmispriming occurs. If the barcode is added on the GSP, the primer alsohas to have a fixed sequence 5′ of the barcode for use in subsequentPCR. This makes the primer very long (˜60 nt), resulting in a primerwith even a much higher degree of mispriming. However, specificamplification during PCR usually can still be achieved by using a highlygene-specific forward primer; as long as one member of the primer pairis specific, there usually can be specific amplification, as shown inlanes 1 and 3.

If a template switching technique is used to add an adaptor, thisadaptor is added to all mRNAs that are synthesized to form first-strandcDNA. As mentioned above, the barcoded GSPs will have significantamounts of mispriming, especially as the RT enzyme Superscript III losesits template-switching activity at 56° C., and reverse transcriptionproceeds at 42° C. Specific nested 5′ or 3′ primers cannot be used asone would either lose the ability to PCR amplify all immunoglobulingenes (thus having to resort to multiplex PCR with multiple degenerate5′ primers due to variable V genes) or else lose the 3′ barcode.Therefore, barcoded GSPs are not suitable for use with template-switchadded adaptors, or any other 5′ adaptors, as other methods to add 5′adaptors such as TdT tailing or blunt end cloning also add adaptorsnon-discriminately. Therefore, internal 3′ primers or a nested orsemi-nested PCR amplification strategy is also required, and barcoded 3′GSPs do not allow for the use of these strategies for specificamplification of genes from a B cell or other cell. Based on ourresults, one would also anticipate that barcoded oligo(dT)s would alsoperform poorly for many of the same reasons we believe barcoded GSPsperform poorly. These reasons include but are not limited to aninability to use internal 3′ primers or a nested or semi-nested PCRstrategy for specific amplification of genes from a B cell or othercell.

In contrast, our results (see other examples) demonstrate thesuperiority of barcode sequence addition during the course of a reversetranscription reaction using a primer comprising the barcode sequenceand an adaptor that anneals to the 3′ tail of a cDNA generated during areverse transcription reaction. In such an embodiment, the adaptorsequence can comprise a barcode sequence and be used to label genesencoding antibody heavy and light chains. Thus, as disclosed herein,template switching, or any other methods of tailing a cDNA adds asequence that can be used for PCR amplification without prior knowledgeof the 5′ sequences themselves, enabling efficient and unbiasedrepresentation of the antibody repertoire. Furthermore, this approachallows one to obtain the repertoire of other co-expressed genes encodingproteins in addition to antibodies. Further, the approach of usingtemplate-switch adaptors has clear advantages over methods disclosed inthe art that use sets of degenerate forward primers to amplify multipleV genes. These methods also fail to capture the entire antibodyrepertoire, because the known 5′ primer sets: a) cover most but not theentire repertoire set; b) are not able to cover as yet known V genesvariants (polymorphisms) in the human population; and c) may not be ableto effectively amplify antibody sequences that have undergone extensivesomatic hypermutation (SHM). See, e.g., Scheid et al., Sciencexpress, 14Jul. 2011 for an example of the effect of SHM.

Accordingly, the use of template-switch adaptors for the preparation oflibraries of expressed genes, e.g., antibody heavy and light chains,provides clear advantages over other methods known in the art byallowing for unbiased representation of particular gene families andother co-expressed genes. The use of template-switch adaptors or 5′adaptors added using any other methods such as but not limited to TdTtailing and blunt end ligation are also more compatible with the use ofbarcoded 5′ adaptors rather than barcoded 3′ GSPs or barcoded oligo(dT)sfor the reasons discussed above.

Example 55: Sorting of Plasmablasts by Forward-Scatter and/orSide-Scatter on Flow Cytometer and/or in Conjunction with Other CellSurface Markers

Plasmablasts are blasting B cells that are activated, haveproliferated/are proliferating and have undergone affinity maturation.Plasmablasts represent the active immune response and by practicing themethods and compositions herein allow for the bioinformatic constructionof evolutionary trees with clonal families of antibodies that bind totarget antigens of interest, whether it is an infection, a vaccine,autoimmune or cancer antigens.

Plasmablasts are blasting B cells and are larger than resting B cells(FIG. 40A-B). Therefore, they can be sorted on a flow cytometer usingtheir forward- and side-scatter properties. As shown in FIG. 40 c ,plasmablasts have a median FSC-A that is ˜1.29-1.66× larger than themedian FSC-A of other CD20⁺ B cells, with a median FSC-W that is1.04-1.16× larger than resting CD20⁺ B cells. Plasmablasts also have amedian FSC-A that is 0.85-0.98× that of monocytes, and a median FSC-Wthat is 0.92-1.02× that of monocytes as determined by the 95% confidenceinterval. Here FSC-A and FSC-H could be interchangeable and equivalentas FSC-A and FSC-H are scaled on calibrated flow cytometers to give thesame values. Similarly for SSC-A (and SSC-H, due to scaling) and SSC-W,plasmablasts have a median SSC-A that is 0.74-2.56× that of CD20⁺ Bcells and 0.21-0.84× that of monocytes, and a median SSC-W that is1.01-1.20× that of CD20⁺ B cells and 0.82-1.03× that of monocytes. Theratio of plasmablasts to B cells is representative of that tolymphocytes, as resting lymphocytes are similar in size.

An alternative approach to identify plasmablasts is to use the 20thpercentile FSC or SSC of plasmablasts to the median FSC or SSC of CD20⁺B cells or monocytes (FIG. 44D), which is 1.04-1.50× (1.02-1.11×) thatof median FSC-A (FSC-W) for CD20⁺ B cells and 0.70-0.88× (0.88-1.00×)for monocytes. Plasmablasts have a 20th percentile SSC-A (SSC-W) whichis 0.67-1.89× (0.99-1.11×) that of median SSC-A (SSC-W) for CD20⁺ Bcells and 0.20-0.62× (0.77-0.99×) for monocytes. These numbers allows agating cutoff to include 80% of plasmablasts and exclude otherlymphocytes. This allows for using FSC (and/or SSC) in conjunction withsingle or dual color stains to gate for plasmablasts in single cellsorting plasmablasts. Such combinations may include FSC^(hi)CD19^(lo)(FIG. 39 b ), CD19⁺FSC^(hi) (FIG. 39 c ) CD19⁺FSC^(hi)CD20⁻ (FIG. 39 d), CD19⁺FSC^(hi)CD38^(hi) (FIG. 39 e ) and CD19⁺FSC^(hi)CD27⁺ (FIG. 39 f). Sorted cells may then undergo RT, PCR for barcoding as carried out asin “non-touchdown” PCR in the materials and methods. Downstreampreparation for sequencing, cloning and expression are as follows inexamples 6 and 8. Note that ratios given are that of the 95% confidenceinterval, or where 95% of ratios should fall within this range.

Example 56: Sorting of Plasmablasts by Size on any Sieving Device, Suchas a Microfluidics Device

Plasmablasts are blasting B cells that are activated, haveproliferated/are proliferating and have undergone affinity maturation.Plasmablasts represent the active immune response and by practicing themethods and compositions herein allow for the bioinformatic constructionof evolutionary trees with clonal families of antibodies that bind totarget antigens of interest, whether it is an infection, a vaccine,autoimmune or cancer antigens.

Plasmablasts are blasting B cells and are larger than resting B cells.Plasmablasts and CD20⁺ B cells were FACS sorted and stained with trypanblue to exclude dead cells and imaged at 200× magnification. 52plasmablasts and 51 CD20⁺ B cells were imaged and cell area measuredwith ImageJ. Plasmablasts imaged were between 7.8-13 uM in diameter, andbetween 48-121 uM² in area, and between in 251-996 uM³ in volume. CD20⁺B cells are not blasting and are smaller, the majority is between 6-8 uMin diameter, or smaller than 50 uM², or smaller than 268 uM³, with only4 cells of 51 larger than that (FIG. 41 ). Any sieving device that iscapable of separating cells larger or smaller than 8 uM in diameter or50 uM² in area or 268 uM³ in volume is capable of separatingplasmablasts from CD20⁺ resting B cells, with 96% of the plasmablastscaptured, and sieving out 92% of the resting B cells. Such a device maybe a fine sieve with 8 uM diameter holes, or a microfluidics device withchannels that only allows or prevents cells greater than 8 uM indiameter or 50 uM² in area or 268 uM³ in volume in passing through.These cells can then be sorted by actuators/pumps in the microfluidicsdevice into wells such that there is only 1 or a few cell(s)/well andRT, PCR for barcoding may then be carried out as in “non-touchdown” PCRin the materials and methods using the same concentrations of reagents.Downstream preparation for sequencing, cloning and expression are asfollows in examples 6 and 8.

Example 57: Anti-Staphylococcus aureus Antibodies Enhance Phagocytosisof S. aureus by a Neutrophil Cell Line

Humans with S. aureus infections who mount effective immune responsesagainst their S. aureus infection, for example humans who clear S.aureus without the need for antibiotic therapy, are used as sources forperipheral blood from which peripheral blood plasmablasts are stainedand sorted. Plasmablasts are single-cell sorted and barcoded as detailedin “Non touchdown PCR” in the materials and methods, and prepared forsequencing as detailed in “Preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing” in thematerials and methods. Evolutionary trees are bioinformaticallyconstructed and a few select representatives of each clonal family areselected and cloned for expression as recombinant antibodies as inexample 8. S. aureus Wood strain, which is ˜5% protein A positive, isplated on 5% trypticase soy agar (TCA) blood agar and a colony grown andkept at 4° C. as stock. This stock is refreshed weekly by pickinganother colony. 1 mL of this stock is used to inoculate S. aureus growthtill OD550=0.5, which is approximately mid-log growth phase. S. aureusis lightly fixed in 4% paraformaldehyde (PFA) for 15 minutes at roomtemperature and washed once with Hanks balanced salt solution (HBSS),before staining with 1 uM CFSE for 15 minutes at room temperature. Fixedbacteria are then washed and incubated with 10 ug/ml of the expressedrecombinant anti-S. aureus antibodies, or 10 ug/ml of expressedanti-influenza virus antibodies as a negative control. Bacteria are thenwashed twice. HL-60, a neutrophil cell line, is activated for 96 hr with25 uM retinoic acid, and incubated with labeled, fixed bacteria at 1:1to 1:100 for 45 minutes at 37° C. gently shaking at 300 rpm in 96-wellplates. HL-60 is then washed twice and analyzed on a flow cytometer. Theamount of CFSE labeling in HL-60s is indicative of the amount of S.aureus phagocytosed. Some expressed anti-S. aureus antibodies willbinding to staph cell surface proteins and opsonize the bacteria,leading to increased phagocytosis.

Example 58: Anti-Staphylococcus aureus Antibodies EnhanceNeutrophil-Mediated Killing of S. aureus

Humans who were able to effectively control and/or clear their S. aureusinfections were selected as in the relevant example above, andplasmablasts were isolated and single cell sorted for sequencing andcloning and expression as in the relevant example above. An S. aureusclinical isolate, was plated on 5% TCA blood agar and a colony grown andkept at 4° C. as stock. This stock was refreshed weekly by pickinganother colony. 1 mL of this stock was used to inoculate S. aureusgrowth till OD550=0.5, which is approximately mid-log growth phase. S.aureus was then incubated with 2 ug/ml of expressed anti-S. aureusantibodies for 30 minutes at 4° C. before washing twice. The HL-60neutrophil cell was activated for 96 hr with 25 uM of retinoic acid, andincubated with baby rabbit complement and S. aureus in a 1:1 to 1:100ratio for 45 minutes at 37° C. shaking at 300 rpm in 96-well plates.HL-60 cells were then rapidly put on ice and washed 3× to remove looselyattached S. aureus. Extracellular S. aureus was then serially dilutedand plated on 5% TSA blood agar and cultured overnight at 37° C.Colonies were counted the next day to determine the number of colonyforming units (CFU). A decrease in CFUs by specific anti-S. aureusrecombinant antibodies (after incubation with S. aureus) demonstratethat those antibodies were effective in mediating enhanced phagocytosisand killing, or reducing growth, of S. aureus by HL-60 cells (FIG. 46 ).

Example 59: Treatment of Staphylococcus aureus-Infected Mice UsingExpressed Anti-S. aureus Antibodies in Mouse Model

Anti-S. aureus antibodies that demonstrate in vitro killing, reducedgrowth or binding activity as in example 58 may also have in vivoactivity. Anti-S. aureus antibodies with killing activity are isolatedfrom S. aureus-infected humans who are able to control their staphinfection as in examples 55-58. Mice are given a lethal dose of S.aureus and are then treated with a control antibody or a recombinantanti-S. aureus antibody(ies) with demonstrated in vitro killing, reducedgrowth or binding activity. Mice are deemed to be protected if they havea longer survival or reduced severity of infection as determined by theKaplan-Meier survival test. Anti-S. aureus antibodies derived fromhumans who control or reduce the severity of their S. aureus infectionsare thereby evaluated for their ability to confer passive protectionagainst S. aureus.

Example 60: Use of the Antigen Targets of Effective Anti-Staphylococcusaureus Immune Responses to Develop Vaccines

S. aureus antigens that are targeted by anti-S. aureus antibodies thatexhibit killing, reduced growth or binding activity are good candidatesfor a S. aureus vaccine. Vaccinees who develop a strong response againstthose specific antigens may be protected against or exhibit reducedseverity of infection with S. aureus. Anti-S. aureus antibodies withkilling, reduced growth or binding activity are isolated from S.aureus-infected humans who are able to control their S. aureusinfection, and their target antigens identified using mass spectrometryas in examples 55-58. Mice are either vaccinated with a mock vector orvaccinated with candidate S. aureus antigens and then boosted twice overa period of a two months. Mice may be immunized with candidate S. aureusantigens individually or in combination. Anti-S. aureus antigen antibodytiter is confirmed by ELISA. Mice are then challenged with a lethal doseof S. aureus. Mice are deemed to be protected against S. aureus if theyhave a longer survival as determined by the Kaplan-Meier survival test.Immunization against these selected S. aureus antigens therefore confersprotection or reduces the severity of infection, showing that thecompositions and methods herein can aid in vaccine design.

Example 61: Treatment of Staphylococcus aureus-Infected Humans UsingRecombinant Anti-S. aureus Antibodies with In Vivo Killing, ReducedGrowth or Binding Activity in Humans

Antibodies derived from humans who control their S. aureus infection andexhibit in vitro and in vivo killing, reduced growth or binding activityas in examples 55-59 may be used to treat S. aureus-infected patients.Antibodies are obtained and tested for in vitro and in vivo killingactivity as in examples 55-59. Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP)manufactured anti-S. aureus monoclonal antibodies may be givenintravenously or subcutaneously to S. aureus-infected humans, especiallypatients infected with methicillin resistant S. aureus (MRSA) or otherstrains of drug-resistant-S. aureus, and compared to antibiotics alongfor efficacy. The anti-S. aureus antibodies are deemed to havetherapeutic utility if patients are protected against invasive S. aureusinfections, have less severe S. aureus infections, and/or recover morerapidly than patients given antibiotics alone or not given antibiotics.Recombinant anti-S. aureus antibodies can be given therapeutically topatients with active S. aureus infections to reduce the severity ofinfection and/or to enhance clearance of the infection as well asprophylactically to high-risk patient populations, such as patients onhemodialysis for renal failure, patients admitted to the hospital, orpatients with a positive-screen for S. aureus or MRSA.

Example 62: Staphylococcal Aureus Vaccination Using Identified S. aureusAntigens to Confer Protective Immunity in Humans

S. aureus antigens that are targeted by anti-S. aureus antibodies thatexhibit killing or binding activity in vivo, and when vaccinated againstin a mouse model confer protection against S. Aureus challenge, may begood candidates for a prophylactic vaccine in humans. Anti-S. aureusantibodies are derived from humans who control their S. aureusinfections and are cloned, expressed and tested for in vivo killing,reduced growth or binding activity and as vaccine candidates in mice asin examples 55-58 and 59. Humans are then given the S. aureus vaccinecontaining S. aureus antigens that are the targets of anti-S. aureusantibodies with killing, reduced growth or binding activity, with aplacebo being the control. The cohorts are tracked for their incidenceor severity of S. aureus infections. The vaccine is deemed successful ifit lowers the vaccinated cohort's incidence or severity of S. aureusinfections compared to the placebo cohort.

Example 63: Monitoring of Immune Responses Induced by CandidateStaphylococcus Aureus Vaccines as a Correlate of Protection

After immunization of humans with a candidate S. aureus vaccine as inexample 62, the vaccine response may be monitored by determining ifrobust clonal families against the target S. aureus antigens of interestis elicited. Blood is drawn between 7-14 days post-vaccination andplasmablasts are single cell sorted, barcoded and 454 sequenced asdetailed in “non-touchdown PCR” and “preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing”in the materials and methods. Evolutionary trees are drawn and 2-3members of each clonal family are then cloned and expressed as inexample 8 and tested for their binding to the staph antigens of interestin an ELISA. We expect that humans who have a strong vaccine-inducedanti-S. aureus immune response will exhibit large clonal familiesagainst the S. aureus antigens targeted in effective human immuneresponses. Such an approach has the potential to provide a correlate ofprotection for a S. aureus vaccine and in doing so enable clinicaltrials and development to be streamlined. This antibody and/or TCRimmune repertoire monitoring would enable rapid assessment of thelikelihood that a candidate vaccine would provide efficacy.

Example 64: Treatment of Mice with Lung-Adenocarcinoma Using RecombinantAnti-Lung Adenocarcinoma Antibodies

The anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibody that binds to a cell surfaceprotein or other lung adenocarcinoma proteins may be useful as a carrierto target toxins to lung adenocarcinoma cells or to target othermolecules expressed by lung adenocarcinoma cells. Anti-lungadenocarcinoma antibodies with cell surface binding activity or otherlung adenocarcinoma antigens are isolated from a long-termnon-progressor lung adenocarcinoma cancer patient(s) as in example 11.Nude mice are given a subcutaneous injection of H1650 lungadenocarcinoma cell line and the tumor allowed to grow for one week.Anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibody is then conjugated to a toxin, such asdiphtheria toxin lacking the R-domain, which is the cell-binding domainand allows diphtheria toxin into the cell. Diphtheria toxin lackingR-domain therefore is lethal only to lung adenocarcinoma cells which theantibody binds to and delivers the diphtheria toxin payload. Controlantibody conjugated to diphtheria toxin without R domain is used as thecontrol. The lung-adenocarcinoma antibody is deemed to have successfullydelivered its payload to kill adenocarcinoma cells if the tumor loaddecreases more than in the control. Alternatively, in certain cases therecombinant antibody itself may be able to mediate tumor cell killing orto prevent tumor cell growth (in the absence of a conjugated toxin).

Example 65: Treatment of Lung Adenocarcinoma Patients Using ExpressedAnti-Lung Adenocarcinoma Antibody

The anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibody that binds to cell surface antigenmay be useful as a carrier to target toxins to lung adenocarcinomacells. Anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibodies with cell surface bindingactivity are isolated from a long-term non-progressor lungadenocarcinoma cancer patient as in example 11. GMP monoclonal antibodyor other anti-lung adenocarcinoma monoclonal antibodies may be givenintravenously or subcutaneously to lung adenocarcinoma patients,especially to patients whose biopsied adenocarcinoma cells expressedhigh levels of the cell surface antigen targeted by the monoclonalantibody. The recombinant monoclonal antibody(ies) lung adenocarcinomaantigen(s), or other members of the clonal families from which they arederived, can be used to immunohistochemically stain a biopsy specimen ofan individual patient's lung adenocarcinoma to gain information on tumorantigen expression levels, and this information can be used to determinewhether an individual patient is likely to respond to therapy with thismonoclonal antibody. Anti-lung adenocarcinoma antibodies can beconjugated to a toxin, such as diphtheria toxin lacking the R-domain,which is the cell-binding domain and allows diphtheria toxin into thecell. Diphtheria toxin lacking R-domain therefore is lethal only to lungadenocarcinoma cells which the antibody binds to and delivers thediphtheria toxin payload. Standard of care chemotherapy is used fortreatment of the comparator group. The anti-adenocarcinoma antibodiesare deemed to have delivered their payload and have therapeutic utilityif patients survive longer or exhibit longer times prior to relapse orprogression. Alternatively, in certain cases the recombinant antibodyitself, against lung adenocarcinoma antigens, may be able to mediatetumor cell killing or prevent tumor cell growth (in the absence of aconjugated toxin).

Example 66: Lung Adenocarcinoma Therapeutic Vaccination Using IdentifiedAntigens in Humans

The cell surface antigens bound by the anti-lung adenocarcinomaantibodies may be used in a therapeutic vaccine to treat established, orto protect against development of, lung adenocarcinoma. Anti-lungadenocarcinoma antibodies with cell surface binding activity areisolated from a long-term non-progressor lung adenocarcinoma cancerpatient(s) as in example 11, and the target antigen identified usingimmunoprecipitation or immunoblotting and mass spectrometry. Vaccineesare given either a vaccine containing the lung adenocarcinoma antigen(s)of interest or a control vaccine. Cohorts are then followed and theirincidence or progression of lung adenocarcinoma tracked. The vaccine isdeemed to be successful if humans vaccinated with the target antigenhave prolonged survival or extended time to relapse compared to thestandard-of-care comparator group.

Example 67: Immune Monitoring of Lung Adenocarcinoma Vaccination forEfficacy of Response

After immunization of humans with lung adenocarcinoma vaccine as inexample 66, the vaccine response may be monitored by determining ifrobust clonal families against adenocarcinoma antigen(s) of interest inthe vaccine are elicited. Blood is drawn between 7-14 dayspost-vaccination and plasmablasts are single cell sorted and barcoded,and 454 sequencing is performed as detailed in “non-touchdown PCR” and“preparing for 454 XLR70 sequencing” in the materials and methods.Evolutionary trees are drawn and 2-3 members of each clonal family arethen cloned and expressed as in example 8 and tested for their bindingto the staph antigens of interest in an ELISA. We expect that humans whohave a strong immune response will have large clonal families againstlung adenocarcinoma antigen(s) of interest and/or many clonal familiesagainst the adenocarcinoma antigen(s) of interest. This immunemonitoring allows us to rapidly predict the efficacy of a candidatevaccine.

Example 68. Use of Superscript III for Template Switching During ReverseTranscription

In our methods, the sample-identification region and adaptor regions areadded on during reverse transcriptase. This utilizes the 3′ tailingactivity and template switching activity of RNase H⁻ reversetranscriptases. Most frequently, a reverse transcriptase such asSuperscript II (Invitrogen) is used at its working temperature of 42° C.MMLV H⁻ reverse transcriptases that have also been engineered forthermal stability, such as Superscript III, with a recommended workingtemperature of 50° C., have been reported not to have this 3′ tailingactivity and therefore no template switching ability(http://tools.invitrogen.com/content/sfs/ProductNotes/F_Superscript%20III%20Enzyme%20RD-MKT-TL-HL0506021.pdf?ProductNoteId=36).However, in FIG. 42 , we showed that Superscript III does have 3′tailing and template switching activity. This property is weak at 50°C., the recommended reverse transcription temperature for SuperscriptIII, and may explain why the 3′ tailing activity of Superscript III hasnot been reported before. However, 3′ tailing activity and templateswitching increases significantly as the RT temperature was lowered from50° C. to 45.5° C. to 42° C. We would expect all MMLV RNase H⁻ reversetranscriptases that have been engineered for thermal stability to alsohave 3′ tailing activity at lower working temperatures, i.e. between 42°C. to 50° C.

Example 69. Analysis of Co-Expressed Genes to Identify AntibodiesAssociated with Memory B Cell and Plasma Cell Responses as Well asHoming to Specific Tissues

Barcoding of all the cDNA produced by B cells, T cells or other cellssorted into individual wells as described by the methods andcompositions herein enables characterization of gene co-expression inplasmablasts, other B cells, T cells and other cells at the single celllevel. This enables use of co-expressed genes to identify the specificantibodies and TCRs expressed by B and T cells that have been induced todifferentiate into memory B cells, plasma cells, memory T cells,specific types of effector T cells (for example, Th1, Th2, Th17 orT-regulatory T cells) or induced to home to a specific tissue or site(for example, the gastrointestinal tract, skin, or brain). The barcodingof all cDNA produced by the individual cell or collection of cells in aspecific sample enables use of additional 3′ PCR primers for both 1^(st)and 2^(nd) PCR to characterize the co-expression of specific such genes.5′ primers remain the same as those used to amplify variable regionsgenes. Furthermore, analysis of co-expressed genes enables bioinformaticanalysis of the relationships between the affinity maturation of clonalfamilies and the co-expression of genes associated with thedifferentiation of B cells to memory B cells, short-lived plasmablasts,and long-lived plasma cells (Table 34), the differentiation of naïve ormemory T cells to Tregs or Th1, Th2, Th17 cells (Table 35), or thehoming of B or T cells to specific sites. Such analysis can furtherpinpoint the critical antibodies or TCRs mediating an effective immuneresponse.

For example, PMBCs derived from individuals mounting immune response areused to single cell sort plasmablasts. The methods and compositionsherein are used to analyze co-expression of genes associated with homingof plasmablasts into different tissues (see Table 36). Bioinformaticanalysis of the datasets identifies antibodies associated with secretionat different bodily locations. These antibody genes are thenrecombinantly expressed for characterization in in vitro screeningassays as in Example 8.

It will be understood by persons skilled in the relevant art thatvarious changes in form and details can be made therein withoutdeparting from the spirit and scope of the various aspects of theinvention.

It must be noted that, as used in the specification and the appendedclaims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referentsunless the context clearly dictates otherwise.

All references, issued patents and patent applications cited within thebody of the instant specification are hereby incorporated by referencein their entirety, for all purposes.

TABLE 1 Primers and adapter molecules seq id no DESCRIPTION sequence796583 Sample-ID adaptor CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG(sample-ID)GGG 796584FW long primer1 GAGAGACTGACAGCGTATCGCCTCCCTCGCGCCATCAG(plate-ID)CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG 796061 FW short primer1GAGAGACTGACAGCGTATCGCCTC 796062 kappa GSP1 CGATTGGAGGGCGTTATCCAC 796063lambda GSP1 TYTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC 796064 gamma GSP1TCTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGCTG 796065 FW primer2 CGTATCGCCTCCCTCGCG 796585kappa GSP long CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAG(plate-ID)TCAGATGGC primer2GGGAAGATGAAGAC 796586 lambda GSP longCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAG(plate-ID)GAGGAGGGY primer2 GGGAACAGAGTGAC796587 gamma GSP long CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAG(plate-ID)GGAAGTAGTprimer2 CCTTGACCAGGCAG 796066 kappa GSP 2sCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAGTCAGATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC 796067 lambda GSP 2sCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAGGAGGAGGGY GGGAACAGAGTGAC 796068 gamma GSP 2sCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAGGGAAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGGCAG 796069 RV primer2CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCC *For sample-ID sequences, see Table 2. For plate-IDsequences, see Table 3. Kappa GSP 2s, lambda GSP 2s and gamma GSP 2s areidentical to the kappa, lambda and gamma GSP long primer 2 except thatthey do not have a plate-ID sequence. The plate-ID sequence is notnecessary when doing XL+ runs, or when only forwards reads are desiredwhen doing XLR70 runs with the Titanium LibA chemistry. **:primerssequences were designed to be able to amplify all different constantgene variants as found in IMGT database (http://imgt.cines.fr/).

TABLE 2 Sample- SEQ ID Well SampleID Sequence of Sample-ID ID NO A1  1ACGTCTCATCA 796070 A2  2 ACTCATCTACA 796071 A3  3 AGAGCGTCACA 796072 A4 4 AGTAGTGATCA 796073 A5  5 ATAGATAGACA 796074 A6  6 ATCTACTGACA 796075A7  7 CACGTGTCGCA 796076 A8  8 CATACTCTACA 796077 A9  9 CGAGACGCGCA796078 A10 10 CGTCGATCTCA 796079 A11 11 CTACGACTGCA 796080 B1 12TAGTGTAGATA 796081 B2 13 TCTAGCGACTA 796082 B3 14 TGTGAGTAGTA 796083 B415 ACAGTATATAA 796084 B5 16 AGCTCACGTAA 796085 B6 17 TCGATAGTGAA 796086B7 18 TCGCTGCGTAA 796087 B8 19 TGAGTCAGTAA 796088 B9 20 TGTAGTGTGAA796089 B10 21 TGTCGTCGCAA 796090 B11 22 ACGACAGCTCA 796091 C1 23TACACGTGATTAGGGATT 796092 C2 24 TACAGATCGTTAGGGAAA 796093 C3 25TAGTGTAGATTTGGGTTT 796094 C4 26 TCTAGCGACTTTGGGTTT 796095 C5 27ACGCGATCGAAGGGTTT 796096 C6 28 AGCTCACGTATTGGGTTT 796097 C7 29AGTGCTACGAAGGGAAA 796098 C8 30 TCTGACGTCAAAGGGAAA 796099 C9 31ACGTCTCATCAAGGAAGGAA 796100 C10 32 TATAGACATCAACACACAAA 796101 C11 33AGTGAGCTCGTTGGGTTT 796102 D1 34 ATCGTCTGTGTTGGGTTT 796103 D2 35CACACGATAGTTGGGTTT 796104 D3 36 CTGCGTCACGATCTCTCTT 796105 D4 37TAGCATACTGTTGGGTTT 796106 D5 38 TATCTGATAGTTGGGTTT 796107 D6 39TGACATCTCGCAGTTCTTT 796108 D7 40 TGATAGAGCGTAACAACAGA 796109 D8 41TCACGCGAGAAAGGGAAA 796110 D9 42 ACACATACGCAGGGAAA 796111 D10 43ACTAGCAGTAA 796112 D11 44 CGCAGTACGAA 796113 E1 45 TGAGTCAGTAAGGGAAA796114 E2 46 ACTCATCTACAGGGAAA 796115 E3 47 ACTCGCGCACAGAGAGAA 796116 E448 AGAGCGTCACAGAGAGAA 796117 E5 49 AGCGACTAGCAACACACAAA 796118 E6 50ATCTACTGACAACACACAA 796119 E7 51 CATACTCTACAACACACAAA 796120 E8 52TCGAGCTCTCAGAGAGAAA 796121 E9 53 AGAGAGTGTGTTGGGTTT 796122 E10 54ATCGTAGCAGAACACACAAA 796123 E11 55 CACTCGCACGTTGGGTTT 796124 F1 56CAGACGTCTGAACACACAAA 796125 F2 57 CTCGATATAGTTGGGTTT 796126 F3 58TCTGATCGAGAAGGGAAA 796127 F4 59 TACACACACTTAGGGATT 796128 F5 60TACGTCATCAGGGAAA 796129 F6 61 CTACGCTCTAAGGGAAA 796130 F7 62TAGTCGCATAAAGGGAAA 796131 F8 63 CGATCGTATAA 796132 F9 64 CGCGTATACAA796133 F10 65 CTACGCTCTAA 796134 F11 66 TCACGCGAGAA 796135 G1 67AGTATACATATTGGGTTT 796136 G2 68 TCGATAGTGAAGGGAAA 796137 G3 69TCGCTGCGTAAAGGAGAAA 796138 G4 70 TGTAGTGTGAAGGGAAA 796139 G5 71TGTCGTCGCAAGAGAGAG 796140 G6 72 CTACGACTGCAAGGGAAA 796141 G7 73CTCTACGCTCA 796142 G8 74 TAGCTCTATCA 796143 G9 75 TATAGACATCA 796144 G1076 TCACTCATACA 796145 G11 77 CTAGTCACTCAAGGGAAA 796146 H1 78TGTGAGTAGTTTGGGTTT 796147 H2 79 TGTCACACGAAGGGAAA 796148 H3 80CTGTGCGTCGAAGGGAAA 796149 H4 81 TAGTGTAGATTCGC 796150 H5 82TCGAGCTCTCTCGC 796151 H6 83 ATCACGTGCGTCGC 796152 H7 84 CAGACGTCTGTCGC796153 H8 85 TATCACTCAGTCGC 796154 H9 86 TGCTATAGACTTGGGTTT 796155 H1087 CAGTACTGCGTTGGGTTT 796156 H11 88 CGACAGCGAGAACACACAAA 796157 A12- 89TATGCTAGTAA (negative 796158 H12 control)

TABLE 3 Plate-ID Sequence of SEQ ID NO Plate Plate-ID  1 ACGAGTGCGT796159  2 ACGCTCGACA 796160  3 AGACGCACTC 796161  4 AGCACTGTAG 796162  5ATCAGACACG 796163  6 ATATCGCGAG 796164  7 CGTGTCTCTA 796165  8CTCGCGTGTC 796166  9 TGATACGTCT 796167 10 CATAGTAGTG 796168 11CGAGAGATAC 796169 12 ATACGACGTA 796170 13 TCACGTACTA 796171 14CGTCTAGTAC 796172 15 TCTACGTAGC 796173 16 TGTACTACTC 796174 17CGTAGACTAG 796175 18 TACGAGTATG 796176 19 TACTCTCGTG 796177 20TAGAGACGAG 796178 21 TCGTCGCTCG 796179 22 ACATACGCGT 796180 23ACGCGAGTAT 796181 24 ACTACTATGT 796182 25 ACTGTACAGT 796183 26AGACTATACT 796184 27 AGCGTCGTCT 796185 28 AGTACGCTAT 796186 29ATAGAGTACT 796187 30 CACGCTACGT 796188 31 CAGTAGACGT 796189 32CGACGTGACT 796190 33 TACACACACT 796191 34 TACACGTGAT 796192 35TACAGATCGT 796193 36 TACGCTGTCT 796194 37 TAGTGTAGAT 796195 38TCGATCACGT 796196 39 TCGCACTAGT 796197 40 TCTAGCGACT 796198 41TCTATACTAT 796199 42 TGACGTATGT 796200 43 TGTGAGTAGT 796201 44ACAGTATATA 796202 45 ACGCGATCGA 796203 46 ACTAGCAGTA 796204 47AGCTCACGTA 796205 48 AGTATACATA 796206 49 AGTCGAGAGA 796207 50AGTGCTACGA 796208 51 CGATCGTATA 796209 52 CGCAGTACGA 796210 53CGCGTATACA 796211 54 CGTACAGTCA 796212 55 CGTACTCAGA 796213 56CTACGCTCTA 796214 57 CTATAGCGTA 796215 58 TACGTCATCA 796216 59TAGTCGCATA 796217 60 TATATATACA 796218

TABLE 4 Cloning primers seq id no DESCRIPTION sequence Clon_PacIACTGTTAATTAA(sample-ID) (SEQ ID NO: 796588) Clon_AscIATTAGGCGCGCC(sample-ID) (SEQ ID NO: 796589) Clon_FseIATTAGGCCGGCC(sample-ID) (SEQ ID NO: 796590) Clon_AsiSIATTAGCGATCGC(sample-ID) (SEQ ID NO: 796591) K_NheIa_DHERACGTGCTAGCAGTTCCAGATTTCAACTGCTCATCAGA (SEQ ID NO: 796374) K_Xho1d_DHFRACGTCTCGAGGATAGAAGTTATTCAGCAGGCACACAACA (SEQ ID NO: 796375)L_XhoI_PspXI_DHFR ACTTGCTCGAGTCTGCYTTCCARGCMACTGT (SEQ ID NO: 796376)L_NheI_DHFR AGTCGCTAGCCGCRTACTTGTTGTTGCTYTGTTTG (SEQ ID NO: 796377)G_EcoRI_DHER AGTCGAATTCCACGACACCGTCACCGGTT (SEQ ID NO: 796378)G_SacII_DHFR ATTACCGCGGGGAAGGTGTGCACGCCG (SEQ ID NO: 796379)G_XhoI_PspXI_Lonza ACGTCTCGAGGGTGCCAGGGGGAAGACCGATG (SEQ ID NO: 796380)G_AgeI_Lonza ACTGACCGGTTCGGGGAAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGGCA (SEQ ID NO: 796381)G_EcoRI_Lonza TGCAGAATTCCACGACACCGTCACCG (SEQ ID NO: 796382)G_ApaI_Lonza TGTAGGGCCCTGAGTTCCACGACACCGTC (SEQ ID NO: 796383)L_XmaI_Lonza TGATCCCGGGATAGAAGTCACTKATSAGRCACACYAGTGTGG(SEQ ID NO: 796384) L_BstEII_LonzaTGCAGGTCACCGCTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCACTKATSAGR (SEQ ID NO: 796385)L_XhoI_PspXI_v2_Lonza TGATGCTCGAGTCTGCYTTCCARGCMACTGTC (SEQ IDNO: 796386) K_XmaI_Lonza TAGTCCCGGGGATAGAAGTTATTCAGCAGGCACAC (SEQID NO: 796387) *Cloning forward primers start with a 5′ flankingrestriction site and end with sample-ID sequences on the 3′ end. Thisenables cloning primers to discriminate between sequences with differentwell origins and selectively amplify amplicons with specific sample-IDsequences. Therefore, there are multiple cloning forward primers, eachspecific for particular sample-ID(s). The 3′ sequences of the cloningforward primer are complementary to the well- ID and are provided inTable 5. Primers with names starting with ″Clon″ are the forwardprimers. Primers with names starting with ″K″, ″L″ or ″G″ are thereverse primers that are constant region specific for kappa, lambda andgamma chains respectively. The name of the reverse primers also denotethe restriction site that the primer will incorporate. Finally,″DHFR″ or ″Lonza″ denotes whether the constant region primers are forthe vector set pcDNA3.3 and pOptivec or Lonza vectors pEE12.4 and pEE6.4respectively, with constant region inserts added in.

TABLE 5 Cloning Primers Well-Specific Sequence SEQ Well Sequence ID NOA1 GGTGCTCGATTTAGACGTCTCATCAG 796219 A2 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGACTCATCTACAG796220 A3 GTGCTCGATTTAGAGAGCGTCACAG 796221 A4 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGAGTAGTGATCA796222 A5 ACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGATAGATAGACA 796223 A6CGGTGCTCGATTTAGATCTACTGACAG 796224 A7 CTCGATTTAGCACGTGTCGCA 796225 A8CGGTGCTCGATTTAGCATACTCTACA 796226 A9 CGATTTAGCGAGACGCGCA 796227 A10TGCTCGATTTAGCGTCGATCTCA 796228 A11 GTGCTCGATTTAGCTACGACTGCA 796229 B1GACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTAGTGTAGATAG 796230 B2 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTCTAGCGACTAG796231 B3 ACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGTGAGTAGTAG 796232 B4CGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGACAGTATATAA 796233 B5 GGTGCTCGATTTAGAGCTCACGTAAG796234 B6 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTCGATAGTGAA 796235 B7 TGCTCGATTTAGTCGCTGCGTAAG796236 B8 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGAGTCAGTAA 796237 B9CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGTAGTGTGAA 796238 B10 GCTCGATTTAGTGTCGTCGCAA 796239 B11GTGCTCGATTTAGACGACAGCTCA 796240 C1 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTACACGTGATT 796241 C2CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTACAGATCGTT 796242 C3 GACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTAGTGTAGATTT796243 C4 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTCTAGCGACTTT 796244 C5 GCTCGATTTAGACGCGATCGAA796245 C6 GGTGCTCGATTTAGAGCTCACGTATT 796246 C7 GGTGCTCGATTTAGAGTGCTACGAA796247 C8 GGTGCTCGATTTAGTCTGACGTCAA 796248 C9 GGTGCTCGATTTAGACGTCTCATCAA796249 C10 ACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTATAGACATCAA 796250 C11GGTGCTCGATTTAGAGTGAGCTCGT 796251 D1 GGTGCTCGATTTAGATCGTCTGTGT 796252 D2GGTGCTCGATTTAGCACACGATAGT 796253 D3 GCTCGATTTAGCTGCGTCACGA 796254 D4CCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTAGCATACTGT 796255 D5 GACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTATCTGATAGT796256 D6 GTGCTCGATTTAGTGACATCTCGC 796257 D7 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGATAGAGCGT796258 D8 GCTCGATTTAGTCACGCGAGAAA 796259 D9 GGTGCTCGATTTAGACACATACGCA796260 D10 CCGGTGCTCGATTTAGACTAGCAGTAA 796261 D11TGCTCGATTTAGCGCAGTACGAA 796262 E1 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGAGTCAGTAA 796263 E2CGGTGCTCGATTTAGACTCATCTACAG 796264 E3 GCTCGATTTAGACTCGCGCACA 796265 E4GTGCTCGATTTAGAGAGCGTCACAG 796266 E5 GGTGCTCGATTTAGAGCGACTAGCA 796267 E6CGGTGCTCGATTTAGATCTACTGACAA 796268 E7 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGCATACTCTACA 796269E8 GTGCTCGATTTAGTCGAGCTCTCAG 796270 E9 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGAGAGAGTGTGT 796271E10 GGTGCTCGATTTAGATCGTAGCAGA 796272 E11 GCTCGATTTAGCACTCGCACGT 796273F1 TGCTCGATTTAGCAGACGTCTGAA 796274 F2 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGCTCGATATAGT 796275F3 GGTGCTCGATTTAGTCTGATCGAGA 796276 F4 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTACACACACTT 796277F5 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTACGTCATCA 796278 F6 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGCTACGCTCTAA 796279F7 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTAGTCGCATAA 796280 F8 GGTGCTCGATTTAGCGATCGTATAA 796281F9 GGTGCTCGATTTAGCGCGTATACAA 796282 F10 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGCTACGCTCTAA796283 F11 GCTCGATTTAGTCACGCGAGAAG 796284 G1ACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGAGTATACATAT 796285 G2 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTCGATAGTGAA796286 G3 GCTCGATTTAGTCGCTGCGTAAA 796287 G4 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGTAGTGTGAA796288 G5 GCTCGATTTAGTGTCGTCGCAA 796289 G6 GTGCTCGATTTAGCTACGACTGCA796290 G7 GGTGCTCGATTTAGCTCTACGCTCA 796291 G8CCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTAGCTCTATCA 796292 G9 ACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTATAGACATCAG796293 G10 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTCACTCATACA 796294 G11CGGTGCTCGATTTAGCTAGTCACTCA 796295 H1 CGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGTGAGTAGTTT 796296H2 GGTGCTCGATTTAGTGTCACACGAA 796297 H3 GCTCGATTTAGCTGTGCGTCGA 796298 H4GACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTAGTGTAGATTC 796299 H5 GGTGCTCGATTTAGTCGAGCTCTCTC796300 H6 TGCTCGATTTAGATCACGTGCGT 796301 H7 GTGCTCGATTTAGCAGACGTCTGTC796302 H8 CCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTATCACTCAGT 796303 H9ACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTGCTATAGACT 796304 H10 GGTGCTCGATTTAGCAGTACTGCGT 796305H11 GCTCGATTTAGCGACAGCGAGA 796306

TABLE 6 SEQ ID DESCRIP- NO TION SEQUENCE For kappa 796307 IgKC_v3CAGATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC For Lambda 796308 IgLC_v5 CTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC796309 IgLC_v6 TCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC 796310 IgLC_v7 GCTCCCGGGTAGAAGTC 796311IgLC_v8 AGTGTGGCCTTGTTGG For gamma 796312 IgHGC_v10 GCCAGGGGGAAGACCGATG796313 IgHGC_v11 CAGGGGGAAGACCGATG 796314 IgHGC_v13 AAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGGC796315 IgHGC_v15 GAAGACCGATGGGCCCTTGG 796316 IgHGC_v16AAGACCGATGGGCCCTTG 796317 Adaptor_v1 G 796318 Adaptor_v2 GGGGGAdaptor_v3 rGrGrG 796319 Univ_seq_2 AACGCGTGACGAGAGACTGACAG 796320Univ_seq_4 TTGTTGCGTTCCTAGCCGCTATAG 796321 Univ_seq_5CTCTACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAG 796322 Univ_seq_e CCGTCGGTCGGCAGTG Kappalight chain specific 796323 IgKC_v4 ATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC 796324 K_GSP1GTGCTGTCCTTGCTGTCCTGCT 796325 K_GSP1c AGCAGGCACACAACAGAG 796326 K_GSP1eTTGTGTTTCTCGTAGTCTGCTTTGC 796327 K_GSP1f TCTCCCCTGTTGAAGCTCTTTGTG 796328IgLC_v5 CTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC 796329 L_GSP1 ATCTGCCTTCCAGGCCACTGTC 796330L_GSP1c CTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC 796331 L_GSP1d ACRGCTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC 796332L_GSP1f TCCACGGTGCTCCCTTCAT 796333 L_GSP1g GGCCGCRTACTTGTTGTTGC 796334GSP1h GCCTTCCAGGCCACTGTCAC 796335 L_GSP1i CTGCCTTCCAGGCCACTGTC 796336L_GSP1j CTCCACGGTGCTCCCTTCA 796337 L_GSP1k GCTCCCTTCATGCGTGACC 796338L_GSP11 TCTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC 796339 L_GSP1m GGGGCCACTGTCTTCTCCA 796340L_GSP1n CTTCTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCT 796341 L_GSP10 ATCTGCCTTCCAGGCCACTGT796342 L_GSP1x CTTYTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC 796343 L_GSP1yGCTTYTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC 796344 IgHGC_v13 AAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGGC 796345G_GSP1c TTCCACGACACCGTCAC 796346 G_GSP1d CACGCCGCTGGTCAG 796347 G_GSP1gGCTGCTGAGGGAGTAGAGTCCTGA 796348 G_GSP1h TCTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGCT 796349G_GSP1k GCTGGAGGGCACGGTCAC 796350 G_GSP1 TCTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGCTG 796351G_GSP1m TCTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGCT 796352 G_GSP1n GACTGTAGGACAGCCGGGAAGG796353 G_GSP10 ACCACGCTGCTGAGGGAGTAG 796354 G_GSP1pTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGCTG 796355 G_GSP1q TGAGTTCCACGACACCGTCAC 796356G_GSP1t GAGTTCCACGACACCGTCACC Kappa specific 796358 K_GSP2ATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC 796359 K_GSP2v2a ATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC 796360K_GSP2v2b TGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC 796361 K_GSP2v2d CGGAAGATGAAGACAGATGGT796362 K_GSP2v2e GCAGTTCCAGATTTCAACTG 796363 K_GSP2v2f ATGGTGCAGCCACAGTT796364 K_GSP2v2c CAGATTTCAACTGCTCATCAGAT 796365 K_GSP2v2gTCAGATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC Lambda specific 796366 L_GSP2 CTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC796367 L_GSP2v2c AGGGYGGGAACAGAGTGAC 796368 L_GSP2v2 CTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC796369 L_GSP2v2d GAGGAGGGYGGGAACAGAGTGAC Gamma specific 796370G_GSP2v2c1 GCCAGGGGGAAGACCG 796371 G_GSP2v2c2 GGAAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGG796372 G_GSP2b GGAAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGGCAG 796373 G_GSP2 AAGTAGTCCTTGACCAGGC

TABLE 7 Plate-ID SEQ ID NO TATGCTAGTA 796427 TCACGCGAGA 796428TCGATAGTGA 796429 TCGCTGCGTA 796430 TCTGACGTCA 796431 TGAGTCAGTA 796432TGTAGTGTGA 796433 TGTCACACGA 796434 TGTCGTCGCA 796435 ACACATACGC 796436ACAGTCGTGC 796437 ACATGACGAC 796438 ACGACAGCTC 796439 ACGTCTCATC 796440ACTCATCTAC 796441 ACTCGCGCAC 796442 AGAGCGTCAC 796443 AGCGACTAGC 796444AGTAGTGATC 796445 AGTGACACAC 796446 AGTGTATGTC 796447 ATAGATAGAC 796448ATATAGTCGC 796449 ATCTACTGAC 796450 CACGTAGATC 796451 CACGTGTCGC 796452CATACTCTAC 796453 CGACACTATC 796454 CGAGACGCGC 796455 CGTATGCGAC 796456CGTCGATCTC 796457 CTACGACTGC 796458 CTAGTCACTC 796459 CTCTACGCTC 796460CTGTACATAC 796461 TAGACTGCAC 796462 TAGCGCGCGC 796463 TAGCTCTATC 796464TATAGACATC 796465 TATGATACGC 796466 TCACTCATAC 796467 TCATCGAGTC 796468TCGAGCTCTC 796469 TCGCAGACAC 796470 TCTGTCTCGC 796471 TGAGTGACGC 796472TGATGTGTAC 796473 TGCTATAGAC 796474 TGCTCGCTAC 796475 ACGTGCAGCG 796476ACTCACAGAG 796477 AGACTCAGCG 796478 AGAGAGTGTG 796479 AGCTATCGCG 796480AGTCTGACTG 796481 AGTGAGCTCG 796482 ATAGCTCTCG 796483 ATCACGTGCG 796484ATCGTAGCAG 796485 ATCGTCTGTG 796486 ATGTACGATG 796487 ATGTGTCTAG 796488CACACGATAG 796489 CACTCGCACG 796490 CAGACGTCTG 796491 CAGTACTGCG 796492CGACAGCGAG 796493 CGATCTGTCG 796494 CGCGTGCTAG 796495 CGCTCGAGTG 796496CGTGATGACG 796497 CTATGTACAG 796498 CTCGATATAG 796499 CTCGCACGCG 796500CTGCGTCACG 796501 CTGTGCGTCG 796502 TAGCATACTG 796503 TATACATGTG 796504TATCACTCAG 796505 TATCTGATAG 796506 TCGTGACATG 796507 TCTGATCGAG 796508TGACATCTCG 796509 TGAGCTAGAG 796510 TGATAGAGCG 796511 TGCGTGTGCG 796512TGCTAGTCAG 796513 TGTATCACAG 796514 TGTGCGCGTG 796515

TABLE 8 Sample-ID SEQ ID NO ACGAGTGCGT 796516 TAGACTGCAC 796517TAGCGCGCGC 796518 TCATCGAGTC 796519 TCGCAGACAC 796520 TCTGTCTCGC 796521TGATACGTCT 796522 TGAGTGACGC 796523 TGCTCGCTAC 796524 ACGTGCAGCG 796525ACTCACAGAG 796526 AGACTCAGCG 796527 AGCTATCGCG 796528 AGTCTGACTG 796529ATAGCTCTCG 796530 CATAGTAGTG 796531 CGATCTGTCG 796532 CGCGTGCTAG 796533CGCTCGAGTG 796534 CGAGAGATAC 796535 TGAGCTAGAG 796536 ATACGACGTA 796537TGCGTGTGCG 796538 TGCTAGTCAG 796539 TGTATCACAG 796540 TGTGCGCGTG 796541TCACGTACTA 796542 CGTCTAGTAC 796543 TCTACGTAGC 796544 TGTACTACTC 796545ACGCTCGACA 796546 ACGACTACAG 796547 CGTAGACTAG 796548 TACTCTCGTG 796549TAGAGACGAG 796550 TCGTCGCTCG 796551 ACATACGCGT 796552 ACGCGAGTAT 796553ACTGTACAGT 796554 AGACGCACTC 796555 AGACTATACT 796556 AGCGTCGTCT 796557AGTACGCTAT 796558 ATAGAGTACT 796559 CACGCTACGT 796560 CAGTAGACGT 796561CGACGTGACT 796562 AGCACTGTAG 796563 TACGCTGTCT 796564 TCGATCACGT 796565TCGCACTAGT 796566 TCTATACTAT 796567 ATCAGACACG 796568 AGTCGAGAGA 796569CGTACAGTCA 796570 CGTACTCAGA 796571 ATATCGCGAG 796572 CTATAGCGTA 796573TATATATACA 796574 CGTGTCTCTA 796575 ACAGTCGTGC 796576 CTCGCGTGTC 796577AGTGACACAC 796578 ATATAGTCGC 796579 CACGTAGATC 796580 CGACACTATC 796581CTGTACATAC 796582

TABLE 9 Primers to ligate on adaptors for XL+ sequencing seq id noDESCRIPTION sequence 796388 5LIB-LA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAGCGTATCGCCTCCCTCGCGCCAT 796389 5LIB-LB CCTATCCCCTGTGTGCCTTGGCAGTCTCAGCGTATCGCCTCCCTCGCGCCAT 796390 3LIB-LA CCATCTCATCCCTGCGTGTCTCCGACTCAGCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT CA 796391 3LIB-LB CCTATCCCCTGTGTGCCTTGGCAGTCTCAGCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT CA

TABLE 10 3' primers for other human genes seq id no DESCRIPTION sequencemu constant region specific 796392 mu GSP1 CTCTCAGGACTGATGGGAAGCC 796393mu GSP2 CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT CAGGGGAATTCTCACAGGAGAC GAGG alphaconstant region specific 796394 alpha GSP1 ATTCGTGTAGTGCTTCACGTGGC796395 alpha GSP2 CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTC AGCTCAGCGGGAAGACCTTGGGTCR alpha constant region specific 796396 TR alphacgtttgcacatgcaaagtcagatt GSP1a 796397 TR alpha CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCAGSP2b Gtcggtgaataggcagacagact tg TRC beta constant region specific796398 TR beta CCTATCCTGGGTCCACTCGTCA GSP1 796399 TR betaCTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCA GSP2 GCTGCTTCTGATGGCTCAAACACA

TABLE 11 3' primers for mouse genes seq id no DESCRIPTION sequencemu constant region specific 796400 mouse_mu_ CTGAACCTTCAAGGATGCTCTTGGGSP1 796401 mouse_mu_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTCA GSP2GGGAAGACATTTGGGAAGGACTGA CTC alpha constant region specific 796402mouse_alpha_ TCTCCTTCTGGGCACTCGACAG GSP1 796403 mouse_alpha_CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT GSP2 CAGGGGAGTGTCAGTGGGTAGA TGGTG gamma constantregion specific 796404 mo_g12b_ AGGGGACAGTCACTGAGCTGCT GSP1d 796405mo_g2ac_ TCGAGGTTACAGTCACTGAGCT GSP1d GCT 796406 mo_g3_TGGAGGGTACAGTCACCAAGCT GSP1d GCT 796407 mo_g12_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTGSP2d CAGGGGCCAGTGGATAGACHGA TGG 796408 mo_g3_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTGSP2d CAGGGGACCAAGGGATAGACAG ATGG 796409 mo_g12_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTGSP2e CAGCTGGACAGGGATCCAGAGT TCC 796410 mo_g3_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTGSP2e CAGCTGGACAGGGCTCCATAGT TCC kappa constant region specific 796411mouse_kappa_ GAAGTTGATGTCTTGTGAGTGG GSP1 CCT 796412 mouse_kappa_CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT GSP2 CAGTGCTCACTGGATGGTGGGA A lambda constantregion specific 796413 mouse_lambda_ ACTCTTCTCCACAGTGTCCCCT GSP1a TCATG796414 mouse_lambda_ ACTCTTCTCCACAGTGTGACCT GSP1b TCATG 796415mouse_lambda_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT GSP2a CAGAGAGGAAGGTGGAAACASG GTGA796416 mouse_lambda_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCT GSP2b CAGAGGGGAAGGTGGAAACATGGTGA TCR alpha constant region specific 796417 mo_TRA_TTGAAGATATCTTGGCAGGTGAA GSP1b GCTT 796418 mouse_TRA_CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTC GSP2 AGCACAGCAGGTTCTGGGTTCTG G TRC beta constantregion specific 796419 mouse_TRB_ GAAAGCCCATGGAACTGCACTTG GSP1 796420mouse_TRB_ CTATGCGCCTTGCCAGCCCGCTC GSP2 AGGGGTGGAGTCACATTTCTCAG ATCC*lambda GSP1a and GSP1b are to be mixed 50:50, lambda GSP2a and lambdaGSP2b are also to be mixed 50:50 to amplify all lambda constant regionalleles that are found in IMGT. All the gamma GSP1ds are also to bemixed equally to amplify all gamma 1, 2a, 2b, 2c and 3 constant regionalleles. gamma GSP2ds are also to be mixed 50:50, and gamma GSP2es arealso to be mixed 50:50 to amplify all gamma 1, 2a, 2b, 2c and 3 constantregions alleles that are found in IMGT database.

TABLE 12 Plate to patient referencing PlateID Patient 2 B Staph 3 BStaph 4 B Staph 5 B Staph 7 Lung Adeno 8 Lung Adeno 9 Lung Adeno 10 LungAdeno 11 360 CCP + RA 12 360 CCP + RA 13 360 CCP + RA 14 361 Staph 15361 Staph 16 361 Staph 17 361 Staph 18 368 CCP + RF + RA 19 368 CCP +RF + RA 21 368 CCP + RF + RA 22 368 CCP + RF + RA 26 372 CCP + RF + RA27 372 CCP + RF + RA 40 375 CCP + RF+ 41 375 CCP + RF+ 43 375 CCP + RF+44 369 CCP + RF + RA 46 372 CCP + RF + RA 47 372 CCP + RF + RA 48 375CCP + RF+ 49 Flu 51 Flu 52 Flu 53 Flu

TABLE 13 Plate Identification Plate Region Regular SEQ ID ID ExpressionNO: 1 ACGAGTGCGT 796159 2 ACGCTCGACA 796160 3 AGACGCACTC 796161 4AGCACTGTAG 796162 5 ATCAGACACG 796163 6 ATATCGCGAG 796164 7 CGTGTCTCTA796165 8 CTCGCGTGTC 796166 9 TGATACGTCT 796167 10 CATAGTAGTG 796168 11CGAGAGATAC 796169 12 ATACGACGTA 796170 13 TCACGTACTA 796171 14CGTCTAGTAC 796172 15 TCTACGTAGC 796173 16 TGTACTACTC 796174 17CGTAGACTAG 796175 18 TACGAGTATG 796176 19 TACTCTCGTG 796177 20TAGAGACGAG 796178 21 TCGTCGCTCG 796179 22 ACATACGCGT 796180 23ACGCGAGTAT 796181 24 ACTACTATGT 796182 25 ACTGTACAGT 796183 26AGACTATACT 796184 27 AGCGTCGTCT 796185 28 AGTACGCTAT 796186 29ATAGAGTACT 796187 30 CACGCTACGT 796188 31 CAGTAGACGT 796189 32CGACGTGACT 796190 33 TACACACACT 796191 34 TACACGTGAT 796192 35TACAGATCGT 796193 36 TACGCTGTCT 796194 37 TAGTGTAGAT 796195 38TCGATCACGT 796196 39 TCGCACTAGT 796197 40 TCTAGCGACT 796198 41TCTATACTAT 796199 42 TGACGTATGT 796200 43 TGTGAGTAGT 796201 44ACAGTATATA 796202 45 ACGCGATCGA 796203 46 ACTAGCAGTA 796204 47AGCTCACGTA 796205 48 AGTATACATA 796206 49 AGTCGAGAGA 796207 50AGTGCTACGA 796208 51 CGATCGTATA 796209 52 CGCAGTACGA 796210 53CGCGTATACA 796211 54 CGTACAGTCA 796212 55 CGTACTCAGA 796213 56CTACGCTCTA 796214 57 CTATAGCGTA 796215 58 TACGTCATCA 796216 59TAGTCGCATA 796217 60 TATATATACA 796218

TABLE 14 Sample Identification Sample Region Regular SEQ ID IDExpression NO:  1, 31 ACGTCTCATC 796440  2, 46 ACTCATCTAC 796441  3, 48AGAGCGTCAC 796443  4 AGTAGTGATC 796445  5 ATAGATAGAC 796448  6, 50ATCTACTGAC 796450  7 CACGTGTCGC 796452  8, 51 CATACTCTAC 796453  9CGAGACGCGC 796455 10 CGTCGATCTC 796457 11, 72 CTACGACTGC 79645812, 81, 25 TAGTGTAGAT 796195 13, 26 TCTAGCGACT 796198 14, 78 TGTGAGTAGT796201 15 ACAGTATATA 796202 16, 28 AGCTCACGTA 796205 17, 68 TCGATAGTGA796429 18, 69 TCGCTGCGTA 796430 19, 45 TGAGTCAGTA 796432 20, 70TGTAGTGTGA 796433 21, 71 TGTCGTCGCA 796435 22 ACGACAGCTC 796439 23TACACGTGAT 796192 24 TACAGATCGT 796193 27 ACGCGATCGA 796203 29AGTGCTACGA 796208 30 TCTGACGTCA 796431 75, 32 TATAGACATC 796465 33AGTGAGCTCG 796482 34 ATCGTCTGTG 796486 35 CACACGATAG 796489 36CTGCGTCACG 796501 37 TAGCATACTG 796503 38 TATCTGATAG 796506 39TGACATCTCG 796509 40 TGATAGAGCG 796511 66, 41 TCACGCGAGA 796428 42ACACATACGC 796436 43 ACTAGCAGTA 796204 44 CGCAGTACGA 796210 47ACTCGCGCAC 796442 49 AGCGACTAGC 796444 52, 82 TCGAGCTCTC 796469 53AGAGAGTGTG 796479 54 ATCGTAGCAG 796485 55 CACTCGCACG 796490 56, 84CAGACGTCTG 796491 57 CTCGATATAG 796499 58 TCTGATCGAG 796508 59TACACACACT 796191 60 TACGTCATCA 796216 65, 61 CTACGCTCTA 796214 62TAGTCGCATA 796217 63 CGATCGTATA 796209 64 CGCGTATACA 796211 67AGTATACATA 796206 73 CTCTACGCTC 796460 74 TAGCTCTATC 796464 76TCACTCATAC 796467 77 CTAGTCACTC 796459 79 TGTCACACGA 796434 80CTGTGCGTCG 796502 83 ATCACGTGCG 796484 85 TATCACTCAG 796505 86TGCTATAGAC 796474 87 CAGTACTGCG 796492 88 CGACAGCGAG 796493 89TATGCTAGTA 796427

TABLE 15 Sample Identification Sample Region Regular SEQ ID IDExpression NO:  1, 31 ACGTCTCATCAAGGAAGGAAGG+ 796598  2, 46ACTCATCTACAGG+AA+GG+ 796599  3, 48 AGAGCGTCACAGAGAGAAGG+ 796600  6, 50ATCTACTGACAACACACAAGG+ 796601  8, 51 CATACTCTACAACACACAA+GG+ 79660211, 72 CTACGACTGCAAGG+AA+GG+ 796603 12, 81, 25 TAGTGTAGATT+GG+TT+GG+796604 12, 81 TAGTGTAGATTCGCGG+ 796605 13, 26 TCTAGCGACTT+GG+TT+GG+796606 14, 78 TGTGAGTAGTT+GG+TT+GG+ 796607 16, 28 AGCTCACGTATTGG+TT+GG+796608 17, 68 TCGATAGTGAAGG+AA+GG+ 796609 18, 69 TCGCTGCGTAA+GGAGAA+GG+796610 19, 45 TGAGTCAGTAAGG+AA+GG+ 796611 20, 70 TGTAGTGTGAAGG+AA+GG+796612 21, 71 TGTCGTCGCAAGAGAGAGG+ 796613 75, 32 TATAGACATCAACACACAA+GG+796614 66, 41 TCACGCGAGAAAGG+AA+GG+ 796615 52, 82 TCGAGCTCTCTCGCGG+796616 56, 84 CAGACGTCTGTCGCGG+ 796617 65, 61 CTACGCTCTAAGG+AA+GG+796618

TABLE 16 Constant region insert sequences for DHFRvectors pcDNA3.3 and pOptivec Seq ID no Description Sequence 796424IGHG1-G1m3 TAAGCTTACTGATAAGGCGC constant region GCCGCGATCGCGCCTCCACCinsert sequence AAGGACCCCTCTGTCTTCCC (restriction CCTGGCACCCTCTTCGAAGAsites BstBI, GCACCTCTGGGGACACAGCA EcoRI, SacII, GCCCTGGGCTGCCTGGTCAABbvCI for GGACTACTTCCCCGAACCAG splicing in TGACAGTGAGTTGGAATTCAvariable region GGCGCCCTGACCAGCGGCGT introduced via GCACACCTTCCCcGcGGTCCsilent TTCAGTCTTCAGGACTCTAC mutations) TCCCTCAGCAGCGTGGTGACCGTGCCCTCCAGCAGCTTGG ACACCCAGACCTACATCTGC AACGTGAATCACAAGCCCAGCAACACCAAGGTGGACAAGA GAGTTGAGCCCAAATCTTGT GACAAAACTCACACATGCCCACCGTGCCCAGCACCTGAAC TCCTGGAGGGACCGTCAGTC TTCCTCTTCCTCCCAAAACCCAAGGACACCCTCATGATCT CCCGGACCCTAGAGGCCACA TGCGTGGTGGTGGACGTGAGCCACGAAGACCCCGAGGTCA AGTTCAACTGGTACGTGGAC GGCGTGGAGGTGCATAATGCCAAGACAAAGCCTCGGGAGG AGCAGTACAACAGCACTTAC CGTGTGGTCAGCGTCCTCACCGTCCTGCACCAGGACTGGC TGAATGGCAAGGAGTACAAG TGCAAGGTCTCCAACAAAGCCCTCCCAGCCCCCATCGAGA AAACCATCTCCAAAGCCAAA GGGCAGCCCCGAGAACCACAGGTCTACACCCTGCCCCCAT CCCGGGAGGAGATGACCAAG AACCAGGTCAGCCTGACCTGCCTGGTCAAAGGCTTCTATC CCAGCGACATCGCCGTGGAG TGGGAGAGCAATGGGCAGCCGGAGAACAACTACAAGACCA CGCCTCCCGTGCTGGACTCC GACGGCTCCTTCTTCCTCTATAGCAAGCTCACCGTGGACA AGAGCAGGTGGCAGCAGGGG AACGTCTTTTCATGCTCCGTGATGCATGAGGCTCTGCACA ACCACTACACACAGAAGAGC CTCTCCCTGTCCCCAGGTAAATGATAATGTACAACTGACT GAGGATCCT 796425 IGKC-Km3 TAAGCTTACTGACTAGGCCGconstant region GCCTTAATTAACGTACGGTG insert sequenceGCTGCACCATCTGTCTTCAT (restriction CTTCCCTCCATCTGATGAGC sites NheI, XhoIAGTTGAAATCTGGAACTGCT for splicing in AGCGTCGTGTGCCTGCTGAAvariable region TAACTTTTATCCTCGAGAGG introduced via CCAAAGTGCAGTGGAAGGTGsilent GATAACGCCCTCCAATCCGG mutations) TAACTCCCAGGAGTCCGTCACAGAGCAGGACAGCAAGGAC AGCACCTACAGCCTGAGCAG CACCCTGACACTGAGCAAAGCAGACTACGAGAAACACAAA GTCTACGCCTGCGAAGTCAC CCATCAGGGCCTGAGCTCCCCCGTCACAAAGAGCTTCAAC AGGGGAGAGTGTTGATAAAT CGATACTGACTGAGGATCCT 796426IGLC-Mcg⁻Ke⁻Oz⁻ TAAGCTTACTGACTAGGCCG constant GCCTTAATTAAGGTCAGCCTregion insert AAGGCTGCCCCCAGCGTCAC sequence TCTGTTCCCTCCCTCCTCTG(restriction AGGAGCTTCAAGCCAACAAG sites Bsu36I, XhoI,GCCACACTGGTGTGTCTCAT PspXI, NheI for CAGTGACTTCTACCCCGGAG splicing inCCGTGACAGTGGCTTGGAAA variable GCAGACTCGAGCCCCGTCAA regionGGCTGGAGTGGAGACCACCA introduced via CACCTTCCAAACAAAGCAACsilent mutations) AACAAGTACGCAGCTAGCAG CTACCGCAGCCTGACCCCTGAGCAGTGGAAGTCCCACAGA AGCTACTCCTGCCAGGTCAC ACATGAAGGGAGCACCGTGGAGAAGACAGTGGCCCCCACA GAATGTTCATGATAAATCGA TACTGACTGAGGATCCT

TABLE 17 Constant region insert sequences for Lonza vectors seq id noDESCRIPTION sequence 796421 IGHG1-Glm3 constantAAGCTTGGCGCGCCTTAATTAAGCCAGCACAAAAGGCCCCAGTG region insert sequenceTGTTTCCCTTGGCACCCTCGAGCAAGAGTACATCTGGAGGTACA (restriction sitesGCTGCCTTGGGCTGTTTGGTGAAAGACTATTTCCCCGAACCGGT EcoRI, ApaI, AgeI,TACTGTCTCTTGGAATTCCGGGGCCCTCACCAGTGGTGTCCATA KpnI, XhoI for splicingCCTTTCCCGCGGTGCTTCAGAGTTCCGGTTTGTATTCCCTGTCA in variable regionAGTGTCGTGACGGTACCAAGTTCAAGTCTAGGCACCCAGACATA introduced via silentTATCTGTAACGTCAACCACAAGCCAAGCAACACCAAGGTTGACA mutations)AGCGGGTTGAACCTAAGTCCTGTGACAAGACCCATACCTGCCCCCCATGCCCCGCACCCGAGCTCCTCGGAGGGCCTTCCGTCTTTCTTTTCCCTCCCAAACCCAAGGACACTTTGATGATCTCAAGAACACCAGAAGTCACTTGCGTCGTGGTTGACGTGTCTCACGAAGATCCCGAAGTGAAGTTCAACTGGTACGTGGATGGGGTAGAGGTTCATAACGCCAAGACCAAACCCCGAGAGGAACAGTATAACTCCACCTATAGGGTAGTGTCCGTGCTCACCGTGCTCCACCAAGACTGGCTGAATGGCAAGGAATACAAGTGCAAGGTGAGTAATAAGGCACTGCCTGCACCCATTGAGAAGACAATATCTAAAGCAAAGGGACAGCCCAGAGAGCCCCAGGTTTATACTCTGCCACCTAGCAGAGAGGAAATGACTAAAAACCAGGTCAGCCTTACTTGTCTCGTAAAAGGCTTTTATCCAAGCGACATCGCTGTGGAGTGGGAATCAAATGGCCAACCTGAGAATAATTATAAGACTACACCTCCCGTCCTTGACTCAGACGGTTCCTTCTTCCTGTATAGCAAGCTCACCGTCGATAAAAGTCGGTGGCAACAGGGAAACGTGTTCTCATGCAGCGTCATGCACGAGGCCTTGCACAATCATTACACCCAGAAGTCTCTGTCCCTGAGCCCTGGAAAG TGATCA 796422IGKC-Km3 constant AAGCTTAATTAAGGCGCGCCGAACAGTGGCTGCTCCTTCCGTGTregion insert sequence TCATATTCCCCCCATCCGACGAGCAGCTTAAATCTGGGACTGCT(restriction sites AGCGTCGTGTGCCTGTTGAATAATTTTTATCCCCGGGAGGCTAAXmaI, EcoRI, BstEII, GGTACAGTGGAAGGTGGACAACGCCCTCCAATCAGGGAATTCCCDraIII for splicing in AGGAGTCGGTCACCGAACAGGACAGCAAGGACTCAACCTACTCTvariable region CTGTCATCCACTCTCACACTCAGCAAAGCCGACTATGAAAAACAintroduced via silent CAAAGTGTATGCTTGCGAGGTGACTCATCAAGGGCTCTCCAGTCmutations) CTGTGACTAAATCCTTCAACCGAGGCGAATGCTGATCA 796423IGLC-Mcg⁻Ke⁻Oz⁻ constant AAGCTTGGCGCGCCTTAATTAAGGCCAGCCTAAAGCCGCACCCAregion insert sequence GTGTGACCCTGTTTCCTCCCTCCTCTGAAGAGCTCCAGGCAAAC(restriction sites DraIII, XmaI,AAAGCTACTCTGGTGTGTCTTATTAGCGATTTCTATCCCGGGGCBstEII, PspXI for splicing inGGTGACCGTGGCTTGGAAGGCCGACTCGAGCCCAGTGAAGGCCGvariable region introduced viaGAGTGGAAACTACAACCCCTTCCAAACAGTCAAACAATAAATAC silent mutations)GCCGCTAGCAGCTATCTCTCTCTCACCCCAGAACAGTGGAAATCCCACAGGTCCTATTCTTGCCAGGTCACACACGAGGGGTCAACCGTTGAGAAGACTGTTGCCCCAACAGAGTGCAGCTGATCA

TABLE 18 All expressed antibodies SEQ Chain ID NO Antibody Type CloneV-GENE and allele J-GENE and allele D-GENE and allele LC1 Light K8B8IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 F chain LC1 Heavy G8B8 IGHV1-46*01 F, or IGHJ3*01F, or IGHD5-24*01 ORF chain IGHV1-46*03 F IGHJ3*02 F LC2 Light K8C11IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 F, or chain IGKJ4*01 F LC2 Heavy G8C11IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-25*01 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F LC3 LightK8D6 IGKV3-20*01 F IGKJ1*01 F chain LC3 Heavy G8D6 IGHV1-46*01 F, orIGHJ3*01 F, or IGHD5-24*01 ORF chain IGHV1-46*03 F IGHJ3*02 F LC5 LightK10G5 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ4*01 F chain LC5 Heavy G10G5 IGHV3-33*05 FIGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-13*01 F chain LC6 Light K8D6 IGKV3-20*01 F IGKJ1*01 Fchain LC6 Heavy G10H2 IGHV3-11*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-9*01 F chain LC7Light L8D9 IGLV2-8*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01 F or IGLJ3*02 FLC7 Heavy G8D9 IGHV3-53*02 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-17*01 F chain LC9 LightL10A1 IGLV10-54*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain LC9 Heavy G10A1 IGHV3-30*03 F, orIGHJ3*02 F IGHD2-2*01 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F LC10 Light K9C11 IGKV3-11*01F IGKJ4*01 F chain LC10 Heavy G9C11 IGHV3-33*01 F, or IGHJ6*02 FIGHD5-18*01 F chain IGHV3-33*06 F LC11 Light L10A6 IGLV2-14*01 FIGLJ3*02 F chain LC11 Heavy G10A6 IGHV3-21*01 F, or IGHJ4*02 FIGHD1-20*01 F chain IGHV3-21*04 F LC12 Light L9C9 IGLV2-14*01 F IGLJ3*02F chain LC12 Heavy G9C9 IGHV3-15*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD1-26*01 F chainLC13 Light L9B1 IGLV2-8*01 F IGLJ1*01 F chain LC13 Heavy G9B1IGHV3-66*01 F, or IGHJ3*02 F IGHD2-8*01 F chain IGHV3-66*04 F LC14 LightL9A1 IGLV2-14*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain LC14 Heavy G9A1 IGHV3-15*01 FIGHJ4*02 F IGHD1-26*01 F chain LC15 Light K10A9 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 Fchain LC15 Heavy G10A9 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-25*01 F chainIGHV3-30*18 F LC16 Light K10D2 IGKV3-20*01 F IGKJ2*02 F chain LC16 HeavyG10D2 IGHV3-15*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chain LC17 Light K8D5IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 F chain LC17 Heavy G8D5 IGHV3-30*03 F, orIGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chain IGHV3-30*18 F LC18 Light L10D5IGLV2-8*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain LC18 Heavy G10D5 IGHV3-53*02 F IGHJ4*02 FIGHD4-17*01 F chain Flu14 Light L51A6 IGLV3-25*03 F IGLJ1*01 F chainFlu14 Heavy G51A6 IGHV3-30-3*01 F IGHJ3*01 F IGHD1-14*01 ORF chain Flu15Light L51C4 IGLV3-1*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01 F or IGLJ3*02 FFlu15 Heavy G51C4 IGHV3-30*04 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD3-10*01 F chain Flu16Light K51G11 IGKV1-33*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-33*01 F Flu16Heavy G51G11 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ6*02 F IGHD4-17*01 F chainIGHV3-30*18 F Flu17 Light K49F7 IGKV1-33*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chainIGKV1D-33*01 F Flu17 Heavy G49F7 IGHV1-69*02 F, or IGHJ3*02 FIGHD3-22*01 F chain IGHV1-69*04 F Flu18 Light K51D7 IGKV1-33*01 F, orIGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-33*01 F Flu18 Heavy G51D7 IGHV3-30*03 F, orIGHJ6*02 F IGHD4-11*01 ORF chain IGHV3-30*18 F Flu19 Light K51D8IGKV1-39*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-39*01 F Flu19 Heavy G51D8IGHV3-49*04 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD3-22*01 F chain Flu20 Light K51G10IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ2*01 F chain Flu20 Heavy G51G10 IGHV3-30*03 F, orIGHJ6*01 F IGHD3-16*02 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F Flu21 Light L49A9IGLV3-21*02 F IGLJ3*02 F chain Flu21 Heavy G49A9 IGHV3-74*01 F IGHJ2*01F IGHD2-21*01 F chain Flu22 Light L52A6 IGLV2-14*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chainFlu22 Heavy G52A6 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ6*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chainIGHV3-30*18 F Flu23 Light K49F11 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 F chain Flu23Heavy G49F11 IGHV3-30*04 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-16*01 F chainIGHV3-30*08 F or IGHV3-30-3*01 F Flu24 Light K51C8 IGKV3-15*01 FIGKJ2*01 F chain Flu24 Heavy G51C8 IGHV3-30*14 F IGHJ5*02 F IGHD3-22*01F chain Flu25 Light K51H1 IGKV1-39*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chainIGKV1D-39*01 F Flu25 Heavy G51H1 IGHV3-9*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-13*01 Fchain Flu26 Light K52A2 IGKV1-33*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-33*01F Flu26 Heavy G52A2 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ6*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chainIGHV3-30*18 F Flu27 Light L49A11 IGLV2-14*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain Flu27Heavy G49A11 IGHV3-7*03 F IGHJ5*02 F IGHD3-3*01 F chain Flu28 LightL49C4 IGLV3-10*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01 F Flu28 Heavy G49C4IGHV3-43*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-17*01 F chain Flu29 Light L51H5IGLV3-27*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01 F Flu29 Heavy G51H5IGHV1-2*04 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD2-21*02 F chain Flu30 Light L52B8IGLV2-14*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain Flu30 Heavy G52B8 IGHV3-30*03 F, orIGHJ6*02 F IGHD4-17*01 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F Flu31 Light K49A5IGKV1-33*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-33*01 F Flu31 Heavy G49A5IGHV3-30-3*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD5-12*01 F chain Flu32 Light K49C11IGKV1-33*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-33*01 F Flu32 Heavy G49C11IGHV3-66*01 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-19*01 F chain IGHV3-66*04 F Flu33Light L51E9 IGLV2-14*01 F IGUJ3*02 F chain Flu33 Heavy G51E9 IGHV3-23*01F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-16*01 F chain Flu34 Light L52G10 IGLV2-14*01 FIGLJ3*02 F chain Flu34 Heavy G52G10 IGHV3-30-3*01 F IGHJ3*01 F, orIGHD6-19*01 F chain IGHJ3*02 F Flu35 Light L53F10 IGLV3-21*02 F IGLJ3*02F chain Flu35 Heavy G53F10 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ6*02 F IGHD3-3*01 Fchain IGHV3-30*18 F Flu36 Light L52G7 IGLV2-8*01 F IGUJ2*01 F, or chainIGLJ3*01 F or IGLJ3*02 F Flu36 Heavy G52G7 IGHV3-66*02 F IGHJ4*02 FIGHD2-15*01 F chain Flu37 Light K51E8 IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ1*01 F chainFlu37 Heavy G51E8 IGHV1-2*04 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD2-21*02 F chain Flu39Light K53G7 IGKV1-5*03 F IGKJ1*01 F chain Flu39 Heavy G53G7 IGHV1-46*01F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-9*01 F chain IGHV1-46*03 F Flu40 Light L51A5IGLV3-10*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01 F or IGLJ3*02 F Flu40 HeavyG51A5 IGHV4-34*01 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD5-24*01 ORF chain Flu41 Light L51B1IGLV3-25*03 F IGLJ1*01 F chain Flu41 Heavy G51B1 IGHV1-2*02 F IGHJ4*02 FIGHD3-10*01 F chain Flu43 Light L51D3 IGLV3-22*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chainFlu43 Heavy G51D3 IGHV4-39*01 F IGHJ3*02 F IGHD1-26*01 F chain Flu44Light L51D4 IGLV2-14*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain Flu44 Heavy G51D4 IGHV3-11*01F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD4-17*01 F chain Flu45 Light L52D4 IGLV2-14*01 FIGLJ3*02 F chain Flu45 Heavy G52D4 IGHV3-30-3*01 F IGHJ3*01 F, orIGHD6-19*01 F chain IGHJ3*02 F Flu46 Light L52H4 IGLV1-51*01 F IGLJ3*02F chain Flu46 Heavy G52H4 IGHV3-23*01 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-13*01 Fchain IGHV3-23*04 F S1 Light K3G4 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 F chain S1Heavy G3G4 IGHV3-53*02 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD2-21*01 F chain S2 Light K4C4IGKV2-28*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV2D-28*01 F S2 Heavy G4C4IGHV3-23*04 F IGHJ5*02 F IGHD6-19*01 F chain S3 Light K15C6 IGKV1-5*01 FIGKJ4*01 F chain S3 Heavy G15C6 IGHV3-7*01 F IGHJ1*01 F IGHD2-2*01 Fchain S4 Light K15G1 IGKV1-6*01 F IGKJ1*01 F chain S4 Heavy G15G1IGHV3-7*03 F IGHJ3*02 F IGHD6-13*01 F chain S5 Light K17C3 IGKV1-39*01F, or IGKJ2*02 F chain IGKV1D-39*01 F S5 Heavy G17C3 IGHV1-8*02 FIGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-16*01 F chain S6 Light K3E11 IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ1*01 Fchain S6 Heavy G3E11 IGHV3-30*04 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chainIGHV3-30-3*01 F S7 Light L4B8 IGLV2-8*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01F S7 Heavy G4B8 IGHV3-30*04 F, or IGHJ4*01 F, or IGHD5-18*01 F chainIGHV3-30*10 F IGHJ4*02 F S8 Light L4D2 IGLV2-23*01 F, or IGLJ3*02 Fchain IGLV2-23*03 F S8 Heavy G4D2 IGHV3-33*03 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD3-10*01 Fchain S9 Light L4D6 IGLV2-8*01 F IGLJ2*01 F, or chain IGLJ3*01 F S9Heavy G4D6 IGHV3-20*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD2-2*01 F chain S10 Light L4F4IGLV3-1*01 F IGLJ3*02 F chain S10 Heavy G4F4 IGHV4-59*01 F, or IGHJ4*02F IGHD3-3*01 F chain IGHV4-59*08 F S11 Light L15D1 IGLV8-61*01 FIGLJ3*02 F chain S11 Heavy G15D1 IGHV3-7*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-10*01 Fchain S12 Light L17C6 IGLV1-47*01 F, or IGLJ3*02 F chain IGLV1-47*02 FS12 Heavy G17C6 IGHV3-7*03 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD5-18*01 F chain S13 LightL17C9 IGLV7-46*01 F IGUJ3*02 F chain S13 Heavy G17C9 IGHV5-a*03 FIGHJ6*02 F IGHD6-13*01 F chain RA1 Light K11G5 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ5*01 Fchain RA1 Heavy G11G5 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chainIGHV3-30*18 F RA2 Light K22C7 IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ1*01 F chain RA2 HeavyG22C7 IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-25*01 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F RA3Light K26B1 IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ4*01 F chain RA3 Heavy G26B1 IGHV4-39*07 FIGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chain RA4 Light K26F5 IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ5*01F chain RA4 Heavy G26F5 IGHV3-23*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-19*01 F chain RA5Light K26H1 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ4*01 F chain RA5 Heavy G26H1 IGHV3-9*01 FIGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-13*01 F chain RA6 Light K40C5 IGKV1-39*01 F, orIGKJ3*01 F chain IGKV1D-39*01 F RA6 Heavy G40C5 IGHV3-30*04 F, orIGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-16*01 F chain IGHV3-30*08 F or IGHV3-30-3*01 F RA7Light K40G1 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ1*01 F chain RA7 Heavy G40G1 IGHV4-39*01 FIGHJ6*02 F IGHD2-15*01 F chain RA8 Light K40H4 IGKV1-33*01 F, orIGKJ4*01 F chain IGKV1D-33*01 F RA8 Heavy G40H4 IGHV1-2*02 F IGHJ5*02 FIGHD2-21*02 F chain RA9 Light K41A2 IGKV1-33*01 F, or IGKJ4*01 F chainIGKV1D-33*01 F RA9 Heavy G41A2 IGHV1-2*02 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD1-1*01 Fchain RA10 Light K47A2 IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ5*01 F chain RA10 Heavy G47A2IGHV3-23*01 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD6-19*01 F chain RA11 Light K47E2IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ5*01 F chain RA11 Heavy G47E2 IGHV3-23*01 F IGHJ4*02 FIGHD6-19*01 F chain RA12 Light K47F9 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ4*01 F chain RA12Heavy G47F9 IGHV4-39*02 F IGHJ3*02 F IGHD3-3*02 F chain RA13 LightL13B10 IGLV3-1*01 F IGLJ1*01 F chain RA13 Heavy G13B10 IGHV5-51*01 FIGHJ6*02 F IGHD6-25*01 F chain RA14 Light L13G5 IGLV3-1*01 F IGUJ1*01 Fchain RA14 Heavy G13G5 IGHV5-51*01 F IGHJ6*02 F IGHD6-25*01 F chain RA15Light K40D6 IGKV3-20*01 F IGKJ5*01 F chain RA15 Heavy G40D6 IGHV4-39*07F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD4-23*01 ORF chain RA16 Light K25D6 IGKV3-11*01 FIGKJ3*01 F chain RA16 Heavy G26D6 IGHV3-72*01 F IGHJ6*03 F IGHD4-17*01 Fchain RA17 Light K25E9 IGKV3-11*01 F IGKJ3*01 F chain RA17 Heavy G25E9IGHV3-30*03 F, or IGHJ5*02 F IGHD3-22*01 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F orIGHV3-33*05 F RA18 Light K25G4 IGKV1-27*01 F IGKJ2*03 F chain RA18 HeavyG25G4 IGHV3-30*09 F IGHJ4*02 F IGHD1-1*01 F chain RA19 Light K45D9IGKV3-15*01 F IGKJ1*01 F chain RA19 Heavy G45D9 IGHV3-30*03 F, orIGHJ4*02 F IGHD3-22*01 F chain IGHV3-30*18 F RA21 Light L13E11IGLV2-23*02 F IGLJ1*01 F chain RA21 Heavy G13E11 IGHV3-15*01 F IGHJ4*02F IGHD6-13*01 F chain RA22 Light L13G5 IGLV3-1*01 F IGUJ1*01 F chainRA22 Heavy G13G5 IGHV3-7*01 F IGHJ5*02 F IGHD5-12*01 F chain RA23 LightL44C5 IGLV2-23*01 F, or IGLJ1*01 F chain IGLV2-23*02 F or IGLV2-23*03 FRA23 Heavy G44C5 IGHV3-30*14 F IGHJ5*02 F IGHD7-27*01 F chain RA24 LightL44D6 IGLV2-23*01 F, or IGUJ1*01 F chain IGLV2-23*02 F or IGLV2-23*03 FRA24 Heavy G44D6 IGHV3-30*04 F IGHJ6*03 F IGHD3-10*01 F chain *VDJidentity as given by V-QUEST.

TABLE 19 antibodies used in Fluzone ELISA Antibody Chain Type CloneFlu14 Light chain L51A6 Flu14 Heavy chain G51A6 Flu15 Light chain L51C4Flu15 Heavy chain G51C4 Flu16 Light chain K51G11 Flu16 Heavy chainG51G11 Flu17 Light chain K49F7 Flu17 Heavy chain G49F7 Flu18 Light chainK51D7 Flu18 Heavy chain G51D7 Flu19 Light chain K51D8 Flu19 Heavy chainG51D8 Flu20 Light chain K51G10 Flu20 Heavy chain G51G10 Flu21 Lightchain L49A9 Flu21 Heavy chain G49A9 Flu22 Light chain L52A6 Flu22 Heavychain G52A6 Flu23 Light chain K49F11 Flu23 Heavy chain G49F11 Flu25Light chain K51H1 Flu25 Heavy chain G51H1 Flu26 Light chain K52A2 Flu26Heavy chain G52A2 Flu27 Light chain L49A11 Flu27 Heavy chain G49A11Flu29 Light chain L51H5 Flu29 Heavy chain G51H5 Flu30 Light chain L52 B8Flu30 Heavy chain G52B8 Flu33 Heavy chain G51E9 Flu34 Light chain L52G10Flu34 Heavy chain G52G10 Flu35 Light chain L53F10 Flu35 Heavy chainG53F10 Flu37 Light chain K51E8 Flu37 Heavy chain G51E8 Flu39 Light chainK53G7 Flu39 Heavy chain G53G7 Flu40 Light chain L51A5 Flu40 Heavy chainG51A5 Flu41 Light chain L51B1 Flu41 Heavy chain G51B1 Flu43 Light chainL51D3 Flu43 Heavy chain G51D3 Flu44 Light chain L51D4 Flu44 Heavy chainG51D4 Flu45 Light chain L52 D4 Flu45 Heavy chain G52D4 Flu46 Light chainL52H4 Flu46 Heavy chain G52H4 S1 Light chain K3G4 S1 Heavy chain G3G4 S2Light chain K4C4 S2 Heavy chain G4C4

TABLE 20 Antibodies used in surface plasmon resonance Antibody ChainType Clone Flu14 Light chain L51A6 Flu14 Heavy chain G51A6 Flu15 Lightchain L51C4 Flu15 Heavy chain G51C4 Flu16 Light chain K51G11 Flu16 Heavychain G51G11 Flu17 Light chain K49F7 Flu17 Heavy chain G49F7 Flu18 Lightchain K51D7 Flu18 Heavy chain G51D7 Flu19 Light chain K51D8 Flu19 Heavychain G51D8 Flu20 Light chain K51G10 Flu20 Heavy chain G51G10 Flu21Light chain L49A9 Flu21 Heavy chain G49A9 Flu22 Light chain L52A6 Flu22Heavy chain G52A6 Flu26 Light chain K52A2 Flu26 Heavy chain G52A2 Flu29Light chain L51H5 Flu29 Heavy chain G51H5 Flu34 Light chain L52G10 Flu34Heavy chain G52G10 Flu35 Light chain L53F10 Flu35 Heavy chain G53F10Flu46 Light chain L52H4 Flu46 Heavy chain G52H4

TABLE 21 Antibodies used in RA antigen array Antibody Chain Type CloneRA1 Light chain K11G5 RA1 Heavy chain G11G5 RA2 Light chain K22C7 RA2Heavy chain G22C7 RA4 Light chain K26F5 RA4 Heavy chain G26F5 RA5 Lightchain K26H1 RA5 Heavy chain G26H1 RA8 Light chain K40H4 RA8 Heavy chainG40H4 RA9 Light chain K41A2 RA9 Heavy chain G41A2 RA10 Light chain K47A2RA10 Heavy chain G47A2 RA11 Light chain K47E2 RA11 Heavy chain G47E2RA12 Light chain K47F9 RA12 Heavy chain G47F9 RA13 Light chain L13B10RA13 Heavy chain G13B10 RA16 Light chain K25D6 RA16 Heavy chain G26D6RA19 Light chain K45D9 RA19 Heavy chain G45D9 RA22 Light chain L13G5RA22 Heavy chain G13G5 RA23 Light chain L44C5 RA23 Heavy chain G44C5Flu14 Light chain L51A6 Flu14 Heavy chain G51A6 Flu26 Light chain K52A2Flu26 Heavy chain G52A2

TABLE 22 Antibodies used in Histone 2A ELISA and CCP ELISA AntibodyChain Type Clone RA1 Light chain K11G5 RA1 Heavy chain G11G5 RA2 Lightchain K22C7 RA2 Heavy chain G22C7 RA4 Light chain K26F5 RA4 Heavy chainG26F5 RA5 Light chain K26H1 RA5 Heavy chain G26H1 RA6 Light chain K40C5RA6 Heavy chain G40C5 RA7 Light chain K40G1 RA7 Heavy chain G40G1 RA8Light chain K40H4 RA8 Heavy chain G40H4 RA9 Light chain K41A2 RA9 Heavychain G41A2 RA10 Light chain K47A2 RA10 Heavy chain G47A2 RA11 Lightchain K47E2 RA11 Heavy chain G47E2 RA12 Light chain K47F9 RA12 Heavychain G47F9 RA13 Light chain L13B10 RA13 Heavy chain G13B10 RA16 Lightchain K25D6 RA16 Heavy chain G26D6 RA17 Light chain K25E9 RA17 Heavychain G25E9 RA18 Light chain K25G4 RA18 Heavy chain G25G4 RA19 Lightchain K45D9 RA19 Heavy chain G45D9 RA22 Light chain L13G5 RA22 Heavychain G13G5 RA23 Light chain L44C5 RA23 Heavy chain G44C5 RA24 Lightchain L44D6 RA24 Heavy chain G44D6

TABLE 23 Antibodies used in RF ELISA Antibody Chain Type Clone RA1 Lightchain K11G5 RA1 Heavy chain G11G5 RA2 Light chain K22C7 RA2 Heavy chainG22C7 RA4 Light chain K26F5 RA4 Heavy chain G26F5 RA5 Light chain K26H1RA5 Heavy chain G26H1 RA6 Light chain K40C5 RA6 Heavy chain G40C5 RA8Light chain K40H4 RA8 Heavy chain G40H4 RA9 Light chain K41A2 RA9 Heavychain G41A2 RA10 Light chain K47A2 RA10 Heavy chain G47A2 RA11 Lightchain K47E2 RA11 Heavy chain G47E2 RA12 Light chain K47F9 RA12 Heavychain G47F9 RA14 Light chain L13G5 RA14 Heavy chain G13G5

TABLE 24 Antibodies used in lung cancer Tissue IHC and flow cytometry oflung cancer cell lines Antibody Chain Type Clone LC1 Light chain K8B8LC1 Heavy chain G8B8 LC5 Light chain K10G5 LC5 Heavy chain G10G5 LC6Light chain K8D6 LC6 Heavy chain G10H2 LC7 Light chain L8D9 LC7 Heavychain G8D9 LC9 Light chain L10A1 LC9 Heavy chain G10A1 LC10 Light chainK9C11 LC10 Heavy chain G9C11 LC11 Light chain L10A6 LC11 Heavy chainG10A6 LC12 Light chain L9C9 LC12 Heavy chain G9C9 LC13 Light chain L9B1LC13 Heavy chain G9B1 LC14 Light chain L9A1 LC14 Heavy chain G9A1 LC15Light chain K10A9 LC15 Heavy chain G10A9 LC16 Light chain K10D2 LC16Heavy chain G10D2 LC17 Light chain K8D5 LC17 Heavy chain G8D5 LC18 Lightchain L10D5 LC18 Heavy chain G10D5 Flu14 Light chain L51A6 Flu14 Heavychain G51A6

TABLE 25 Antibodies used in S. aureus surface staining Antibody ChainType Clone S1 Light chain K3G4 S1 Heavy chain G3G4 S2 Light chain K4C4S2 Heavy chain G4C4 S3 Light chain K15C6 S3 Heavy chain G15C6 S4 Lightchain K15G1 S4 Heavy chain G15G1 S6 Light chain K3E11 S6 Heavy chainG3E11 S7 Light chain L4B8 S7 Heavy chain G4B8 S8 Light chain L4D2 S8Heavy chain G4D2 S9 Light chain L4D6 S9 Heavy chain G4D6 S10 Light chainL4F4 S10 Heavy chain G4F4 S11 Light chain L15D1 S11 Heavy chain G15D1S12 Light chain L17C6 S12 Heavy chain G17C6 S13 Light chain L17C9 S13Heavy chain G17C9 Flu14 Light chain L51A6 Flu14 Heavy chain G51A6 Flu26Light chain K52A2 Flu26 Heavy chain G52A2

TABLE 26 Antibodies used in microneutralization assay Antibody ChainType Clone Flu15 Light chain L51C4 Flu15 Heavy chain G51C4 Flu16 Lightchain K51G11 Flu16 Heavy chain G51G11 Flu18 Light chain K51D7 Flu18Heavy chain G51D7 Flu19 Light chain K51D8 Flu19 Heavy chain G51D8 Flu20Light chain K51G10 Flu20 Heavy chain G51G10 Flu21 Light chain L49A9Flu21 Heavy chain G49A9

TABLE 27 antibodies used in staph inhibition assay Antibody Chain TypeClone S6 Light chain K3E11 S6 Heavy chain G3E11 S9 Light chain L4D6 S9Heavy chain G4D6 LC1 Light chain K8B8 LC1 Heavy chain G8B8

TABLE 28 antibodies used in staph IP Antibody Chain Type Clone S1 Lightchain K3G4 S1 Heavy chain G3G4 S2 Light chain K4C4 S2 Heavy chain G4C4S3 Light chain K15C6 S3 Heavy chain G15C6 S4 Light chain K15G1 S4 Heavychain G15G1 S5 Light chain K17C3 S5 Heavy chain G17C3 S6 Light chainK3E11 S6 Heavy chain G3E11 S7 Light chain L4B8 S7 Heavy chain G4B8 S8Light chain L4D2 S8 Heavy chain G4D2 S9 Light chain L4D6 S9 Heavy chainG4D6 S10 Light chain L4F4 S10 Heavy chain G4F4 S11 Light chain L15D1 S11Heavy chain G15D1 S12 Light chain L17C6 S12 Heavy chain G17C6 S13 Lightchain L17C9 S13 Heavy chain G17C9 Flu14 Light chain L51A6 Flu14 Heavychain G51A6

TABLE 29 Antibody used in staph mass spec Antibody Chain Type Clone S4Light chain K15G1 S4 Heavy chain G15G1

TABLE 30 Name Sequence RT oligo CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTTAGTTAATTAA[sampleID]AGCGATCGCTG GG (SEQ ID NO: 796619) RT oligo′CTAAATCGAGCACCGGTCGTGTGGG (SEQ ID NO: 796620) Fwd Primer (for kappaCGATTGGAGGGCGTTATCCAC chain) (SEQ ID NO: 796062) Fwd Primer (for lambdaTYTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC chain) (SEQ ID NO: 796063)

TABLE 31 Name Sequence RT oligo CACGACCGGTGCTCGATTT AGTTAATTAA[sample-ID]AGCGATCGCTGGG (SEQ ID NO: 796619) Overlap-extensionCGTATCGCTCCTAGGAGCG primer ATACGCACGACCGGTGCTC GATTTAGLC Primer (for kappa CGATTGGAGGGCGTTATCCAC chain) (SEQ ID NO: 796062)LC Primer (for lambda TYTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC chain) (SEQ ID NO: 796063)HC Primer TCTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGC TG (SEQ ID NO: 796350)

TABLE 32 Name Sequence RT oligo CGTATCGCTCCTAGGAGC GATACGTTAATTAA[sample-ID]AGCGATC GCTGGG (SEQ ID NO: 796621) LC PrimerCGATTGGAGGGCGTTATCCAC (for kappa chain)  (SEQ ID NO: 796062)LC Primer (for TYTGTGGGACTTCCACTGCTC lambda chain)  (SEQ ID NO: 796063)HC Primer TCTTGTCCACCTTGGTGTTGC TG (SEQ ID NO: 796350)

TABLE 33 Name Sequence Univ_seq_2 AACGCGTGACGAGAGACTGACAG(SEQ ID NO:796319) VK ATGAGGSTCCCYGCTCAGCTGCTG G (SEQ ID NO: 796622) VLGGTCCTGGGCCCAGTCTGCCCTG (SEQ ID NO: 796623) IgKC_v3_AGGCCCTTACGACTGCGTCTTG AACAATAC barcoded CAGATGGCGGGAAGATGAAGAC(SEQ ID NO: 796624) IgLC_v5_ AGGCCCTTACGACTGCGTCTTGAACAATAC barcodedCTCCCGGGTAGAAGTCAC (SEQ ID NO: 796625) Fixed_PCR3 AGGCCCTTACGACTGCGTCTTG(SEQ ID NO: 796626)

TABLE 34 Co-expressed genes associated with B cell differentiation intomemory B cells, short-lived plasma cell, long-lived plasma cells andantibody secreting cells. Generation of Generation of Antibody-Generation of short-lived long-lived secreting memory B cells plasmacells plasma cells cells PAX-5 Blimp-1 Blimp-1 SLC7A7 CD36Microphthalmia- X-box binding X-box binding IL6R BCL2L1 assoc. protein 1(XBP-1) protein 1 (XBP-1) RPN2 IL21R transcription IRF-4 IRF-4 PDIA4IKZF1 factor (MITF) BCMA HD IG 2 BACH

TABLE 35 Co-expressed genes associated with T cell differentiation intoTreg, Th1, Th2, Th17 cells. Generation of Generation of Generation ofGeneration of Th1 Th2 Th17 Tregs T-bet Gata-3 RORγt FoxP3 GITR

TABLE 36 Co-expressed genes associated with plasmablast homing tospecific tissues. Homing of Homing of plasmablasts to plasmablasts toHoming of plasmablasts the small intesting mucosal tissues to skin CCR9CCR10 cutaneous lymphocyte- associated antigen (CLA) α4β7

GENERAL REFERENCES

-   Burbelo, P. D., S. K. Browne, et al. (2010). “Anti-cytokine    autoantibodies are associated with opportunistic infection in    patients with thymic neoplasia.” Blood 116(23): 4848-4858.-   Hua, J., K. Kirou, et al. (2006). “Functional assay of type I    interferon in systemic lupus erythematosus plasma and association    with anti-RNA binding protein autoantibodies.” Arthritis Rheum    54(6): 1906-1916.-   May, L. T., R. Neta, et al. (1993). “Antibodies chaperone    circulating IL-6. Paradoxical effects of anti-IL-6 “neutralizing”    antibodies in vivo.” J Immunol 151(6): 3225-3236.-   Mostbock, S. (2009). “Cytokine/Antibody complexes: an emerging class    of immunostimulants.” Curr Pharm Des 15(7): 809-825.-   Robinson, W. H., C. DiGennaro, et al. (2002). “Autoantigen    microarrays for multiplex characterization of autoantibody    responses.” Nat Med 8(3): 295-301.-   Watanabe, M., K. Uchida, et al. (2007). “Anti-cytokine    autoantibodies are ubiquitous in healthy individuals.” FEBS Lett    581(10): 2017-2021.-   Wildbaum, G., M. A. Nahir, et al. (2003). “Beneficial autoimmunity    to proinflammatory mediators restrains the consequences of    self-destructive immunity.” Immunity 19(5): 679-688.-   Wrammert, J., K. Smith, et al. (2008). “Rapid cloning of    high-affinity human monoclonal antibodies against influenza virus.”    Nature 453(7195): 667-671.

1-385. (canceled)
 386. A method for producing one or morepolynucleotides of interest, comprising: obtaining a polynucleotidecomposition library comprising a plurality of compositions, wherein eachcomposition is present in a separate container, wherein each compositioncomprises a single sample-derived cDNA region comprising a variableregion, wherein each composition comprises a sample identificationregion, wherein the nucleotide sequence of each sample identificationregion is distinct from the nucleotide sequence of the sampleidentification region of the other sample identification regions presentin each separate container in the library, and wherein the sampleidentification region is attached to the cDNA region; and amplifying thepolynucleotide library with a set of primers to produce the one or morepolynucleotides of interest.
 387. The method of claim 386, furthercomprising: sequencing the one or more polynucleotides of interest; andselecting one or more polynucleotides of interest.
 388. The method ofclaim 386, wherein the set of primers comprises one or more 3′ genespecific primers and, optionally, a 5′ universal primer.
 389. The methodof claim 386, wherein the cDNA region is attached to the sampleidentification region by an adapter region.
 390. The method of claim389, wherein the adapter region comprises the nucleotide dG at its 3′end and the cDNA region comprises the nucleotide C at its 3′ end. 391.The method of claim 390, wherein the adapter region is attached to thecDNA region by binding between the C and dG.
 392. The method of claim386, wherein the variable region is a B cell immunoglobulin variableregion.
 393. The method of claim 386, wherein the variable region is a Tcell receptor variable region.
 394. The method of claim 386, whereineach composition further comprises a universal primer region attached tothe sample identification region, and wherein the universal primerregion is substantially identical in each separate container.
 395. Themethod of claim 386, wherein the single sample comprises a plurality ofB cells, a single B cell and one or more other cells, a single B cell,or a single T cell.
 396. The method of claim 395, wherein the single Bcell is a single plasmablast.
 397. A method for analyzing sequencingdata, comprising: obtaining a dataset associated with a plurality ofpolynucleotides, wherein the dataset comprises sequencing data for theplurality of polynucleotides, wherein each polynucleotide in theplurality of polynucleotides comprises a sample identification region,and wherein each sample identification region on each polynucleotide isunique to a single sample, wherein the sequence of the sampleidentification region of each polynucleotide from a first single sampleis distinct from the sequence of the sample identification region of theother polynucleotides in the plurality of polynucleotides from one ormore samples distinct from the first single sample; and analyzing, by acomputer, the dataset to match together data associated withpolynucleotides with identical sample identification regions, wherein amatch indicates that the polynucleotides originated from the samesample. 398-433. (canceled)
 434. The method of claim 386, wherein eachcomposition comprising the single sample-derived cDNA region comprisescDNA molecules that encode (a) cognate pairs of immunoglobulin heavy andlight chain variable regions, or (b) cognate pairs of T cell receptoralpha and beta chain sequences.
 435. The method of claim 434, where eachcDNA encoding the cognate pair independently comprises an identicalsample identification region. 436-440. (canceled)
 441. The method ofclaim 397, wherein one or both polynucleotides comprise a variableregion.
 442. The method of claim 397, wherein obtaining the datasetcomprises obtaining the plurality of polynucleotides and sequencing theplurality of polynucleotides to experimentally determine the dataset.443. The method of claim 397, wherein obtaining the dataset comprisesreceiving the dataset directly or indirectly from a third party that hassequenced the plurality of polynucleotides to experimentally determinethe dataset.
 444. The method of claim 397, wherein the single sample isa single cell or comprises a single cell.
 445. The method of claim 397,wherein the single sample comprises a plurality of B cells, a single Bcell and one or more other cells, a single B cell, or a single T cell.446. The method of claim 397, wherein one or both polynucleotides encode(a) cognate pairs of immunoglobulin heavy and light chain variableregions, or (b) cognate pairs of T cell receptor alpha and beta chainsequences.